JP7354024B2 - gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player based on a display result of a variable display becoming a specific display result.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, gaming machines are known that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player based on a display result of a variable display becoming a specific display result. For example, Patent Document 1 discloses a gaming machine that controls a jackpot game to be executable based on seven symbols being stopped and displayed on a decorative symbol display device.

Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2014-147575

According to the gaming machine described above, during execution of the jackpot start performance, a right-hitting instruction is given to prompt the player to fire the game ball to the right by operating the ball firing handle. There is still room for improvement regarding instructions that prompt the player to shoot the game ball in a predetermined direction.

The present invention was devised in view of the above circumstances, and its purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can suitably execute an instruction urging a player to shoot a game ball in a predetermined direction. be.

(A) A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result,
a firing means capable of firing game media according to a player's operation;
A guide display means for displaying a guide prompting the player to fire the game medium toward the second region of the first region and the second region;
a guide light emitting means that emits a guide light to prompt the player to fire the game medium toward the second area by moving a light emitting part of the light emitting means;
Display means capable of moving and displaying a pseudo movable body display from a first display position to a second display position different from the first display position;
a movable body that is movable from a first position to a second position different from the first position;
A performance execution means capable of performing the performance,
a state control means capable of controlling a special state more advantageous than the normal state after the control of the advantageous state is completed ;
The guide display includes a first guide display and a second guide display,
The guide display means includes:
During a predetermined period in which a start effect regarding the start of control of the advantageous state is being executed based on the display result of the variable display becoming the specific display result in the normal state , the start effect is a part of the start effect. Displaying the second guidance during a first predetermined period before the display of the name of the advantageous state is completed;
performing the first guide display and the second guide display in a second predetermined period after completion of displaying the name of the advantageous state during the predetermined period and after the first predetermined period;
In a period after the predetermined period, the first guidance display is terminated while the second guidance display is performed;
Displaying the second guidance in the special state after the control of the advantageous state is completed;
not performing the first guide display when the start effect is being executed based on the display result of the variable display becoming the specific display result in the special state;
The guide light emitting means is configured to emit the light when executing the first guide display when the start effect is executed based on the display result of the variable display becoming the specific display result in the normal state. After extinguishing the means, emitting the guide light,
The performance execution means is
A pseudo movable body display effect can be performed in which the pseudo movable body display is moved and displayed from the first display position to the second display position;
It is characterized by
Furthermore, (1) the gaming machine is capable of controlling to an advantageous state advantageous to the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result,
a firing means capable of firing a game medium into a game area according to a player's operation;
A guidance display that uses an image display to prompt the player to launch the gaming medium toward the second downstream path of the first downstream path and the second downstream path through which the gaming medium can flow down in the gaming area. and a guide display means for
The guide display includes a first guide display and a second guide display,
The guide display means includes:
During a predetermined period after the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, before the display of the name of the advantageous state is completed, which is part of the start effect to notify the start of control of the advantageous state, performing a second guidance display, and after completing the display of the name of the advantageous state, performing the first guidance display and continuing the second guidance display;
Continuing the second guidance display while ending the first guidance display in a period after the predetermined period;
Continuing the second guidance display in the special state after the control of the advantageous state has ended;
moreover,
The display means is capable of moving and displaying the pseudo movable body display from a first display position to a second display position different from the first display position,
a movable body movable from a first position to a second position different from the first position;
A performance execution means capable of performing the performance,
Equipped with
The performance execution means is
a pseudo movable body display effect that moves and displays the pseudo movable body display from the first display position to the second display position;
a movable body effect that moves the movable body from the first position to the second position;
is executable,
It is better to perform the movable body performance and the pseudo movable body display performance in a predetermined period by the performance execution means, and to display the pseudo movable body without executing the movable body performance in the predetermined period. The ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher than when the body display performance is executed;
It is characterized by

According to this feature, it is possible to suitably execute an instruction urging the player to shoot the game ball in a predetermined direction. Furthermore, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the fact that the movable body effect and the pseudo movable body display effect are executed.

Further, the embodiments for carrying out the invention described below include the invention related to the gaming machine (A) below. Conventionally, in gaming machines, it has been possible to perform performances using movable bodies that can be operated, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2019-92949, and by moving and displaying a pseudo movable body display, There were some that made it possible to perform a performance similar to that of moving a movable body. However, in such gaming machines, there is a problem in that the pseudo-movable objects are simply moved and displayed in the same way as the movable objects, and it is not possible to increase the interest of the performance. There is a need to provide a gaming machine that can enhance the interest of the display.

The gaming machine described in means (A) is
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
Display means capable of moving and displaying a pseudo movable body display from a first display position to a second display position different from the first display position;
a movable body that is movable from a first position to a second position different from the first position;
A performance execution means capable of performing the performance,
Equipped with
The performance execution means is
a pseudo movable body display effect that moves and displays the pseudo movable body display from the first display position to the second display position;
a movable body effect that moves the movable body from the first position to the second position;
is executable,
It is better to perform the movable body performance and the pseudo movable body display performance in a predetermined period by the performance execution means, and to display the pseudo movable body without executing the movable body performance in the predetermined period. The ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher than when the body display performance is executed.
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the fact that the movable body effect and the pseudo movable body display effect are being executed.

Note that this invention may have only the matters specifying the invention stated in the claims of this invention, or it may have configurations other than the matters specifying the invention together with the matters specifying the invention stated in the claims of this invention. It may be something that you have.

FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 2 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in the pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of game control main processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol process processing. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control process processing. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to a feature of the present embodiment. It is an explanatory view showing a frame lamp. It is an explanatory view showing a special figure LED board and a 4th pattern unit. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in the pachinko game machine. FIG. 2 is a front view of the image display device. It is an explanatory diagram showing a hit type table. It is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. It is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot determination table and a jackpot type determination table. It is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the production control command. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol normal processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a variation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol variation processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol stop processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of jackpot opening pre-processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process during jackpot opening. It is a flowchart showing an example of jackpot release post-processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of jackpot termination processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of production processing during jackpot. It is a timing chart showing an example of processing during winning fluctuation. It is a timing chart showing an example of processing during a jackpot. It is a timing chart showing an example of processing after the end of the jackpot. It is an explanatory view showing a lighting mode of a lamp. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the performance mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the performance mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the performance mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the performance mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the performance mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the performance mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the performance mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the performance mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the performance mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the performance mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the performance mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. It is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a parent table in a lighting data table. It is an explanatory view showing an example of a child table in a lighting data table. It is an explanatory view showing an example of a grandchild table in a lighting data table. It is an explanatory view showing an example of a grandchild table in a lighting data table. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the performance mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the performance mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the performance mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the performance mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the performance mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the performance mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the performance mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the performance mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the performance mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the performance mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the performance mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the performance mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the performance mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. It is an explanatory view showing a performance mode of the pachinko game machine when the pachinko game machine recovers from a power outage during a fanfare performance due to one winning special figure. It is an explanatory view showing the production mode of the pachinko game machine when the game machine recovers from a power outage during one round of jackpot at the time of winning one special figure. It is an explanatory view showing the performance mode of the pachinko game machine when the pachinko game machine recovers from a power outage between rounds after the first round of jackpot when the player wins the special figure 1. It is an explanatory view showing the presentation mode of the pachinko game machine when the game machine returns from a power outage during the second round of the jackpot at the time of winning the first special drawing. It is an explanatory view showing the performance mode of the pachinko game machine when the pachinko game machine recovers from a power outage between rounds after the second round of the jackpot when the special figure 1 is won. It is an explanatory view showing the presentation mode of the pachinko game machine when the pachinko game machine recovers from a power outage between rounds after the third round of the jackpot at the time of winning the special figure 1. It is an explanatory view showing the presentation mode of the pachinko game machine when the game machine recovers from a power outage during the fourth round of the jackpot at the time of winning the first special drawing. It is an explanatory view showing the performance mode of the pachinko game machine when the pachinko game machine recovers from a power outage between rounds after the fourth round of jackpot when the special figure 1 is won. It is an explanatory view showing the production mode of the pachinko game machine when the game machine returns from a power outage during the final round of the jackpot when the special figure 1 is won. It is an explanatory diagram showing a performance mode of the pachinko game machine when the pachinko game machine recovers from a power outage during the ending performance at the time of winning the special figure 1. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table. It is a diagram showing the numerical range of the jackpot and the numerical range of the loss with the time saving in the variable display of the first special figure in the normal state or the time saving state. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a front view showing a pachinko game machine as a characteristic part 241SG. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in the pachinko game machine as a characteristic part 241SG. (A) and (B) are diagrams illustrating production control commands. It is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing display result determination table 1, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing display result determination table 2. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of a jackpot type determination table, and (B) is a diagram showing the contents of various jackpots. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a variation pattern. (A) and (B) are explanatory diagrams showing the relationship between variable display results and variation patterns. It is a diagram showing execution periods of various performances in normal reach and super reach. It is a diagram for explaining the content and structure of various performances in Super Reach. It is a diagram showing the jackpot expectation degree according to the execution status of the advanced presentation A and the advanced presentation B. It is an explanatory diagram showing an outline of the development flow of a pachinko gaming machine. (A) is a diagram showing a movement mode of the movable mounting body, and (B) is a diagram illustrating a situation in which the movable mounting body is lifted. (A) is a diagram showing a moving display mode of the first pseudo movable body display, and (B) is a diagram showing a moving mode of the first non-mounted movable body. (A) is a diagram showing a movement display mode of the second pseudo movable object display, and (B) is a diagram showing a movement mode of the second non-mounted movable body. (A) is a movable range of a mounted movable body, (B) is a diagram showing a movable display area of a first pseudo movable body display, and (C) is a diagram showing a movable display area of a second pseudo movable body display. (A) is a diagram showing a specific moving display area of the first pseudo movable body display, and (B) is a diagram showing a specific moving display area of the second pseudo movable body display. 3 is a flowchart showing variable display start setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows preview performance type determination processing. (A) is a diagram showing a table for determining the type of preview performance A, and (B) is a diagram showing a table for determining the type of preview performance B. (A) is a flowchart showing advanced performance A type determination processing, and (B) is a diagram showing a table for determining advanced performance A type. (A) is a flowchart showing the advanced suggestion performance type determination process, and (B) is a diagram showing a table for determining the advanced suggestion performance type. (A) is a flowchart showing advanced performance B type determination processing, and (B) is a diagram showing a table for determining advanced performance B type. (A) is a flowchart showing a fixed performance type determination process, and (B) is a diagram showing a fixed performance type determination table. (A) to (H) are diagrams showing examples of performance operations mainly in normal reach of super reach β. (A) to (J) are diagrams mainly showing examples of performance operations in weak super reach. (A) to (F) are also diagrams showing examples of performance operations in weak super reach. (A) to (D) are diagrams mainly showing examples of performance operations in strong super reach. (E) to (J) are diagrams showing examples of performance operations of strong super reach performance. (A) to (F) are diagrams showing examples of production operations after notification of jackpot confirmation. (A) to (D) are diagrams showing details of movement display of the first pseudo movable body display. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing the relationship between a light emitting display section and a mounted movable body LED. (A) to (F) are diagrams illustrating an example of performance operation of preview performance B in super reach γ. (A) to (F) are diagrams illustrating an example of performance operation of preview performance B in super reach γ. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram for comparing a pseudo movable body display and a mounted movable body. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram for comparing a pseudo movable body display and a mounted movable body. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram for comparing a pseudo movable body display and a mounted movable body. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram for comparing a pseudo movable body display and a mounted movable body. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram for comparing a pseudo movable body display and a mounted movable body. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram for comparing a first pseudo movable body display and a second pseudo movable body display. (A) to (D) are diagrams showing a first modification of the characteristic portion 241SG. (A) to (H) are diagrams showing a second modification of the characteristic portion 241SG. (A) to (C) are diagrams showing a third modification of the characteristic portion 241SG.

<Basic explanation>
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be explained.

[Configuration of pachinko machine 1, etc.]
FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine 1, showing the layout of the main components. A pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly divided into a game board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes a game board surface, and a game machine frame (base frame) 3 that supports and fixes the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is fired from a predetermined ball launcher into this game area.

Note that "variable display" of special symbols means, for example, displaying a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). The variations include updated display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement/reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols described below, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative patterns described later, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scrolled or updated, or one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that the variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed blinking. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). Note that the variable display may be expressed as a variable display or fluctuation.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as a “first special symbol” or “first special symbol,” and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as a “first special symbol.” It is also called ``2nd special pattern'' or ``2nd special pattern.'' Further, a special map game using the first special map is also referred to as a "first special map game", and a special map game using the second special map is also referred to as a "second special map game". Note that there may be only one type of special symbol display device that performs variable display of special symbols.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display) or an organic EL (electro luminescence), and displays various effect images. The image display device 5 may include a projector and a screen. The image display device 5 displays various effect images.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special pattern game and the second special pattern game, decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers, etc.) as multiple types of decorative identification information different from the special patterns are displayed. A variable display is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, decorative figures are displayed variably (for example, up and down direction (scroll display and update display). In addition, the variable display of the special figure game and the decorative pattern which are executed synchronously is collectively referred to as simply variable display.

A display area may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5 for displaying a pending display corresponding to a variable display whose execution is pending, and an active display corresponding to a variable display currently being executed. The pending display and the active display are collectively referred to as a variable display compatible display corresponding to the variable display.

The number of pending variable displays is also called the number of pending memories. The number of pending memories corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as the first number of pending memories, and the number of pending memories corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as the second number of pending memories. The sum of the first number of pending memories and the second number of pending memories is also referred to as the total number of pending memories.

A first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B each including a plurality of LEDs are provided at predetermined positions on the game board 2. The first hold display 25A displays the number of first hold memories based on the number of lit LEDs. The second hold display 25B displays the second hold storage number based on the number of lit LEDs.

A winning ball device 6A is provided below the image display device 5, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided on the right side of the winning ball device 6A.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning hole which is always kept in a constant open state into which game balls can enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first starting winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of winning balls are paid out, and the first special symbol game can be started.

The variable prize winning ball device 6B (normal electric accessory) forms a second starting prize opening that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 3). The variable prize winning ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip type accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and when the solenoid 81 is in the OFF state, the movable wing pieces are in a vertical position, so that the tips of the movable wing pieces are comes close to the winning ball device 6A, and enters a closed state in which the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening enters a closed state). On the other hand, when the solenoid 81 is in the ON state, the movable wing pieces of the variable winning ball device 6B are in the tilted position, so that the variable winning ball device 6B enters an open state in which the game ball can enter the second starting winning hole (second starting winning ball). It is also said that the prize opening will be open.) When the game ball enters the second starting prize opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the second special figure game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that can change between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to one that includes an electric tulip type accessory.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, three locations on the lower left side of the game area and one location above the variable winning ball device 6B), there are always kept in a constant open state by predetermined ball receiver members. A general prize opening 10 is provided. In this case, when entering any of the general winning holes 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7 having a big winning hole is provided between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7 is equipped with a big winning hole door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 3), and has a big winning hole as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the big winning hole door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning hole door (special electric accessory) is in the OFF state, the big winning hole door closes the big winning hole, and the game ball is You will not be able to enter (pass through) the prize opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning hole door is in the on state, the big winning hole door opens the big winning hole so that the game ball can easily enter the big winning hole. Become.

When game balls enter the grand prize opening, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When the game ball enters the big winning hole, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters the first starting winning hole, the second starting winning hole, and the general winning hole 10, for example.

Entering the game ball into each winning hole including the general winning hole 10 is also referred to as "winning". In particular, winning in the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, at the lower left of the game area). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED, etc., and performs variable display of normal symbols as multiple types of normal identification information different from special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off. This variable display of ordinary symbols is also called a ordinary symbol game.

A passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided on the right side of the image display device 5. Based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41, a common figure game is executed.

A normal symbol holding display 25C is provided below the normal symbol display 20. The Fuzu-zu pending display 25C includes, for example, four LEDs, and displays the Fuzu-zu pending storage number, which is the number of Fuzu games whose execution is suspended, by the number of lit LEDs.

In addition to the above structure, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill that changes the downward direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the gaming area, there is provided an out opening into which game balls that have not entered any of the winning openings are taken in.

At the left and right upper positions of the gaming machine frame 3, speakers 8L and 8R are provided for reproducing sound effects and the like. A main lamp 9a is provided above the image display device 5 in the gaming machine frame 3, and frame lamps 9b are provided on the left and right sides of the main lamp 9a so as to surround the gaming area. Furthermore, an attacker lamp 9c is provided at a position near the special variable winning ball device 7 on the game board 2.

A movable body 32 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (a position above the image display device 5 in FIG. 1) that operates according to the performance. Further, the movable body 32 is provided with a movable body lamp 9d. The movable lamp 9d, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, and the attacker lamp 9c described above may be collectively referred to as a game effect lamp 9. Note that the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, and movable lamp 9d include LEDs.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 is provided which is operated by a player or the like in order to fire a game ball toward a gaming area using a ball-launching device.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, game balls paid out as prize balls and game balls lent out by a predetermined ball rental machine are held (stored) so that they can be supplied to the batted ball firing device. ) is provided with a batted ball supply tray (upper tray). In addition, the gaming machine frame 3 may be provided with a payout section (hitting ball supply tray) apart from the upper tray from which prize balls are paid out when the upper tray is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed down by the player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by a controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 3).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a push button 31B is provided that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by pressing the button or the like. An operation on push button 31B is detected by push sensor 35B (see FIG. 3).

In the pachinko game machine 1, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting a player's actions (operations, etc.), but detection means other than these may be provided.

FIG. 2 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 1. A main board 11 housed in a board case 201 is mounted on the back of the pachinko game machine 1. The main board 11 is provided with a setting key 51 and a setting changeover switch 52. The setting key 51 functions as a lock switch for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state. The setting changeover switch 52 functions as a setting switch for changing set values such as jackpot winning probability and ball payout rate in a setting change state. The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 may be attached to the outside of the main board 11, such as at a predetermined position on the power supply board 17, for example.

A display monitor 29 is arranged at the center of the back surface of the main board 11, and a display changeover switch 30 is arranged at the side of the display monitor 29. The display monitor 29 may be configured using, for example, a 7-segment LED display device. The display monitor 29 and the display changeover switch 30 are arranged in front of the main board 11 when the back side of the game board 2 is viewed with the gaming machine frame 3 open.

The display monitor 29 can display winning information such as consecutive ratios, winning ratios, and bases. The consecutive ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls that land in the big prize opening (attacker) out of the total number of prize balls. The winning ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls that land in the second starting prize opening (electronic chew) to the number of prize balls that land in the big prize opening (attacker) out of the total number of prize balls. The base is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of game balls launched. When in the setting change state or setting confirmation state, the display monitor 29 can display the setting values in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The display monitor 29 only needs to be capable of displaying setting values to be changed or checked when the settings are changed or checked.

The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the gaming machine frame 3 is in a closed state. The gaming machine frame 3 is rotatably provided with a glass door frame 3a having a glass window, and the gaming area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 3a. When the glass door frame 3a is closed, the game area can be seen through the glass window.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a security cover 50A is attached to the right end portion of the outer frame 1a formed in the shape of a vertically long rectangular frame. The security cover 50A covers the right side of the board case 201 including the setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 from the back side when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed. The security cover 50A is a substantially L-shaped member including a short piece 50Aa and a long piece 50Ab, and may be made of transparent synthetic resin.

[Outline of game progress]
When a player rotates a ball-hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko game machine 1, a game ball is launched toward a game area. When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal pattern display 20 starts the normal pattern game. In addition, if the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the period during which the previous Fuzu game was being executed (the game ball passed through the passage gate 41, but the Fuzu game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately), , the game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this general pattern game, if a specific normal pattern (a pattern per normal pattern) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal pattern becomes ``a common pattern hit''. On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the regular symbol (ordinary symbol losing symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed ordinary symbol, the display result of the ordinary symbol becomes "ordinary symbol losing". When it becomes a "normal map hit", opening control is performed to keep the variable winning ball device 6B open for a predetermined period of time (the second starting winning opening is brought into the open state).

When the game ball enters the first starting winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When a game ball enters the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, a second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, if the game ball enters the starting prize opening (wins) during the period when the special drawing game is being executed or during the period when it is controlled in the jackpot game state or small winning game state (described later) (the starting prize has occurred) If the special pattern game based on the starting prize cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special pattern game based on the entry is suspended until a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In a special pattern game, if a specific special pattern (a jackpot pattern, e.g. "7", the actual pattern differs depending on the jackpot type described later) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special pattern, it becomes a "jackpot" and the jackpot pattern If a predetermined special symbol (a small winning symbol, for example "2") different from the above is stopped and displayed, it becomes a "small winning". Further, if a special symbol (a losing symbol, for example, "-") different from the jackpot symbol or the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes a "loser".

After the display result in the special figure game becomes a "jackpot", the game is controlled to be in a jackpot game state as an advantageous state for the player. After the display result in the special figure game becomes a "small win", the game is controlled to a small win game state.

In the jackpot game state, the jackpot formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state is determined by the timing when a predetermined period of time (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) elapses, or the timing until the number of game balls that enter the grand prize opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9 balls). This will continue until the earliest of the two. The predetermined period is the upper limit period during which the big prize opening can be opened in one round, and hereinafter also referred to as the upper limit opening period. One cycle in which the big prize opening is opened in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeated until it reaches a predetermined upper limit number of times (15 or 2 times).

In the jackpot game state, the player can receive a prize ball by entering the game ball into the jackpot opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The greater the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

In addition, the jackpot type is set in "Jackpot". For example, we prepare multiple types of opening modes for the jackpot (number of rounds and upper limit opening period) and gaming states after the jackpot gaming state (normal state, time-saving state, variable probability state, etc.), and set the jackpot type accordingly. has been done. As the jackpot types, there may be provided a jackpot type in which many prize balls can be obtained, a jackpot type in which few prize balls can be obtained, or a jackpot type in which few prize balls can be obtained.

In the small winning game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening manner. For example, in the small winning gaming state, the opening mode is the same as the jackpot gaming state for some jackpot types (the number of openings of the big winning opening is the same as the number of rounds above, and the closing timing of the big winning opening is also the same). etc.), the big prize opening will be open. In addition, similar to the jackpot type, a small hit type may also be provided for "small hit".

After the jackpot gaming state ends, depending on the above-mentioned jackpot type, it may be controlled to a time saving state or a variable probability state.

In the time-saving state, control (time-saving control) is executed to shorten the average special symbol variation time (period for varying the special symbol) compared to the normal state. In the short time state, by shortening the average fluctuation time (period for changing the general pattern) than in the normal state, and by increasing the probability of hitting the normal pattern in the general drawing game compared to the normal state, Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for game balls to enter the second starting prize opening is also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols (especially the second special symbol) is improved, so it is an advantageous state for the player.

In the variable probability state (probability variable state), in addition to the time saving control, variable probability control is executed in which the probability that the displayed result is a "jackpot" is higher than in the normal state. The variable probability state is a state that is more advantageous to the player because it improves the efficiency of changing the special symbols and is also a state where it is easy to hit the jackpot.

The time saving state and the variable probability state continue until any one of the end conditions is met first, such as the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times and the start of the next jackpot game state. A condition where the termination condition is that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also referred to as a number-cutting (time-saving number-cutting, variable number-cutting probability, etc.).

A normal state is a game state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a time saving state, or a variable probability state, and the display result in the Fuzu game is "Fuzu hit". The pachinko game machine 1, such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special figure game will be a "jackpot", is set to the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, when the system is reset, a predetermined return after power is turned on). This state is controlled in the same way as when no processing is executed).

A state in which variable probability control is being executed is also referred to as a high probability state, and a state in which variable probability control is not executed is also referred to as a low probability state. A state in which time saving control is being executed is also referred to as a high base state, and a state in which time saving control is not being executed is also referred to as a low base state. Combining these, the time-saving state is also called a low-probability high-base state, the variable probability state is a high-probability high-base state, and the normal state is called a low-probability low-base state. The high certainty state and low base state is also referred to as the high certainty low base state.

After the small hit game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the display result of the special figure game continues to be controlled to the previous game state when it became a "small win" (However, if a "small win" occurs) If the special figure game of the hour is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times in the above-mentioned number cut, the game state is naturally changed). It should be noted that the display result of the special figure game does not need to be a "small win".

The gaming state may change based on the game ball passing through a specific area (for example, a specific area within the big winning opening) during the jackpot gaming state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, the control may be changed to a variable probability state after the jackpot game state.
(Progress of performance, etc.)

In the pachinko game machine 1, various effects (effects for notifying the progress of the game or for enlivening the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The performance will be explained below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or in place of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R and the game effect lamp 9 are performed. It may be performed as an effect using lighting or extinguishing of the lights, movement of the movable body 32, or any effect device including some or all of these.

As a performance executed according to the progress of the game, the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided on the image display device 5 display the first special pattern game or the first special pattern game. 2. Corresponding to the start of the special figure game, variable display of decorative symbols is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as a fixed special pattern) is stopped and displayed in the first special pattern game or the second special pattern game, the fixed decorative pattern (a combination of three decorative patterns) that is the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern ) is also stopped and displayed (derived).

During the period from when the variable display of the decorative symbols starts until it ends, the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbols may become a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode refers to the variable display of decorative symbols that are not yet displayed while the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 form part of a jackpot combination that will be described later. This refers to the manner in which the situation continues.

Furthermore, a ready-to-win effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned ready-to-win mode being set during the variable display of the decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the percentage of display results (display results of special pattern games and display results of variable display of decorative symbols) becoming a "jackpot" (also referred to as jackpot reliability or jackpot expectation level) is determined depending on the performance mode. A plurality of different types of reach effects are executed. For example, reach effects include normal reach and super reach, which has higher jackpot reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game becomes a "jackpot", a fixed decorative pattern that becomes a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (decorative pattern). The display result of the variable display of symbols is a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, "7", etc.) are all stopped and displayed on predetermined valid lines in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. .

In the case of a "probable variable jackpot" that is controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the jackpot gaming state, odd-numbered decorative patterns (for example, "7", etc.) will be stopped and displayed, and the state will be changed to a variable probability state after the jackpot gaming state ends. In the case of an uncontrolled "uncertain variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", even-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "6", etc.) may be stopped and displayed all together. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative patterns are also referred to as variable probability patterns, and the even-numbered decorative patterns are also referred to as non-probable variable patterns (normal patterns). After reaching the reach mode with non-probability variable symbols, a promotion performance that ultimately becomes a "probability variable jackpot" may be executed.

When the display result of the special figure game becomes a "small win", on the screen of the image display device 5, as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns, a fixed decorative pattern (for example, " 1, 3, 5, etc.) is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a "small hit"). As an example, decorative symbols constituting a chance are displayed in a stopped state on predetermined active lines in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. In addition, when the display result of the special figure game becomes a "jackpot" for some jackpot types (jackpot type in a jackpot game state in the same manner as the small win game state) and when it becomes a "small win". , a common determined decorative pattern may be derived and displayed.

If the display result of the special pattern game is a "lose", the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern does not become the reach mode, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination (" ) may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of decorative symbols may be "non-reach loss"). In addition, if the display result is a "lose", after the variable display mode of the decorative design becomes the reach mode, a predetermined reach combination that is not a jackpot combination ("reach loss") is displayed as the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol. The fixed decorative pattern (also referred to as "decorative pattern") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be "reach loss").

The performances that can be performed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 also include displaying the above-mentioned variable display compatible display (pending display and active display). Further, as other performances, for example, a preview performance that foretells the reliability of the jackpot is executed while the decorative symbols are being displayed variably. The preview performance includes a preview performance that foretells the reliability of a jackpot in a variable display that is currently being executed, and a preview performance that foretells the reliability of a jackpot in a variable display before execution (a variable display whose execution is pending). As the pre-read preview performance, a performance that changes the display mode of the variable display compatible display (suspended display or active display) to a different mode than usual may be performed.

In addition, in the image display device 5, by temporarily stopping the decorative pattern during the variable display of the decorative pattern and then restarting the variable display, one variable display can be made to appear pseudo as multiple variable displays. A pseudo-continuous performance may also be executed.

Even during the jackpot game state, a jackpot performance for notifying the jackpot game state is executed. As the jackpot performance, a performance that notifies the number of rounds or a promotion performance that indicates that the value of the jackpot game state is improved may be executed. Further, even during the small winning game state, a small winning performance for notifying the small winning gaming state is executed. In addition, the jackpot game during the small win game state and some jackpot types (the jackpot type of the jackpot game state in the same manner as the small win game state, for example, the jackpot type that makes the subsequent gaming state a high probability state). By performing a common performance depending on the state, the player may not be able to tell whether the player is currently in a small win game state or a jackpot game state. In such a case, by executing a common performance after the end of the small win gaming state and after the end of the jackpot gaming state, it is possible to make it impossible to distinguish between a high probability state and a low probability state. It's okay.

Further, for example, when a special figure game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

[Substrate configuration]
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, an audio control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc. as shown in FIG. 3, for example. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a firing control board, etc. are arranged on the back side of the pachinko game machine 1. Furthermore, a power supply board 17 connected to a power switch 91 is also mounted. Various control boards are not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards with conductor patterns on which electrical components can be mounted, but also electronic circuit boards that are configured to have electrical components mounted on them to achieve specific electrical functions. This concept includes electronic circuit mounting boards.

In the pachinko game machine 1, power from an AC power source such as AC 100V in an external power source such as a commercial power source can be supplied to electrical components including various control boards such as the main board 11 and the performance control board 12 through the power board 17. The power supply board 17 includes, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting alternating current (AC) into direct current (DC), a power supply circuit for converting a predetermined direct current voltage into a specific direct current voltage (for example, 12 V DC, 5 V DC, etc.), and the like. We are prepared.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and includes the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of the special drawing game (including management of reservations), execution of the general drawing game (including management of reservations), jackpot, etc. It has a function to control the gaming state, small winning gaming state, gaming state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, an output circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , a random number circuit 104, an I/O (Input/Output port) 105, and an RTC (Real Time Clock) 106.

The CPU 103 performs processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the functions of the main board 11) by executing a program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described later, production control commands described later, data such as various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 serves as a backup RAM in which the stored contents are saved for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be loaded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 updatesably counts numerical data indicating various random numbers (gaming random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The gaming random number may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 105 includes, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, and various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20, first pending). It is configured to include an output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the ordinary card hold display 25C, etc., and a solenoid drive signal.

The switch circuit 110 receives detection signals (when a game ball passes or A detection signal indicating that the switch has entered and the switch has been turned on) is taken in and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

A reset signal, a power-off signal, and a clear signal from the power supply board 17 are taken into the switch circuit 110 and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The reset signal is an operation stop signal for stopping the operation of a control circuit such as the game control microcomputer 100, and can be output using either a power supply monitoring circuit, a watchdog timer built-in IC, or a system reset IC. Good to have. The power-off signal becomes an OFF state when a predetermined power supply voltage used in the pachinko game machine 1 exceeds a predetermined value, and becomes an ON state when a period in which the predetermined power supply voltage is below a predetermined value continues for a power-off reference time or longer. Become. The clear signal is turned on, for example, when a clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed.

The output circuit 111 sends a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal to turn on the solenoid 81 and the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the normal electric accessory and the solenoid 82 for the big prize opening door. Transmit.

A display monitor 29, a display changeover switch 30, a setting key 51, a setting changeover switch 52, and a door open sensor 90 are connected to the main board 11. The door opening sensor 90 detects opening of the gaming machine frame 3 including the glass door frame 3a.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) is a production control board that sends production control commands (commands that specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game as part of the control of the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The production control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the production control board 12. The performance control command includes, for example, various decision results on the main board 11 (for example, display results of the special figure game (including jackpot type), fluctuation patterns used when executing the special figure game (details will be described later), etc. )), the game status (for example, the start and end of variable display, the opening status of the big prize opening, the occurrence of a prize, the number of pending memories, the game status), the occurrence of an error, etc.

The production control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, and receives production control commands and performs production (various productions according to the progress of the game) based on the received production control commands. It has the function of executing various notifications (including various notifications such as driving the movable body 32, notification of errors, notification of power outage recovery, etc.).

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The production control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to perform processing together with the display control unit 123 to execute the production (processing for realizing the above-mentioned functions of the production control board 12; (including decisions on At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The performance control CPU 120 displays execution of the performance based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by a player is detected, and a signal that appropriately indicates the operation content). The control unit 123 may also be instructed.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes a performance based on a performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on a performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal that designates the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound in synchronization with the display of the effect images and turn on/off the game effect lamps 9. or supplies a lamp signal (a signal specifying the lighting/extinguishing mode of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits that drive the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound specified by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. let

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits that drive the game effect lamps 9, drives the game effect lamps 9 based on the lamp signals, and turns on/off the game effect lamps 9 in a manner specified by the lamp signals. do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting/extinguishing of the lamp.

Note that the production control CPU 120 executes audio output, control of lamp lighting/extinguishment (supply of sound designation signals and lamp signals, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of signals for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You can do it like this.

The random number circuit 124 updatesably counts numerical data indicating various random numbers (random numbers for effects) used to execute various effects. The random number for presentation may be updated by the presentation control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 is an input port for receiving production control commands transmitted from the main board 11, for example, and for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). It consists of an output port and an output port.

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the production control board 12, the audio control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also referred to as subboards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

[motion]
Next, the operation (function) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be explained.

(Main operations of main board 11)
First, the main operations of the main board 11 will be explained. When power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes game control main processing. FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing an example of the game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 4, the CPU 103 first sets interrupts to be prohibited (step S1). Next, necessary initial settings are performed (step S2). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output ports, etc.), settings to make the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether the recovery conditions are satisfied (step S3). The recovery condition can be satisfied when the clear signal is off, there is backup data, and the backup RAM is normal. For example, if the clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed when power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, a clear signal in an on state is input to the game control microcomputer 100. If such an on-state clear signal is input, it may be determined in step S3 that the recovery condition is not satisfied. It is sufficient that the backup data can be stored in the RAM 102, which serves as a backup RAM for game control. In step S3, the presence or absence of backup data, the presence or absence of data errors, etc. may be confirmed or inspected to determine whether the recovery conditions can be met.

If the recovery condition is satisfied (step S3; Y), the recovery process (step S4) is executed, and then the setting confirmation process (step S5) is executed. Through the recovery process in step S4, a work area is set based on the contents stored in the RAM 102. By setting the work area using the backup data stored in the RAM 102, the gaming state can be restored to the state it was in when the power supply was stopped. For example, if the special symbols are changing, the special It is sufficient if the fluctuation of the symbols can be resumed.

If the recovery condition is not satisfied (step S3; N), initialization processing (step S6) is performed, and then setting change processing (step S7) is performed. The initialization process in step S6 includes a clear process for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and initial values are set in the work area by executing the clear process.

In the setting confirmation process of step S5, it is determined whether predetermined setting confirmation conditions are satisfied. The setting confirmation condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is turned on when power supply is started. The setting confirmation process in step S5 is executed when the recovery conditions including that the clear signal is in the OFF state are satisfied in step S3. Therefore, since the setting confirmation condition can be satisfied only when the clear signal is in the OFF state, the fact that the clear signal is in the OFF state can also be included in the setting confirmation condition.

If the setting confirmation conditions are satisfied in the setting confirmation process in step S5, the setting confirmation state is reached in which the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed, and the settings are changed from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. A confirmation start command is sent. In the setting confirmation state, the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed by the display on the display monitor 29. When ending the setting confirmation state, a setting confirmation end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12.

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting confirmation state, it may be in a game stop state in which the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped. When the game is in the stopped state, firing of game balls by operating the batting operation handle, detection of game balls by various switches, etc. are stopped, and the first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, and normal symbols are stopped. The display 20 may be controlled to stop displaying losing symbols or the like, or to display a display corresponding to a game stop state different from losing symbols. When the setting confirmation state ends, the accompanying game stop state may also end.

In the setting change process of step S7, it is determined whether predetermined setting change conditions are satisfied. The setting change condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is turned on when power supply is started. The setting change condition may include that the clear signal is in the on state.

If the setting change conditions are satisfied in the setting change process in step S7, the setting change state is entered in which the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed, and the settings are changed from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. A start change command is sent. In the setting change state, the setting value is displayed on the display monitor 29, and the numerical value displayed on the display monitor 29 is sequentially updated and displayed every time an operation of the setting changeover switch 52 is detected. Thereafter, based on the setting key 51 being turned off by an operation by an attendant at the game parlor, etc., the setting value displayed on the display monitor 29 is stored (updated storage) in the backup area of the RAM 102, and the setting value displayed on the display monitor 29 is stored (updated storage). Turn off the light. When ending the setting change state, a setting change end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12.

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting change state, the pachinko game machine 1 may be placed in the game stop state, similar to when it is in the setting confirmation state. When the setting change state ends, the accompanying game stop state may also end.

On the production control board 12 side, when receiving the setting confirmation start command or the setting change start command, control may be performed to notify that the setting is being confirmed or that the setting is being changed. For example, a predetermined image may be displayed on the image display device 5, a predetermined sound may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, or a light emitting member such as the game effect lamp 9 may be caused to emit light in a predetermined manner.

The clear signal is turned on, for example, by pressing down a clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17. Therefore, when power supply is started, if the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is on, and if the clear switch 92 is on, the initialization process in step S6 and The setting change process in step S7 is executed and control becomes possible in the setting change state, and if the clear switch 92 is off, the setting confirmation process in step S5 is executed along with the recovery process in step S4 and control becomes possible in the setting confirmation state. . When power supply is started, if the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is off or the setting key 51 is off, if the clear switch 92 is on, the initialization process in step S6 is executed. Although it is executed, it is not controlled to the setting change state, and if the clear switch 92 is off, the recovery process of step S4 is executed, but it is not controlled to the setting confirmation state.

After executing the setting confirmation process or the setting change process, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process to initialize the random number circuit 104 (step S8). Then, the register of the CTC built in the gaming control microcomputer 100 is set so that a timer interrupt is periodically generated every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S9), and the interrupt is permitted (step S10). ). After that, loop processing begins. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

When the CPU 103 that has executed such game control main processing receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When starting the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. It is determined whether detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Next, by executing a predetermined main-side error process, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is diagnosed for abnormality, and a warning can be issued if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). Thereafter, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of jackpot occurrences, etc.) and starting information (starting Data such as information indicating the number of winnings, etc.) and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times the probability variable state has been reached, etc.) are output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a gaming random number updating process is executed to update at least a part of the gaming random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software (step S24). After this, the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing (step S25). The CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby realizing management of execution and suspension of the special symbol game, control of jackpot gaming state, small winning gaming state, control of gaming state, etc.

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal pattern process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby managing the execution and suspension of the normal pattern game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passage of the game ball to the passing gate 41), This makes it possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on the "normal map hit". The normal pattern game is executed by driving the normal pattern display 20, and the number of normal patterns pending is displayed by lighting the normal pattern pending display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, processing for when a power outage occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, etc. may be performed as part of the game control timer interrupt processing. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may set transmission control commands in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process is performed in which the effect control command set for transmission is transmitted to a sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12. After executing the command control process, interrupts are permitted, and then the game control timer interrupt process is ended.

FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 5 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a starting winning determination process (step S101).

In the starting winning determination process, a process is executed to detect the occurrence of a starting winning, store pending information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and update the pending storage number. When a starting prize occurs, a random number value for determining the display result (including the type of jackpot) and fluctuation pattern is extracted and stored as pending information. Furthermore, processing for pre-reading and determining display results and fluctuation patterns may be performed based on the extracted random number values. After storing the pending information and the number of pending memories, transmission settings are made to the production control board 12 to send a production control command for specifying judgment results such as the occurrence of a starting prize, the number of pending memories, and pre-reading judgment. be exposed. The performance control command at the time of start winning, which is set to be transmitted in this way, is transferred from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 5 after the special symbol process process is completed. transmitted to.

After executing the starting winning determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes in steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the RAM 102. In addition, in each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, transmission settings are made to transmit the performance control command corresponding to each process to the performance control board 12.

The special symbol normal process in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of reservation information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random value for determining the display result, it is determined whether the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is a "big hit" or "small win" and the type of jackpot when it is determined to be a "jackpot". is determined (pre-determined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the special symbol normal processing, a confirmed special symbol (any of a jackpot symbol, a small prize symbol, or a losing symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set in accordance with the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal processing ends. Note that the special pattern game using the second special pattern may be executed with priority over the special pattern game using the first special pattern (also referred to as special pattern 2 priority consumption). Further, the winning order of the game balls in the first starting winning hole and the second starting winning hole may be stored, and the starting conditions for the special figure game may be established in the winning order (also referred to as winning order completion).

When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) stored in the ROM 101 are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the production control board 12. In the production control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". In this fluctuation pattern setting process, based on the pre-determined result of whether the display result will be a "big hit" or "small hit", a random value for determining the fluctuation pattern is used to select one of multiple types of fluctuation patterns. It includes the process of determining the In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern includes the execution time of the special figure game (special figure variation time) (also the execution time of the variable display of decorative symbols), the variable display mode of the ornamental symbols (whether or not there is reach, etc.), and the variable display period of the decorative symbols. It specifies the content of the performance (type of reach performance, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol variation process includes a process of making settings for varying the special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time since the special symbol started to fluctuate. It includes processes such as measuring. It is also determined whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time after starting the variation of the special symbol reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3" and the special symbol variation process ends.

The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stopping process, the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the finalized special symbol that becomes the display result of the special symbol is stopped and displayed (derived). Contains processing to configure settings for Then, when the display result is a "jackpot", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the jackpot flag is off and the display result is a "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". Moreover, when the display result is "lost", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "loss", the game state is also updated when the time-saving state or the variable probability state is controlled and when the end of the number cut is established. When the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This jackpot opening pre-processing includes processing to start a round in the jackpot game state and set the jackpot opening state based on the display result being a "jackpot", etc. It is. When the big winning opening is opened, a process is executed to supply a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door. At this time, for example, depending on the jackpot type, the opening upper limit period for keeping the jackpot open and the upper limit number of rounds to be executed are set. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the jackpot release preprocessing is completed.

The jackpot opening process in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "5". This jackpot opening process includes a process of measuring the elapsed time since the jackpot opening is opened, and a process of measuring the elapsed time from when the jackpot opening is opened, and based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, the jackpot opening This includes processing for determining whether it is time to return the switch from an open state to a closed state. Then, when returning the big prize opening to the closed state, after executing a process such as stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", The jackpot opening process ends.

The jackpot opening process in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This jackpot opening process includes a process to determine whether the number of rounds to open the jackpot has reached the set upper limit number of runs, and a process to enter the jackpot game state when the upper limit number of runs has been reached. This includes processing to make settings for terminating the process. When the number of executions of the round has not reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of executions of the round has reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5". The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end process in step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". This jackpot ending process includes a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the ending performance is executed as a performance operation to notify the end of the jackpot gaming state, and a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the end of the jackpot gaming state has changed. It includes processing to perform various settings for starting control and time-saving control. When such settings are made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot ending process ends.

The small hit opening preprocessing in step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "8". This small win opening pre-processing includes processing for setting the large winning opening to be open in the small winning gaming state based on the display result being "small winning". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit release preprocessing ends.

The small winning opening process in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "9". This small win opening process includes a process that measures the elapsed time since the big winning opening was opened, and a timing that returns the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. This includes processing to determine whether or not the When the big winning opening is returned to the closed state and the timing for ending the small winning game state is reached, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10" and the small winning opening process ends.

The small hit end process of step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "10". This small win ending process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which a performance operation to notify the end of the small win game state has elapsed. Here, when the small winning gaming state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before entering the small winning gaming state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small winning game state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small winning ending process ends.

The pachinko game machine 1 is configured such that the jackpot winning probability and ball payout rate change depending on the set value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, by using a display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value, the jackpot winning probability and ball payout rate are changed. For example, the set value has six levels from 1 to 6, with 6 having the highest probability of winning the jackpot, and decreasing the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the lower the probability of winning the jackpot. In this example, when 6 is set as the setting value, it is the highest advantage for the player, and as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the advantage gradually decreases. . If the probability of winning the jackpot changes according to the set value, the ball payout rate may also change according to the set value. While the probability of winning a jackpot is constant regardless of the set value, the number of rounds in the jackpot game state may change depending on the set value. The pachinko gaming machine 1 may be configured to be able to set any one of a plurality of setting values that have different degrees of advantage for the player. The setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are notified by transmitting a setting value designation command from the main board 11 side to the performance control board 12 side.

FIG. 7 shows an example of the configuration of the display result determination table. FIG. 7(A) shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the first special symbol used when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, and FIG. 7(B) shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the first special symbol used when the variable special symbol is the second A configuration example of a second special figure display result determination table used in the case of a figure is shown. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101. In the display result determination table, the hit determination value compared with the random value MR1 is assigned to the special symbol display result, which is a variable display result of the special symbol, according to the set value. The random number value MR1 is a random number value for determining the display result, and the value is randomly updated in the range of 0 to 65535. As the display result determination table, a common display result determination table may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

In the display result judgment table, when the gaming state is in a variable probability state (high probability state), more judgment values are displayed as special symbols for "jackpot" than when the gaming state is in the normal state or time saving state (low probability state). assigned to the result. As a result, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a high probability state such as a variable probability state in which probability variable control is performed, the probability that the jackpot gaming state will be determined is higher than when it is in a low probability state such as a normal state or a time saving state. It gets expensive.

In the first special figure display result determination table, the probability that the special figure display result will be determined as a "small win" and controlled to a small win game state is determined to be the same value, regardless of the gaming state or setting value. A value is assigned. In the display result determination table for the second special figure, the probability that the special figure display result will be determined as a "small hit" and controlled to the small win gaming state is determined by the first special figure display result, regardless of the gaming state or setting value. Judgment values are assigned so that they are the same value but different from those in the judgment table. In addition, the probability that the special figure display result is determined to be a "small win" and controlled to a small win gaming state may be varied depending on the set value. Regardless of the variable special figure, the probability of determining that the special figure display result will be a "small win" and control to a small win game state may be set to be the same probability.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure and the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit judgment values is determined regardless of the setting value. It is set to a common numerical range of jackpot determination values for determining jackpots. When the setting value is 1, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "jackpot", and only the common numerical range of jackpot judgment values for determining jackpots is set, while setting value 2 to setting value 6 is assigned to "jackpot". In this case, the numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1238 is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure and the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the gaming state is in a variable probability state, the range from 1020 to 1346 among the hit determination values indicates that the jackpot will be won regardless of the set value. It is set to a common numerical range of jackpot judgment values for judgment. When the setting value is 1, by assigning 1020 to 1346 to "jackpot", only the common numerical range of jackpot judgment values for determining jackpots is set, while on the other hand, setting value 2 to setting value In the case of 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1346 is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit determination values is the small value for determining a small hit regardless of the set value. It is set to a common numerical range of hit judgment values. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, regardless of the set value from 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping the range of the jackpot determination value, which changes according to each set value.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure, when the gaming state is in the variable probability state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit judgment values is set to It is set to a common numerical range of the small hit determination value for determining a small hit regardless of the value. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, regardless of the set value from 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping the range of the jackpot determination value, which changes according to each set value.

In the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit determination values is the small value for determining a small hit regardless of the set value. It is set to a common numerical range of hit judgment values. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, regardless of the set value from 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping the range of the jackpot determination value, which changes according to each set value.

In the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the gaming state is in the variable probability state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit judgment values is the set value, just as when the gaming state is in the normal state or time saving state. It is set to a common numerical range of the small hit determination value for determining a small hit regardless of the value. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, regardless of the set value from 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping the range of the jackpot determination value, which changes according to each set value.

The number of setting values that can be set in the pachinko game machine 1 may be five or less or seven or more. The smaller the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the more advantageous it may be to the player. The gameplay may be changed depending on the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, if the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320, and the gameplay is such that the probability of winning in the variable state is looped at a rate of 65% (so-called variable loop type), When the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, and during the jackpot game, the game ball is While the game state after the end of the jackpot game is controlled to be a variable state based on passing through the switch, the gaming state (so-called V If the setting value set in pachinko machine 1 is 3, the jackpot probability is 1/320, the small win probability is 1/50, and the game is played during a high base (during time saving control). The game may be controlled to a jackpot game state based on the ball passing through a predetermined switch provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7 (so-called 1 type, 2 type mixed type). If the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 1 to 3, the gameplay is the same, but the jackpot probability and small hit are higher than when these setting values are 1 to 3. A setting may be provided in which the probability is high but the number of prize balls that can be obtained during a jackpot game is small (for example, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is one of 4 to 6). When changing the gameplay depending on the set value, a common switch may be used for different purposes. Specifically, when the set value is 1 to 3, a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is used as a production switch (for executing a predetermined production each time a game ball passes a predetermined area). switch), and when the setting value is 4 to 6, the specified switch is used as a gaming switch (for controlling the gaming state to a variable probability state or a jackpot gaming state based on the game ball passing through the specified switch). It can also be used as a switch.

The jackpot type may be determined at different ratios depending on the setting value based on the allocation of judgment values in the jackpot type judgment table. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined by a common ratio regardless of the setting value. The variation pattern may be determined at different rates depending on the set value, based on the allocation of determination values in the variation pattern determination table. Alternatively, the variation pattern may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The setting value may be suggested by the frequency with which normal reach and super reach are performed by varying the execution rate of normal reach and super reach depending on the setting value. Alternatively, the execution rate of normal reach and super reach may be the same regardless of the setting value. In addition, it may be possible to perform arbitrary setting suggestion effects at different rates depending on the setting value.

(Main operations of the production control board 12)
Next, the main operations in the production control board 12 will be explained. When the effect control board 12 receives power supply voltage from a power source board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated and executes effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the production control main process shown in FIG. Performs register settings for the on-board CTC (counter/timer circuit). In addition, initial operation control processing is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control is executed to perform initial operations of the movable body 32, such as control to drive the movable body 32 to return to the initial position, and control to perform predetermined operation checks.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the timer interrupt flag is on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to an on state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses, based on the register settings of the CTC, for example. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; N), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and the process waits.

Furthermore, on the side of the production control board 12, an interrupt for receiving a production control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to a timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt that occurs when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the production control INT signal being turned on, the production control CPU 120 automatically disables interrupts, but if a CPU that does not automatically disable interrupts is used, interrupts are disabled. It is desirable to emit a prohibition command (DI command). The production control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the production control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, an effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port included in the I/O 125 that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The production control command taken in at this time is stored in a production control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the production control CPU 120 sets the interrupt permission, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Y), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various production control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the production control command reception buffer, the read production control commands are Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read performance control command may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or stored in the RAM 122 so that the performance control command received and the content specified by the performance control command can be confirmed in the performance control process processing. Turn on the provided reception flag. Further, when the performance control command specifies a gaming state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background according to the gaming state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the production control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light emitters such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, and the movable body 32 Control is performed to operate various presentation devices, such as driving operations. Further, regarding the control contents of performance operations using various performance devices, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. are performed in accordance with performance control commands transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the performance control process processing in step S76, a performance random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a portion of the performance random numbers used on the performance control board 12 are updated by software. Thereafter, the process returns to step S73. Other processes may be executed before returning to the process of step S73.

FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 8 as the production control process process. In the performance control process shown in FIG. 9, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a pre-read notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-read preview setting process, for example, based on the performance control command at the time of start-up winning that is transmitted from the main board 11, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. for executing the pre-read preview performance are performed. Further, processing for displaying a pending display is executed based on the number of pending memories specified from the production control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the production control CPU 120 selects and executes any of the following processes of steps S170 to S177, depending on the value of the production process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command specifying the start of variable display has been received from the main board 11. Contains such as. When it is determined to start variable display of decorative symbols on the image display device 5, the value of the production process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is ended.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and fluctuation pattern specified by the production control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern, the reach effect, etc. It determines whether or not various performances such as preview performances are to be executed, their mode, execution start timing, and the like. Then, a performance control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the performance) that reflects the determination result is set. Thereafter, based on the set performance control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start executing the variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is ended. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of decorative symbols in response to an instruction to start variable display of decorative symbols.

The variable display effect processing in step S172 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display performance process, the performance control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display a performance image based on the performance control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , driving the movable body 32 , outputting audio and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the audio control board 13 , and outputting a command (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 14 . Various performance controls are executed during variable display of decorative patterns, such as turning on/off/flashing the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs by outputting the output. After performing such performance control, for example, an end code indicating the end of the variable display of decorative symbols has been read from the performance control pattern, or a command has been received from the main board 11 specifying that fixed decorative symbols should be stopped and displayed. In response to what has been done, etc., the determined decorative pattern that becomes the display result of the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, the value of the production process flag is updated to "3", and the variable display production process is completed.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "3". In this special figure winning waiting process, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not a performance control command has been received from the main board 11 that designates starting a jackpot game state or a small win game state. Then, when receiving a production control command that specifies the start of a jackpot game state or a small win game state, if the command specifies the start of a jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "6". ”. On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of a small win game state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "4", which is a value corresponding to the small win performance process. In addition, if the waiting time for receiving the command elapses without receiving a command specifying the start of the jackpot game state or the small win game state, it is determined that the display result in the special drawing game is a "lose". Then, the value of the production process flag is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the production process flag is updated, the waiting process for each special figure ends.

The small hit performance process in step S174 is a process that is executed when the value of the performance process flag is "4". In this small win performance processing, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the small win game state, and executes various performance controls in the small win game state based on the setting content. . In addition, in the small hit production process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify ending the small win game state, the value of the production process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small win ending production. It is updated to a certain "5" and the small hit performance process is ended.

The small hit end production process in step S175 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "5". In this small hit end performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets a performance control pattern corresponding to the end of the small win game state, for example, and performs various performance controls at the end of the small win game state based on the setting contents. Execute. Thereafter, the value of the performance process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the small hit end performance process is ended.

The jackpot performance process in step S176 is a process that is executed when the value of the performance process flag is "6". In this jackpot performance processing, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the jackpot game state, and executes various performance controls in the jackpot game state based on the set content. In addition, in the jackpot production process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify ending the jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "7", which is a value corresponding to the ending production process. ” and ends the jackpot performance process.

The ending effect processing in step S177 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending performance processing, the performance control CPU 120 sets a performance control pattern corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, for example, and performs various performance controls of the ending performance at the end of the jackpot game state based on the setting contents. Execute. Thereafter, the value of the production process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending production process is ended.

[Variation of basic explanation]
This invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 explained in the basic explanation above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described above is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as prizes based on the occurrence of a winning, but the game media is enclosed and points are awarded based on the occurrence of a winning. It may also be an enclosed game machine.

Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") may be displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeatedly displaying and extinguishing the symbol. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol does not need to be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" does not need to be displayed as a display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 was shown as a gaming machine, but medals are inserted and a predetermined number of bets are set, and multiple types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operating lever by the player. A slot machine that can execute a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player when the combination of stopped symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols when the symbols are stopped in response to the operation of the stop button (for example, a big bonus , regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter referred to as bonus, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form in which they are distributed and provided to a computer device included in the pachinko game machine 1 on a removable recording medium, but are provided in advance in a form such as a computer device etc. The software may be distributed by being installed on the storage device of the user. Furthermore, by providing a communication processing section, the program and data for realizing the present invention can be distributed by being downloaded from other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. I don't mind.

The game can be executed not only by attaching a removable recording medium, but also by downloading programs and data via a communication line and storing them in internal memory. Alternatively, the process may be executed directly using hardware resources of other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with other computer devices via a network.

In addition, in this specification, expressions that compare various proportions such as the execution rate of production (expressions such as "higher", "lower", "different", etc.) do not mean that one is a proportion of "0%". May include. For example, one of the ratios is "0%" and the other is "100%" or a ratio of less than "100%."

<Explanation regarding characteristic part 075F>
Next, a gaming machine according to the feature section 075F of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-1 to 10-60.

[Configuration of pachinko gaming machine 1 related to characteristic part 075F, etc.]
It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the characteristic part 075F of this embodiment. As shown in FIG. 10-1, in the pachinko game machine 1 of this feature section 075F, a special variable winning ball device 075F007A is provided in place of the special variable winning ball device 7 shown in FIG. The special variable winning ball device 075F007A is equipped with a big winning hole door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see Figure 10-4), and a big winning hole that changes between an open state and a closed state by the big winning hole door (hereinafter referred to as (usually referred to as the big winning opening).

For example, the special variable winning ball device 075F007A is installed in the space between the game board 2 located at the back of the pachinko game machine 1 and the glass door frame 3a located at the front side (player side) of the pachinko game machine 1. It is equipped with a grand prize opening door, and by sliding the grand prize opening door horizontally between the back side and the front side of the pachinko game machine 1 to open and close it, the path to the regular big prize opening for game balls is opened. be done. Specifically, when the solenoid 82 is in the OFF state, the big prize opening door slides toward the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, thereby closing the regular winning opening, and the game ball enters the regular winning opening. (to pass) becomes impossible. On the other hand, when the solenoid 82 is in the on state, the big prize opening door slides toward the back of the pachinko game machine 1, thereby opening the regular winning opening, making it easier for game balls to enter the regular winning opening. .

The game ball that has entered the normal big winning opening is detected by the count switch 23 by passing through an area provided inside the normal big winning opening. When the game balls are detected by the count switch 23, game balls corresponding to the detection (for example, 10 balls per detection) are paid out to the player as prize balls. Further, when the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23 reaches the upper limit number (for example, 10 balls), one round ends and the normal big prize opening is controlled to be closed.

In the pachinko game machine 1, a V variable winning ball device 075F007B is provided next to the special variable winning ball device 075F007A. The V variable winning ball device 075F007B is equipped with a big winning hole door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 075F083 (see Figure 10-4), and a big winning hole that changes between an open state and a closed state by the big winning hole door (hereinafter referred to as (referred to as the V-large winning opening).

For example, the special variable winning ball device 075F007B is equipped with a big winning opening door in the space between the game board 2 and the glass door frame 3a, and this big winning opening door is connected to the back side and the front side of the pachinko game machine 1. By sliding horizontally between the slots to open and close, the path for the game ball to the V grand prize opening is opened. Specifically, when the solenoid 075F083 is in the OFF state, the big prize opening door slides toward the front side of the pachinko game machine 1 to close the V big prize opening, and the game ball enters the V big prize opening. (to pass) becomes impossible. On the other hand, when the solenoid 075F083 is in the ON state, the big prize opening door slides to the back of the pachinko game machine 1, opening the V big prize opening, making it easier for game balls to enter the V big winning opening. .

The game ball that enters the V big prize opening is detected by the V winning switch 075F024 (see Figure 10-4) by passing through a specific area (also referred to as the V winning area) provided inside the V big winning opening. . When the game ball is detected by the V winning switch 075F024, the gaming state is controlled to a variable probability state. In other words, in this embodiment, a V winning occurs on the condition that a game ball enters the V big winning opening during a round in a jackpot gaming state, and the gaming state is controlled to be in a variable probability state. . In addition, the regular big winning hole and the V big winning hole are collectively referred to as the big winning hole. Also, the big winning opening is also called an attacker.

The pachinko game machine 1 includes a plurality of lamps on the game board 2. Specifically, the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes, in addition to a movable body lamp 9d provided on the movable body 32 and an attacker lamp 9c provided near the normal big winning opening and the V big winning opening, there is also a movable body lamp 9d provided above the attacker. the lower left lamp 075F009D provided on the lower left of the game board 2; the board right lamp 075F009F provided on the right side of the image display device 5; Equipped with panel left lamp 075F009E.

The movable body lamp 9d displays characters attached to the movable body 32 (for example, the title of the pachinko game machine 1, in this example) by lighting or blinking a lighting means such as an LED when the movable body 32 is in a stopped state or in an operating state. “XXX”) is emitted. The attacker lamp 9c causes the vicinity of the attacker to emit light by lighting or blinking a lighting means such as an LED. The attacker upper lamp 075F009U causes the area above the attacker to emit light by lighting or blinking a lighting means such as an LED. The lower left lamp 075F009D lights up the lower left area of the game board 2 by lighting or blinking a lighting means such as an LED. The panel right lamp 075F009F is a lamp provided in a casing imitating a character, and when a lighting means such as an LED lights up or blinks, the casing imitating a character on the right side of the image display device 5 emits light. . The panel left lamp 075F009E lights up the left side of the image display device 5 by lighting or blinking a lighting means such as an LED. Note that the board left lamp 075F009E may be provided in a casing imitating a character, similar to the board right lamp 075F009F. Further, the board right lamp 075F009F and the board left lamp 075F009E may be movable in a predetermined direction (such as the left-right direction or the up-down direction), similarly to the movable lamp 9d.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 includes a plurality of lamps in the gaming machine frame 3. Specifically, the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes a frame left lamp 075F009L provided on the left side of the gaming machine frame 3 and a frame right lamp 075F009R provided on the right side of the gaming machine frame 3. Equipped with

Here, FIG. 10-2 is an explanatory diagram showing a frame lamp. The frame left lamp 075F009L has a group of 11 lamps, from the first lamp to the eleventh lamp, running counterclockwise from the top to the bottom of the gaming machine frame 3. The frame left lamp 075F009L lights up or blinks a plurality of lamps (11 lamps in this example), respectively, to illuminate the left side of the gaming machine frame 3. On the other hand, the frame right lamp 075F009R has 11 lamp groups from the first lamp to the eleventh lamp clockwise from the top to the bottom of the gaming machine frame 3. The frame right lamp 075F009R lights up or blinks a plurality of lamps (11 lamps in this example), respectively, to cause the right side of the gaming machine frame 3 to emit light.

Furthermore, the pachinko game machine 1 includes a special map LED board 075F020 at the lower left of the game board 2. The special figure LED board 075F020 is controlled by the game control microcomputer 100, and is shown in FIG. This is a board that plays the roles of the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, etc. by lighting/blinking/extinguishing the LEDs. Further, the pachinko game machine 1 includes a fourth symbol unit 075F050 at the lower left of the image display device 5. The fourth symbol unit 075F050 is an LED board that is controlled by the performance control CPU 120 and notifies changes in special symbols, the number of reserved memories, right-handed display, etc. by lighting/blinking/extinguishing the LED.

Here, FIG. 10-3 is an explanatory diagram showing the special pattern LED board 075F020 and the fourth pattern unit 075F050. As shown in Figure 10-3(a), the special figure LED board 075F020 has a special figure 1 variable display part 075F021 that shows the variable display of the first special figure, and a special figure 2 variable display part that shows the variable display of the second special figure. A display section 075F022, a special figure 1 memory display section 075F023 that shows the first reserved memory number corresponding to the first special figure game, and a special figure 2 memory display section that shows the second reserved memory number that corresponds to the second special figure game. 075F024, a normal pattern memory display section 075F025 that shows the number of stored normal patterns, a normal pattern display section 075F026 that shows a variable display of the normal pattern, a right-based pattern display section 075F030 that prompts the player to play right, and a probability variable state. A probability change display section 075F028 indicating the presence or absence of a time saving state, a time saving display section 075F029 indicating the presence or absence of a time saving state, and a round display section 075F027 indicating the number of rounds of jackpots. Each display section can notify the player of the presence or absence of variable display of special symbols and regular symbols, the results thereof, the current gaming status, the number of reservations, etc. by lighting or blinking using lighting means such as LEDs. can.

For example, the special figure 1 variable display unit 075F021 determines whether or not the first special symbol in the first special symbol game is being variably displayed, and the stop symbol of the first special symbol determined by the result of the variable display. The player is notified by lighting/flashing/turning off the light using lighting means such as an LED. The special figure 2 variable display unit 075F022 determines whether or not the second special symbol in the second special symbol game is being displayed in a variable manner, and displays the stop symbol of the second special symbol determined based on the result of the variable display using an LED or the like. The player is notified by lighting/blinking/turning off the lighting means.

Furthermore, the special figure LED board 075F020 can encourage the player to play right-handed by lighting/blinking/extinguishing the lighting means such as LED in the right-handed hitting display section 075F030. In this embodiment, when the player is urged to play right-handed, the lighting means such as an LED in the right-handed display section 075F030 lights up (lights up), and when the player is not encouraged to play right-handed, That is, when urging the player to play left-handed, the lighting means such as the LED in the right-handed display section 075F030 is turned off. After the symbol is determined, the CPU 103 sends a right-handed display lighting command to the performance control CPU 120, and lights up the right-handed display section 075F030, and after the symbol is determined by the final fluctuation in the high base state before returning to the normal state, A right-hand hit display light-off designation command is sent to the production control CPU 120, and the right-hand hit display section 075F030 is turned off. In addition, when the pachinko game machine 1 has a jackpot or small win that is not controlled to a high base after the jackpot game ball state, the performance control CPU 120 may light the right hit display section 075F030 only during the jackpot round. In this case, the CPU 103 transmits a jackpot end designation command to the production control CPU 120, and turns off the right hit display section 075F030.

Here, hitting right means firing the game ball toward the second downstream path of the first downstream path and the second downstream path through which the game medium can flow down in the game area provided on the game board 2. This is how to operate the ball hitting operation handle 30 (how to hit the ball). The first downstream route is, for example, a route that passes through the left side area of the gaming area, and beyond that there is a first starting winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, while the variable winning ball device This is a route in which the second starting prize opening formed in 6B does not exist. The second downstream route is, for example, a route that passes through the right side area of the gaming area, and beyond that there is a second starting winning opening and a big winning opening (usually a big winning opening) formed in the variable winning ball device 6B. , V big prize opening) exists. When a player fires a game ball toward the first downstream path, the game ball flows toward the first starting prize opening through the first downstream path. When a player launches a game ball toward the second downstream path, the game ball passes through the second downstream path and is directed toward the second starting prize opening or the grand prize opening (normal grand prize opening, V grand prize opening). flows into. In this embodiment, in a jackpot game after a jackpot occurs, and in a gaming state (time saving state or variable probability state) after a jackpot game, when the player hits right, a The game ball is made to enter the second starting winning hole or the big winning hole, and during that time, the right-handed display section 075F030 urges the player to hit the right-handed ball. By hitting right while a display prompting the player to hit right, the player enters the game ball into the second starting prize opening and a predetermined number of prize balls (for example, three) are paid out. The right to the second special figure game can be obtained, or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of prize balls can be paid out by entering the game ball into the normal big prize opening. Furthermore, as will be described in detail later, the V-big prize opening will be open during the round of the probability jackpot, but the player can win the V-big prize by hitting right while the display prompting the player to hit right. It is also possible to obtain the right to be controlled in a variable probability state by entering a game ball into the winning hole. For this reason, the player can gain an overall advantage by hitting the ball to the right while a display prompting the player to hit the ball to the right is displayed. Note that, unlike right-handed hitting, operating the ball-hitting operation handle 30 so as to launch the game ball toward the first downstream path (hitting method) is also referred to as left-handed hitting.

As shown in FIG. 10-3(b), the fourth symbol unit 075F050 has a special symbol 1 memory display section 075F051 indicating the number of first reserved memories corresponding to the first special symbol game, and a special symbol unit 075F051 corresponding to the second special symbol game. A special figure 2 memory display section 075F052 indicating the number of second reserved memories to be stored, a special figure 1 variable display section 075F053 indicating the variable display status or display result of the first special figure, and a special figure 1 variable display section 075F053 indicating the variable display status or display result of the second special figure. It includes a special figure 2 variable display section 075F054 that shows the display result, and a right-hitting display section 075F055 that urges the player to play right-handed. Each display section can inform the player of the presence or absence of a variable display of special symbols, the number of reservations, right-handed instruction, etc. by lighting/flashing/turning off the lights using lighting means such as LEDs.

For example, the special figure 1 variable display section 075F053 determines whether or not the first special symbol in the first special symbol game is being variably displayed, and the stop symbol of the first special symbol determined by the result of the variable display. The player is notified by lighting/flashing/turning off the light using lighting means such as an LED. The special figure 2 variable display unit 075F054 determines whether or not the second special symbol in the second special symbol game is being displayed in a variable manner, and displays the stop symbol of the second special symbol determined based on the result of the variable display using an LED or the like. The player is notified by lighting/blinking/turning off the lighting means. Below, representing the variation of the stop symbols of the first special symbol by lighting means such as LED in the special symbol 1 variable display section 075F021 is also referred to as a variation display of the first special symbol. In addition, representing the variation of the stop symbol of the second special symbol by lighting means such as LED in the special figure 2 variable display section 075F054 is also referred to as a variable display of the second special symbol.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when urging the player to play right, the lighting means such as an LED in the right play display section 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 lights up (lights up) and prompts the player to play right. If the player is not prompted to play left-handed, that is, if the player is encouraged to play left-handed, the lighting means such as the LED in the right-handed display section 075F055 is turned off. After the symbol is determined, the performance control CPU 120 lights up the right-handed display section 075F055 based on the reception of the right-handed display lighting command from the CPU 103, and the symbol is determined by the final fluctuation in the high base state before returning to the normal state. After that, the right-handed player display unit 075F055 is turned off based on receiving a right-handed player display light-off designation command from the CPU 103. In addition, when the pachinko game machine 1 has a jackpot or a small win that is not controlled to a high base after the jackpot game ball state, the performance control CPU 120 may light the right hit display section 075F055 only during the jackpot round. In this case, the performance control CPU 120 turns off the right hit display section 075F055 based on receiving the jackpot end designation command from the CPU 103.

FIG. 10-4 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in the pachinko gaming machine 1. As shown in FIG. 10-4, each of the movable body lamp 9d, the attacker lamp 9c, the upper attacker lamp 075F009U, the lower left lamp 075F009D, the panel right lamp 075F009F, the panel left lamp 075F009E, the frame right lamp 075F009R, and the frame left lamp 075F009L. , is connected to the lamp control board 14, and can be turned on (flashing) under the control of the performance control CPU 120 via the lamp control board 14. In addition, each of these movable lamp 9d, attacker lamp 9c, attacker upper lamp 075F009U, lower left lamp 075F009D, board right lamp 075F009F, board left lamp 075F009E, frame right lamp 075F009R, and frame left lamp 075F009L, or these together in the game. Also referred to as effect lamp 9.

The fourth symbol unit 075F050 is connected to the production control board 12, and can light up (blink) each display section under the control of the control CPU 120.

The special figure LED board 075F020 is connected to the main board 11, and each display section can be lit (flashing) under the control of the game control microcomputer 100.

[Image display device]
FIG. 10-5 is a front view of the image display device 5. Most of the display area of the image display device 5 constitutes a first display area 075F005F for displaying effects such as a variable display of decorative symbols and a reach effect. Further, the lower end of the image display device 5 includes a first pending memory display area 075F005D in which the first pending memory number can be displayed by the number of circular pending displays, and a second pending memory number can be displayed by the number of circular pending displays. A second display area 075F005Sa including a possible second reserved storage display area 075F005U is configured.

The upper right end of the image display device 5 constitutes a third display area 075F005Sb including a fourth symbol 075F005J indicating that the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, a display of the first pending memory number, and a display of the second pending memory number. are doing.

Among these, "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are arranged in the center of the first display area 075F005F, and it is possible to perform variable display of decorative patterns. It has become. Moreover, a small pattern 075F005M smaller in size than each decorative pattern is displayed at the left end of the first display area 075F005F. The small patterns include the decorative patterns displayed in the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L, the decorative patterns displayed in the "middle" decorative pattern display area 5C, and the "right" decorative pattern display areas. The symbols corresponding to the decorative symbols displayed on 5R are vertically arranged. The small pattern 075F005M is also a pattern that is always displayed within the first display area 075F005F of the image display device 5 without being hidden during variable display.

As shown in FIG. 10-5, a decorative pattern is arranged at the center of the first display area 075F005F of the image display device 5, and the small pattern 075F005M is located at the left end of the first display area 075F005F of the image display device 5. It is arranged in a smaller size than the decorative pattern in the section. Therefore, the visibility of the small pattern 075F005M is lower than the visibility of the decorative pattern.

Further, at the lower center of the first display area 075F005F, an active display area 075F005A is provided for displaying a pending display corresponding to the variable display being executed as an active display.

[Various tables]
Various tables will be explained with reference to FIGS. 10-6 to 10-8.

(Jackpot type)
FIG. 10-6 is an explanatory diagram showing a hit type table. As shown in Figure 10-6, in the hit type table, for each type of hit in the jackpot, the jackpot probability after the end of the jackpot game state, the base after the end of the jackpot game state, and the fluctuation time after the end of the jackpot game state , and the number of openings (number of rounds) in the jackpot are shown.

Specifically, the types of jackpots are 5R normal jackpot, 5R probability variable jackpot, and 10R probability variable jackpot. Note that, hereinafter, each round may be denoted by "R". For example, the first round is also called the 1R, and the second round is also called the 2R. 5R normal jackpot is a case where the control pattern of the distribution member (not shown) in the attacker is a control pattern that makes it difficult to win a prize (for example, a control pattern that makes it difficult to win the V jackpot (for example, a control that shortens the time for opening and closing the lid to open and close the V jackpot or a lid). This is a control to prevent the game ball from entering a specific area by repeating opening and closing of the game ball, etc.), and the jackpot is controlled to a low probability state and a high base state after the completion of 5 rounds of jackpot game state. Normally, in the case of a jackpot, the condition that such a low probability high base state is maintained until the fluctuation display is executed a predetermined number of times, 100 times, or the condition that the next jackpot occurs, whichever comes first, is satisfied. Continue until.

5R fixed variable jackpot is a control pattern of the distribution member (not shown) in the attacker that makes it easy to win V (for example, control to always open the lid that opens and closes the V big prize opening, or control to open the lid at a specific time). This is a jackpot that is controlled to be in a high probability state and a high base state after the end of the 5-round jackpot game state. In the case of a variable probability jackpot, the condition that such a high probability high base state is maintained until the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times, 150 times, or the condition that the next jackpot occurs, whichever comes first, is satisfied. Continue until.

10R fixed variable jackpot is a control pattern of the distribution member (not shown) in the attacker that makes it easy to win a V prize (for example, control to always open the lid that opens and closes the V big prize opening, or control to open the lid at a specific time). This is a jackpot that is controlled to be in a high probability state and a high base state after the end of the 10-round jackpot game state. In the case of a variable probability jackpot, the condition that such a high probability high base state is maintained until the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times, 150 times, or the condition that the next jackpot occurs, whichever comes first, is satisfied. Continue until.

The 5R normal jackpot and the 5R fixed variable jackpot have a common decorative pattern that stops when the jackpot occurs. In addition, both the 5R normal jackpot and the 5R fixed strange jackpot have the same fanfare performance (for example, background, appearing characters, sound effects, etc.) that is performed when a jackpot occurs, and during the round in the jackpot game state. The performance aspects of the round performances (for example, backgrounds, appearing characters, sound effects, etc.) are common to each other, and furthermore, the number of rounds in the jackpot game state is also common to each other. For this reason, it is difficult for the player to recognize whether a 5R normal jackpot or a 5R probability variable jackpot has occurred, as long as the player sees the stopped decorative symbols, the fanfare performance, and the round performance. Here, in the case of a 5R variable jackpot, the V big prize opening opens in a predetermined round (4th R in this embodiment). At this time, if the player can make the game ball enter the V-big winning hole by hitting the ball to the right while aiming at the V-big winning hole, the gaming state is controlled to be a variable probability state.

In this way, the 5R normal jackpot and the 5R probability variable jackpot are also referred to as chance bonuses because it is difficult for the player to recognize whether the probability variable jackpot has occurred until the middle of the round.

As for the 10R variable probability jackpot, similarly to the 5R variable probability jackpot, the V grand prize opening is opened in the predetermined round (in the present embodiment, the 9th round). At this time, if the player can make the game ball enter the V-big winning hole by hitting the ball to the right while aiming at the V-big winning hole, the gaming state is controlled to be a variable probability state. However, in the case of a 10R guaranteed variable jackpot, the decorative patterns that stop when the jackpot occurs, the production aspects of the fanfare production (for example, the background, characters that appear, sound effects, etc.), and the round production that takes place during the round of the jackpot game state. The performance mode is different from that of the 5R normal jackpot and the 5R probability-variable jackpot. Therefore, when a 10R probability variable jackpot occurs, the player can recognize that a probability variable jackpot has occurred. Such a 10R probability-variable jackpot is also called a special bonus.

(each random number)
FIG. 10-7 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. As shown in Figure 10-7, each random number is used as follows. Specifically, the random R is a random counter for determining whether or not to win a jackpot. The random R is updated by 1 at 10 MHz, and is added and updated from 0 to its upper limit of 65535, and then added and updated again from 0. Random 1 is a random counter (for jackpot type determination) that determines the jackpot type as one of 5R normal jackpot, 5R probability variable jackpot, and 10R probability variable jackpot. Random 2 is a random counter (for determining the type of variation pattern) that determines the type of variation pattern. Random 3 is a random counter (for determining a fluctuation pattern) that determines a fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time). Random 4 is a random counter (for normal symbol hit determination) that determines whether or not to generate a hit based on the normal symbol. Random 5 is a random counter that determines the initial value of Random 4 (for determining the initial value of Random 4).

In the present embodiment, it is determined based on the value of the random number for jackpot determination (random R) whether or not the game is controlled to a jackpot gaming state, which is an advantageous state advantageous to the player. Then, out of the multiple types of jackpots such as 5R normal jackpot, 5R probability variable jackpot, and 10R probability variable jackpot as the jackpot game state, which jackpot is to be determined is based on the value of the random number (random 1) for determining the jackpot type. It is determined. At this time, the jackpot symbol may also be determined based on the value of random 1.

First, a variation pattern type is determined using a random number for variation pattern type determination (Random 3), and any variation pattern included in the determined variation pattern type is determined using a random number for variation pattern determination (Random 4). is determined. In this manner, in this embodiment, the fluctuation pattern is determined by a two-stage lottery process. The variation pattern type is a grouping of a plurality of variation patterns according to the characteristics of their variation modes. One or more variation patterns belong to the variation pattern type.

For example, in the case of a jackpot, the variation patterns are classified into a normal reach variation pattern type with normal reach and a super reach variation pattern type with super reach. Such variation pattern types are selected at a predetermined ratio. In addition, in the case of a loss, it is classified into a normal variation pattern type, which is a variation pattern type without reach, a normal reach variation pattern type, and a super reach variation pattern type.

For such fluctuation pattern types, when the display result is a loss, the selection ratio of the fluctuation pattern type is different depending on whether the display result is in a time-saving state or not. Therefore, when the time is in the time-saving state, the rate of selection of the variation pattern type with a short variation display time, such as the normal variation pattern type, is set to be high. Therefore, the variable display time is shortened.

In addition, such a variation pattern type is set so that the selection ratio is different depending on when the number of reserved memories of each special symbol to be displayed as a variation is greater than or equal to a predetermined number, and when it is less than a predetermined number. When the number of pending memories for each special symbol to be displayed in a variable manner is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, execution of pending number reduction control is performed in which the variable display time is shortened compared to when the number of pending memories for each special symbol is less than a predetermined number. You may also do so. For example, in the pending number reduction control state, the rate of selection of a variation pattern type with a short variation display time, such as the normal variation pattern type, is set to be higher than in the non-retention number reduction control state. , the average time of the variable display time may be made shorter than when the number of reservations is not in the hold count reduction control state. Further, in the reservation number reduction control, even when the same fluctuation pattern type is selected, the fluctuation display time itself of the fluctuation pattern type may be made shorter than when the reservation number reduction control is not in the state.

Further, the variation pattern may be determined not by a two-step determination method in which the variation pattern type is determined and then the variation pattern is determined, but also by a one-stage determination method in which the variation pattern is determined by one random number lottery.

(Jackpot determination table, jackpot type determination table)
FIG. 10-8 is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot determination table and a jackpot type determination table. These tables are stored in the ROM 101.

FIG. 10-8(A) is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot determination table. The jackpot determination table is a collection of data stored in the RO 101, and is a table in which a jackpot determination value to be compared with the random R is set. The jackpot determination table includes a normal (non-probability variable) jackpot determination table that is used in a normal state (a gaming state that is not a probability variable state, that is, a non-probability variable state), and a probability variable jackpot determination table that is used in a probability variable state.

In the normal jackpot judgment table, each numerical value listed in the left column of Figure 10-8 (A) is set as a jackpot judgment value, and in the probability change jackpot judgment table, the values listed in the left column of Figure 10-8 (B) are set as jackpot judgment values. Each numerical value listed in the column is set as a jackpot determination value. The jackpot judgment value set in the jackpot judgment table at variable probability is the same jackpot judgment value as the jackpot judgment value set in the normal jackpot judgment table (referred to as the normal jackpot judgment value or the first jackpot judgment value). By adding the unique jackpot judgment value, a larger number of jackpot judgment values (referred to as variable probability jackpot judgment values or second jackpot judgment values) are set than in the variable probability jackpot judgment table. As a result, in the variable probability state, it is determined that the jackpot is hit with a higher probability than in the normal state.

The CPU 103 extracts the count value of the random number circuit 104 at a predetermined time and compares the extracted value with the value of the random number for jackpot determination (random R). ), it is determined that the special symbol will be a jackpot (normal jackpot or variable probability jackpot). Note that the "probability" shown in FIG. 10-8(A) indicates the probability (ratio) of hitting the jackpot.

FIGS. 10-8(B) and (C) are explanatory diagrams showing the jackpot type determination table. FIG. 10-8(B) is a first special symbol jackpot type determination table used to determine the jackpot type when a jackpot is determined based on the first special symbol. FIG. 10-8(C) is a second special symbol jackpot type determination table used to determine the jackpot type when a jackpot is determined based on the second special symbol.

The first special figure jackpot type determination table in FIG. 10-8(B) includes numerical values to be compared with the random 1 value for jackpot type determination, including "5R normal jackpot", "5R probability variable jackpot", and , "10R probability variable jackpot" and corresponding jackpot determination values are set. In the second special symbol jackpot type determination table of FIG. 10-8(C), a jackpot determination value is set which is a numerical value to be compared with the value of random 1 and corresponds to "10R probability variable jackpot".

In addition, as shown in Figures 10-8 (B) and (C), the jackpot type judgment value is also used as a judgment value (jackpot pattern judgment value) for determining the jackpot symbols of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. It will be done. For example, the determination value corresponding to "5R normal jackpot" is also set as the determination value corresponding to "1" of the jackpot symbol. The determination value corresponding to the "5R probability variable jackpot" is also set as the determination value corresponding to the jackpot symbol "3". The determination value corresponding to the "10R probability variable jackpot" is also set as the determination value corresponding to the jackpot symbol "7". The special pattern 1 variable display section 075F021 and the special pattern 2 variable display section 075F022 on the special pattern LED board 075F020 display the stopped jackpot pattern by lighting means such as LEDs lighting up or blinking in the lighting mode corresponding to each jackpot pattern. can be shown. Similarly, the special figure 1 variable display part 075F053 and the special figure 2 variable display part 075F054 in the fourth symbol unit 075F050 are stopped by lighting means such as LEDs lighting or blinking in the lighting mode corresponding to each jackpot symbol. It is possible to show the jackpot symbol.

Using such various jackpot type determination tables, the CPU 103 determines, as the jackpot type, the type corresponding to the jackpot type determination value with which the value of Random 1 matches, and determines, as the jackpot symbol, the type that corresponds to the jackpot type judgment value with which the value of Random 1 matches. Determine the jackpot symbol. Thereby, the jackpot type and the jackpot symbol corresponding to the jackpot type are determined at the same time.

According to such various jackpot type determination tables, regarding the jackpot of the second special symbol, the percentage of selection of "10R probability variable jackpot" is higher than that of the jackpot type selectable with the first special symbol, and the player There is a high rate of selection of jackpot types that are advantageous for players.

(Production control command)
FIG. 10-9 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the production control command. The game control microcomputer 100 transmits various performance control commands to the performance control CPU 120 depending on the game control state. The production control command has, for example, a two-byte configuration, with the first byte indicating MODE (command classification) and the second byte indicating EXT (command type). Note that the command format shown in FIG. 10-9 is an example, and other command formats may be used. In addition, although "(H)" indicates a hexadecimal number in the following, it may be omitted in this specification.

Command 8001 (H) is a first variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display of the first special figure. Command 8002 (H) is a second variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display of the second special figure. When the production control CPU 101 receives the command 8001 (H) or the command 8002 (H), it controls the image display device 5 to start variable display of decorative symbols.

Command 81XX(H) is a variation pattern command that specifies a variation pattern of decorative symbols that are variably displayed on the image display device 5 in response to the variation display of special symbols (each corresponds to variation pattern XX). That is, when a unique number is assigned to each of a plurality of types of variation patterns, there is a variation pattern command corresponding to each variation pattern specified by the number.

Command 8C01 (H) is a display result 1 designation command (loss designation command) indicating that the game has been determined to be a loss. Command 8C02 (H) is a display result 2 designation command (5R normal jackpot designation command) indicating that the 5R normal jackpot has been determined. Command 8C03 (H) is a display result 3 designation command (5R probability variable jackpot designation command) indicating that a 5R probability variable jackpot has been determined. Command 8C04 (H) is a display result 4 designation command (10R probability variable jackpot designation command) indicating that a 10R probability variable jackpot has been determined. Each of the loss designation command, 5R normal jackpot designation command, 5R probability variable jackpot designation command, and 10R probability variable jackpot designation command, or these commands collectively are also referred to as 8C series commands.

Command 8D01 (H) is a first symbol variation designation command indicating to start variable display of the first special symbol. Command 8D02 (H) is a second symbol variation designation command indicating to start variable display of the second special symbol. Each of the first symbol variation designation command and the second symbol variation designation command, or these collectively, are also referred to as 8D series commands. Command 8F00 (H) is a symbol confirmation designation command that designates ending the variation of the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

Command 9000 (H) is an initialization designation command that designates initialization (designates displaying the initial screen when the power is turned on) to be sent when power supply to the gaming machine is started. Command 9200 (H) is a power outage recovery designation command that is sent when power supply to the gaming machine is resumed and designates recovery from a power outage (specifies displaying a power outage recovery screen). Command 9500 (H) is a normal state designation command that designates the background of the normal state. Command 9501 (H) is a time-saving state designation command that designates the background of the time-saving state. Command 9502 (H) is a variable probability state designation command that specifies the background of the variable probability state. Each of the normal state designation command, time-saving state designation command, and variable probability state designation command, or these commands collectively, are also referred to as 95-series commands or background designation commands. Command 9F00(H) is a customer waiting demonstration designation command that specifies a customer waiting demonstration.

Command A001 (H) is a jackpot start 1 designation command that designates the start of the 5R normal jackpot. Command A002 (H) is a jackpot start 2 designation command that designates the start of a 5R probability variable jackpot. Command A003 (H) is a probability variable jackpot start 3 designation command that specifies the start of a 10R probability variable jackpot. Each of the jackpot start 1 designation command, the jackpot start 2 designation command, and the jackpot start 3 designation command, or these collectively are also referred to as A0 series commands.

A1XX(H) is a command indicating that the big winning hole is being opened for the number of times (round) indicated by XX. The grand prize opening designation command is also referred to as the A1 series command. A2XX(H) is a specified command after the opening of the grand prize opening indicating the closing of the grand prize opening of the number (round) indicated by XX. The command specified after opening the big prize opening is also referred to as the A2 series command.

Command A301 (H) is a jackpot end 1 designation command that designates the end of the 5R normal jackpot. Command A302 (H) is a jackpot end 2 designation command that designates the end of the 5R probability variable jackpot. Command A303 (H) is a jackpot end 3 designation command that designates the end of the 10R variable jackpot. Each of the jackpot end 1 designation command, the jackpot end 2 designation command, and the jackpot end 3 designation command, or these collectively are also referred to as A3 series commands.

Command AD00(H) is a probability change determination device passage designation command that designates that a V winning has occurred. The probability change determination device passage designation command is a command that is sent when the game ball that has passed through the V big winning opening enters the V winning area and is detected by the V winning switch 075F024.

Command B100 (H) is a first starting winning designation command that specifies that there is a first starting winning. Command B200 (H) is a second starting winning designation command that specifies that there is a second starting winning.

Command C1XX(H) is a first pending storage number designation command that specifies that the first pending storage number has reached the number indicated by XX. The first pending storage number designation command is also referred to as a C1 series command. Command C2XX(H) is a second pending storage designation command that specifies that the second pending storage number has reached the number indicated by XX. The second pending storage number designation command is also referred to as a C2-based command.

Command C4XX (H) and command C6XX (H) display the contents of the winning judgment results such as jackpot judgment, jackpot type judgment, fluctuation pattern type judgment, etc. at the time of starting winning into the first starting winning hole or the second starting winning hole. This is the production control command shown. Among these, command C4XX(H) is a symbol designation command that indicates whether or not it will be a jackpot among the winning determination results and the determination result of the type of jackpot. In addition, the command C3XX (H) is a variation type command that indicates the judgment result (variation pattern type judgment result) in which judgment value range the value of the random number for variation pattern type judgment falls within among the winning judgment results. It is.

C7XX(H) is a grand prize opening designation command that indicates passage of the game ball to the grand prize opening for the number of times (round) indicated by XX.

A command in which the MODE is FD (H) and the 4th bit of EXT is 0 is a right-handed player display light-off designation command indicating that the right-handed player display is turned off. A command in which the MODE data is FD (H) and the 4th bit of the EXT data is 1 is a right-handed hitting display lighting designation command indicating lighting of the right-handed hitting display. In this embodiment, the right-handed display lighting designation command is also referred to as an FD-related command.

The game control microcomputer 100 determines, at the time of starting winning, whether or not there will be a jackpot, the type of jackpot, and which judgment value range the value of the random number for determining the type of variation pattern falls within. Then, a value that specifies a jackpot and a value that specifies the type of jackpot are set in the EXT data of the symbol designation command, and control is performed to transmit them to the performance control CPU 120. Further, the game control microcomputer 100 sets a value specifying the range of the determination value as a determination result of the fluctuation pattern type in the EXT data of the fluctuation type command, and performs control to send it to the performance control CPU 120. The production control CPU 120 can recognize whether the display result is a jackpot or not and the type of jackpot based on the value set in the symbol designation command, and can also recognize the variation pattern type based on the variation type command. .

[motion]
Next, the operation (effect) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature section 075F will be explained. First, processing by the CPU 103 mounted on the main board 11 will be explained.

(Special design normal processing)
FIG. 10-10 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol normal processing. As shown in FIG. 10-10, in the special symbol normal processing, the CPU 103 stores the first pending memory buffer (a memory buffer for storing pending memory information of the first special symbol) or the second pending memory buffer (the second special symbol). It is determined whether or not there is pending storage data in the storage buffer for storing pending storage information of symbols (step 075FS001). If there is no pending storage data in either the first pending storage buffer or the second pending storage buffer (N in step 075FS001), it is determined whether a predetermined period of time has passed since the fluctuation was stopped (step 075FS002). If the predetermined period has not elapsed since the fluctuation stopped (N in step 075FS002), the special symbol normal processing is ended. On the other hand, if a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the fluctuation stopped (Y in step 075FS002), a process for transmitting a customer waiting demonstration designation command is performed (step 075FS003), and the special symbol normal process is ended. Here, when the customer waiting demonstration designation command is transmitted, a customer waiting demonstration designation command sent flag indicating that the customer waiting demonstration designation command has been transmitted is set. Then, when executing the special symbol normal processing after the next timer interrupt after sending the customer waiting demo designation command, the customer waiting demo designation command sent flag is set. It is controlled so that the waiting demo specification command is not sent. Such a customer waiting demonstration designation command sent flag is reset when the next variable display of special symbols starts.

When there is pending storage data in the first pending storage buffer or the second pending storage buffer (Y in step 075FS001), the CPU 103 determines that the first data among the data set in the pending specific area indicates "second". It is determined whether it is data (step 075FS004). If the first data set in the reservation specific area is not data indicating "second" (that is, data indicating "first") (N in step 075FS004), CPU 103 moves the special symbol pointer (second Data indicating "first" is set in a flag indicating whether the special symbol process is being performed for the first special symbol or the second special symbol (step 075FS005). If the first data set in the reservation specific area is data indicating "second" (Y in step 075FS004), the CPU 103 sets data indicating "second" in the special symbol pointer (step 075FS006). ).

In this embodiment, the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner and the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner depending on whether data indicating "first" or "second" is set in the special symbol pointer. The variable display of symbols is executed using a common processing routine. When data indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer, a variable display of the first special symbol is performed based on the pending storage data stored in the first pending storage buffer. On the other hand, when data indicating "second" is set in the special symbol pointer, a variable display of the second special symbol is performed based on the pending storage data stored in the second pending storage buffer.

Under the control of steps 075FS004 to 075FS006, if even one data of the second pending memory exists in the second pending memory buffer, the variable display of the second special symbol based on the data of the second pending memory is This is executed in priority to the variable display of the first special symbol based on the data of the first pending memory.

Next, the CPU 103 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the pending storage number=1 indicated by the special symbol pointer and stores it in the pending storage buffer of the RAM 102 (step 075FS007). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 stores each random value stored in the storage area corresponding to the first pending storage number = 1 in the first pending storage buffer. is read out and stored in the pending storage buffer of the RAM 102. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 103 reads out each random value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second pending storage number = 1 in the second pending storage buffer. The data is stored in the pending storage buffer of the RAM 102.

Then, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the pending storage number counter indicated by the special symbol pointer, and shifts the contents of each storage area (step 075FS008). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the first pending storage number counter, and adds the value of each storage area in the first pending storage buffer. Shift content. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the count value of the second pending storage number counter is subtracted by 1, and the contents of each storage area in the second pending storage buffer are shifted.

That is, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 stores data in the storage area corresponding to the first pending storage number=n (n=2, 3, 4) in the first pending storage buffer of the RAM 102. Each stored random number value is stored in a storage area corresponding to the first pending storage number=n-1. In addition, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", each of the items stored in the storage area corresponding to the second pending storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second pending storage buffer of the RAM 102 The random value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second pending storage number=n-1.

Therefore, the order in which each random value stored in each storage area corresponding to each first pending memory number (or each second pending memory number) is extracted is always based on the first pending memory number (or each second pending memory number). The second pending storage number) is arranged to match the order of 1, 2, 3, and 4.

Next, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a pending memory number designation command indicated by the special symbol pointer to the performance control CPU 120 based on the value of the pending memory counter indicated by the special symbol pointer after subtraction ( Step 075FS009). In this case, if a value indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a first pending storage number designation command. Further, when the value indicating "second" is set in the special symbol pointer, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a second pending storage number designation command.

Next, the CPU 103 transmits a background designation command (step 075FS010), reads random R (random number for jackpot determination) from the pending storage buffer, and executes the jackpot determination module (step 075FS011). In this case, the CPU 103 reads out the random numbers for jackpot determination extracted in the starting winning determination process and stored in the first pending storage buffer and the second pending storage buffer in advance, and performs the jackpot determination. The jackpot determination module is a program that executes a process of comparing a predetermined jackpot determination value (see FIG. 10-8) and a jackpot determination random number, and determining that it is a jackpot if they match. In other words, it is a program that executes a jackpot determination process.

In the jackpot determination process, when the gaming state is variable probability state (high probability state), the probability of hitting the jackpot is higher than when the gaming state is non-probable variable state (normal gaming state and time saving state). ing. Specifically, there is a jackpot determination table in which a large number of jackpot determination values is set in advance (the table in which the numbers on the right side of Figure 10-8 (A) are set), and a table in which a large number of jackpot determination values is set in advance. A normal jackpot determination table (table in which the numerical values on the left side of FIG. 10-8(A) are set) is provided, which is set smaller than the regular jackpot determination table. Then, the CPU 103 checks whether the gaming state is in a variable probability state, and when the gaming state is in a variable probability state, the CPU 103 performs processing to determine a jackpot using the variable probability jackpot determination table, and when the gaming state is normal. When the game is in the state or the time saving state, the jackpot judgment process is performed using the normal jackpot judgment table. That is, when the value of the random number for jackpot determination (random R) matches any of the jackpot determination values shown in FIG. 10-8(A), the CPU 103 determines that the special symbol is a jackpot. If it is determined to be a jackpot (Y in step 075FS011), the process moves to step 075FS012. In addition, deciding whether or not to make a jackpot means deciding whether to move to a jackpot gaming state, but also deciding whether to make a stop symbol in a special symbol a jackpot symbol. .

It should be noted that confirmation of whether the current gaming state is a variable probability state is performed based on whether or not a variable probability flag is set. The variable probability flag is set when the gaming state is transferred to a variable probability state, and is reset when the variable probability state is ended. Specifically, the probability change flag is set in the process of ending the jackpot game, and then either the condition that the variable display is performed a predetermined number of times (150 times), or the condition that the next jackpot has been determined. It is reset at the timing when the variable display of the special symbol ends and the stop symbol is stopped and displayed when the earlier condition is satisfied.

If the value of the random number for jackpot determination (random R) does not match any jackpot determination value (N in step 075FS011), the process proceeds to step 075FS016, which will be described later.

If the value of the random number for jackpot determination (random R) matches any jackpot determination value in step 075FS011, the CPU 103 sets a jackpot flag indicating a jackpot (step 075FS012). Note that the jackpot flag is reset when the jackpot game ends. The first special symbol jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 10-8(B) and the second special symbol jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 10-8(C) are used to determine the jackpot type to one of the plurality of types. Select one of the special symbol jackpot type determination tables (step 075FS013). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 selects the first special symbol jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 10-8(B). Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 103 selects the second special symbol jackpot type determination table of FIG. 10-8(C).

Next, the CPU 103 reads out the random numbers for jackpot type determination extracted in the starting winning determination process and stored in advance in the first pending storage buffer and the second pending storage buffer, and uses the jackpot type determination table selected in step 075FS013 to determine the pending winnings. The jackpot type and jackpot symbol corresponding to the value that matches the value of the random number (random 1) for jackpot type determination stored in the storage buffer are determined (step 075FS014).

As shown in Figures 10-8(B) and (C), for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the relationship between the jackpot type and the jackpot symbol is set so that the jackpot symbol is different for each jackpot type. Since the jackpot type and the jackpot pattern are determined at the same time, the correspondence between the jackpot pattern and the game control according to the jackpot type is simplified, so that the game control can be prevented from becoming complicated.

Further, the CPU 103 sets jackpot type data indicating the determined jackpot type in the jackpot type buffer in the RAM 102 (step 075FS015). For example, when the jackpot type is "5R normal jackpot", "01" is set as the jackpot type data. When the jackpot type is "5R probability variable jackpot", "02" is set as the jackpot type data. When the jackpot type is "10R probability variable jackpot", "03" is set as the jackpot type data.

Next, the CPU 103 sets a stop symbol as a special symbol (step 075FS016). Specifically, if the jackpot flag is not set, a "-" which is a losing symbol is set as a stop symbol of the special symbol. When the jackpot flag is set, the jackpot symbol determined in step 075FS014 is set as the stop symbol of the special symbol according to the determination result of the jackpot type. That is, when the jackpot type is determined to be "5R normal jackpot", "1" is set as the stop symbol of the special symbol. When the jackpot type is determined to be "5R probability variable jackpot", "3" is set as the stop symbol of the special symbol. When the jackpot type is determined to be "10R probability variable jackpot", "7" is determined as the special symbol stopping symbol.

Then, the CPU 103 transmits a display result designation command (step 075FS017), and updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (S111) (step 075FS018).

(Fluctuation pattern setting process)
FIGS. 10-11 are flowcharts illustrating an example of the variation pattern setting process. As shown in FIG. 10-11, in the variation pattern setting process, the CPU 103 determines a variation pattern (step 075FS101). Specifically, when the jackpot flag is set, the CPU 103 selects the jackpot variation pattern type determination table according to the jackpot type, and when the jackpot flag is not set, the CPU 103 selects the jackpot variation pattern type determination table. Select the type determination table. Then, the CPU 103 reads Random 2 (a random number for determining the type of fluctuation pattern) from the first pending storage buffer or the second pending storage buffer, and selects one of the plurality of types of fluctuation patterns by referring to the selected table. decided on.

Next, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a variation pattern command corresponding to the determined variation pattern to the production control CPU 120 (step 075FS102).

Next, the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to the variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern in the variation time timer formed in the RAM 102 (step 075FS103). Then, the CPU 103 performs control to send the symbol variation designation command to the production control CPU 120 (step 075FS104), and updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol variation process (S112) (step 075FS105). ).

(Special pattern variation processing)
FIG. 10-12 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol variation processing. As shown in FIG. 10-11, in the special symbol variation process, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the variation time timer (step 075FS201), and when the variation time timer times out (Y in step 075FS202), the CPU 103 changes the value of the special symbol process flag. It is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol stop processing (S113) (Step 075FS203). If the variable time timer has not timed out (N at step 075FS202), the process is ended.

(Special pattern stop processing)
FIG. 10-13 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol stop processing. As shown in FIG. 10-13, in the special symbol stop processing, the CPU 103 sets the end flag to end the variable display of the special symbol, and stops the special symbol in the special symbol 1 variable display section 075F021 or the special symbol 2 variable display section 075F022. Control is performed to derive and display the symbols (step 075FS301). In addition, if the data indicating "1st" is set in the special symbol pointer, the variation of the 1st special symbol in the special symbol 1 variable display section 075F021 is ended, and "2nd" is indicated in the special symbol pointer. If the data is set, the variation of the second special symbol on the special symbol 2 variable display section 075F022 is ended. Further, a symbol confirmation designation command is set in the performance control CPU 120 (step 075FS302). As a result, a symbol confirmation designation command is sent to the production control CPU 120. Next, the CPU 103 determines whether the jackpot flag is set (step 075FS303). If the jackpot flag is not set (N at step 075FS303), the process moves to step 075FS309.

If the jackpot flag is set (Y in step 075FS303), the CPU 103 resets the probability change flag and the time saving flag (step 075FS304). Next, a jackpot start designation command and a right hit display lighting command are transmitted to the performance control CPU 120 (step 075FS305).

In addition, with reference to the opening pattern data stored in the RO101, the number of openings (for example, 5 times or 10 times), opening time (for example, 29 seconds), and the interval between rounds for the regular big winning hole and the V big winning hole. Data indicating the opening mode such as the interval time (for example, 0.5 seconds) is set in a predetermined storage area (step 075FS306). Specifically, in the case of a 5R normal jackpot, the opening mode for opening the normal jackpot in all of 1 to 5R is stored in a predetermined storage area provided in the RAM 102. In the case of a 5R probability-variable jackpot, opening modes such as opening the normal big prize opening in the 1st to 3rd rounds and the 5th round and opening the V big winning opening in the 4th round are stored in a predetermined storage area provided in the RAM 102. In addition, in the case of a 10R variable jackpot, opening modes such as opening the normal big winning hole in the 1st to 8th and 10th rounds and opening the V big winning hole in the 9th round are stored in a predetermined storage area provided in the RAM 102. Data on the number of openings (5 times or 10 times) is set in an opening number counter for counting the number of openings.

Further, a value corresponding to the fanfare time (for example, the time when the occurrence of the jackpot is announced on the image display device 5) which is the jackpot display time is set in the jackpot control timer (step 075FS307). Thereafter, in the jackpot opening preprocessing, the jackpot opening control timer is decremented by 1, and when it becomes 0, the jackpot opening is opened and a round is started. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot release preprocessing (S114) (step 075FS308), and the process is ended.

If it is determined in step 075FS303 that the jackpot flag is not set (N in step 075FS303), the CPU 103 determines whether or not a time-saving flag indicating that the time-saving state is set (step 075FS309). . If the time saving flag is not set (N at step 075FS309), the process moves to step 075FS316. If the time saving flag is set (Y in step 075FS309), the counter value of the time saving number counter indicating the remaining number of fluctuations in the time saving state is subtracted by 1 (step 075FS310). Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the time saving number counter has become 0 (step 075FS311). When the value of the time saving number counter becomes 0 (Y in step 075FS311), it is determined that the duration of the time saving state has ended, and the time saving flag is reset (step 075FS312). As a result, when a variable display that results in a loss display is performed a specific number of times (150 times) in the time saving state, the gaming state shifts from the time saving state to the non-time saving state. In step 075FS311, if the value of the time saving number counter is not 0 (N in step 075FS311), the process moves to step 075FS316.

After step 075FS312, it is determined whether a variable probability flag indicating a variable probability state is set (step 075FS313). If the probability variation flag is set (Y in step 075FS313), the probability variation flag is reset (step 075FS314). Next, the CPU 103 transmits a normal state designation command to the performance control CPU 120 in response to the transition of the gaming state from the time saving state to the normal state (low probability/low base state) (step 075FS315), and proceeds to step 075FS316. move on. If the probability variation flag is not set in step 075FS313 (N in step 075FS313), the process proceeds to step 075FS315 without performing the process in step 075FS314. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (S110) (step 075FS316), and the process ends.

(Jackpot release preprocessing)
FIG. 10-14 is a flowchart showing an example of jackpot release preprocessing. As shown in FIG. 10-14, in the jackpot opening preprocessing, the CPU 103 updates the value of the jackpot control timer by -1 (subtraction update) (step 075FS401). Then, it is determined whether the value of the big winning opening control timer is 0 (step 075FS402), and if the value of the big winning opening control timer is not 0 (N in step 075FS402), the process is ended.

When the value of the big winning opening control timer is 0 (Y in step 075FS402), a command for specifying the opening of the big winning opening is transmitted to the performance control CPU 120 (step 075FS403). Then, the solenoid 82 is driven according to the opening pattern to open the normal big prize opening (step 075FS404). As a result, in the 1st round, the normal big prize opening is opened.

Next, based on the opening pattern data (for example, the data stored in the RAM 102 in step 075FS306), the CPU 103 sets the big winning opening control timer to the maximum time that the big winning opening can be opened (big winning opening opening time). The corresponding big prize opening opening time (29 seconds) is set (step 075FS405). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot opening process (S115) (step 075FS406), and the process ends.

(Processing during jackpot opening)
FIG. 10-15 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot opening process. As shown in FIG. 10-15, in the jackpot opening process, the CPU 103 updates the value of the jackpot control timer by -1 (subtraction update) (step 075FS501).

Then, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the big prize opening control timer has become 0 (step 075FS502). When the value of the big prize opening control timer is 0 (Y in step 075FS501), the process moves to step 075FS511. When the value of the big winning hole control timer is not 0 (N in step 075FS502), it is determined whether the normal big winning hole or the V big winning hole is being opened (step 075FS503). Whether the normal big winning hole or the V big winning hole is open can be determined based on the value of the opening number counter.

In step 075FS503, if it is determined that the normal big winning hole or the V big winning hole is not open (N in step 075FS503), the process ends.

If the normal big winning hole or the V big winning hole is open (Y in step 075FS503), it is determined whether the count switch 23 or the V winning switch 075F024 is turned on (step 075FS504). If neither the count switch 23 nor the V winning switch 075F024 is turned on (N in step 075FS504), the process ends. On the other hand, if either the count switch 23 or the V winning switch 075F024 is on (Y in step 075FS504), the winning number counter is +1 (updated and updated) (step 075FS505).

Next, it is determined whether the probability variation determination flag is set (step 075FS506). The variable probability determination flag is a flag that is set when it is determined that control is to be performed in a variable probability state when a V winning occurs. If the probability change determination flag is set (Y in step 075FS506), the process moves to step 075FS510. On the other hand, if the probability variation determination flag is not set (N in step 075FS506), it is determined whether the V winning switch 075F024 is turned on (step 075FS507). If the V winning switch 075F024 is not turned on (N in step 075FS507), the process moves to step 075FS510. On the other hand, if the V winning switch is on (Y in step 075FS507), the probability variation determination flag is set (step 075FS508), the probability variation determination device passage designation command is sent (step 075FS509), and the process moves to step 075FS510. do.

Then, the CPU 103 determines whether the value of the winning prize counter is a predetermined number (for example, 10) (step 075FS510). If the value of the winning prize counter does not reach the predetermined value (N at step 075FS510), the process ends.

When the value of the number of winnings counter reaches a predetermined value (Y in step 075FS510), the CPU 103 drives the solenoid 82 to close the normal big winning opening, or drives the solenoid 075F083 to close the V big winning opening. (Step 075FS511). Next, the CPU 103 performs processing to clear (set to 0) the value of the winning prize counter (step 075FS512). Next, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot release post-processing (S116) (step 075FS513), and ends the process.

(Post-processing after jackpot release)
FIG. 10-16 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot release post-processing. As shown in FIG. 10-16, in the jackpot release post-processing, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the value of the release number counter is 0 (step 075FS601).

If the value of the opening number counter is 0 (Y in step 075FS601), a jackpot end designation command is sent to the production control CPU 120 (step 075FS602), and the jackpot end time (indicating that the jackpot game has ended) is sent to the big winning opening control timer. For example, a value corresponding to the time to be notified on the image display device 5) is set (step 075FS603), the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot end process (S117) (step 075FS604), and the process end.

In step 075FS601, if the value of the number of openings counter is not 0 (N in step 075FS601), a command specified after opening the big winning opening is sent to the performance control CPU 120 (step 075FS605), and the round is set in the big winning opening control timer. A value corresponding to the interval time from the end to the start of the next round is set (step 075FS606).

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether the round before the V big prize opening is opened (also referred to as the V opening round), that is, the next round is the V opening round (step 075FS607). If it is not before the V opening round (N in step 075FS607), control is performed to drive the solenoid 82 to open the normal big prize opening (step 075FS608). On the other hand, if it is before the V opening round (Y in step 075FS607), control is performed to drive the solenoid 075F083 to open the V big prize opening (step 075FS609).

After step 075FS608 or step 075FS609, the CPU 103 transmits a special winning opening designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 075FS610). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot opening process (S115) (step 075FS611), and ends the process.

(Jackpot end processing)
FIG. 10-17 is a flowchart showing an example of jackpot termination processing. As shown in FIG. 10-17, in the jackpot end process, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the jackpot control timer to which the jackpot end time is set (step 075FS701). Then, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the value of the jackpot control timer is 0 (whether or not the jackpot end time has elapsed) (step 075FS702). If the value of the big prize opening control timer is not 0 (N in step 075FS702), the process ends. If the value of the big winning opening control timer is 0 (Y in step 075FS702), the jackpot flag is reset (step 075FS703).

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the probability variation determination flag, which is set by passing through the V winning area, is set (step 075FS704). If the probability variation determination flag is not set (N at step 075FS704), the process moves to step 075FS705. In step 075FS704, if the probability variation determination flag is set (Y in step 075FS704), a probability variation flag indicating the probability variation state is set (step 075FS707). Next, a probability change state designation command is transmitted to the production control CPU 120 (step 075FS708), a probability change determination flag is reset (step 075FS709), and the process moves to step 075FS710.

In step 075FS710, a time saving flag indicating that the time saving state is set is set (step 075FS710), and a time saving number counter is set to 150 (step 075FS711). Then, the process moves to step 075FS712.

On the other hand, in step 075FS704, if the probability change determination flag is not set (N in step 075FS704), in step 075FS705, a time-saving flag indicating that the time-saving state is in effect is set (step 075FS705), and a time-saving number counter is set to 100. (Step 075FS706), and the process moves to Step 075FS712.

In step 075FS712, a time saving state designation command is transmitted to the production control CPU 120 (step 075FS712). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (S110) (step 075FS713), and ends the process. Note that the performance control CPU 120 side can recognize whether the game is in a variable probability, time saving, or normal gaming state by a variable probability state designation command transmitted from the CPU 103.

(Jackpot performance processing)
Next, processing by the performance control CPU 120 mounted on the performance control board 12 will be explained. FIG. 10-18 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot production process. As shown in FIG. 10-18, in the jackpot production process, the production control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the jackpot end designation command reception flag is set (step 075FS651). Here, flags such as the jackpot end designation command reception flag are set by the performance control CPU 120 when the command reception buffer formed in the ROM 121 stores data indicating that the jackpot end designation command has been received. It is deleted at a predetermined timing, such as when the game ends.

When the jackpot end designation command reception flag is not set (N in step 075FS651), the performance control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step 075FS652).

Next, it is determined whether the process timer has timed out (step 075FS653). When the process timer times out (Y in step 075FS653), the process data is switched (step 075FS655). Then, the process timer is restarted by setting the next set process timer setting value in the process table to the process timer (step 075FS656). Further, in accordance with the contents of the process data set next, control of the effect devices (image display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, game effect lamp 9, etc.) is executed (step 075FS657). For example, the performance control CPU 120 reads image data from the ROM 121 according to the contents of the process data, and outputs the read image data to the image display device 5 in order to display an image according to the performance during the round on the image display device 5. . In addition, a control signal is output to the lamp control board 14 in order to control various lamps such as the game effect lamp 9 to turn on/blink/turn off. Further, in order to cause the speakers 8L and 8R to output audio, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the audio control board 13. Then, the process ends.

If the process timer has not timed out (N in step 075FS653), control of the production devices (image display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, game effect lamps 9, etc.) will continue according to the contents of the set process data. (Step 075FS654). Then, the process ends.

The effect control CPU 120 sets the above-mentioned process data based on the effect control command received from the CPU 103 mounted on the main board 11. For example, when the performance control CPU 120 receives a jackpot start designation command (A0 series command) from the CPU 103 based on the occurrence of a jackpot, the performance control CPU 120 executes a process corresponding to the fanfare performance in order to execute the fanfare performance by controlling the performance device. Set the data. Furthermore, when the performance control CPU 120 receives a right-handed display lighting command from the CPU 103 based on the occurrence of a jackpot, the production control CPU 120 displays the right-handed display section 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 in order to encourage the player to play right. Turn on a lighting means such as an LED.

In addition, when the performance control CPU 120 receives a big prize opening designation command (A1 series command) from the CPU 103 at the start of each round of the jackpot, the performance control CPU 120 executes the performance during the round by controlling the performance device as follows. In order to do so, process data corresponding to the performance during the round is set.

When the production control CPU 120 receives a big prize opening designation command (A102 command) from the CPU 103 at the start of 2R of the 5R normal jackpot, it executes a V probability variation suggestion production that suggests whether or not it is a probability variation jackpot. Set process data. At this time, the performance control CPU 120 specifies the type of jackpot (in this case, 5R normal jackpot) based on the already received jackpot start specification command (A0 series command), and also specifies the jackpot opening specification command (A102). A jackpot round (in this case, 2R) is specified based on a command), and process data for executing a performance (in this case, a V probability variable suggestion performance) according to the round in the specified jackpot is set.

When the production control CPU 120 receives a command (A102 command) specifying that the big winning hole is open from the CPU 103 at the start of 2R of the 5R probability variation jackpot, the production control CPU 120 generates process data for executing the V probability variation suggestion production (see Figure 10-41). Set. At this time, the production control CPU 120 specifies the type of jackpot (in this case, 5R probability variable jackpot) based on the jackpot start specification command (A0 series command) that has already been received, and also specifies the jackpot type (in this case, 5R probability variable jackpot), and also specifies the jackpot opening specification command (A102). A jackpot round (in this case, 2R) is specified based on a command), and process data for executing a performance (in this case, a V probability variable suggestion performance) according to the round in the specified jackpot is set.

In addition, when the production control CPU 120 receives a command (A103 command) specifying that the big prize opening is open from the CPU 103 at the start of 3R of the 5R fixed-variable jackpot, the CPU 120 for performance control receives a V notice that foretells that the next 4R will be the V opening round. Set process data to execute the effect (see Figure 10-42). At this time, the production control CPU 120 specifies the type of jackpot (in this case, 5R probability variable jackpot) based on the jackpot start specification command (A0 series command) that has already been received, and also specifies the jackpot type (in this case, 5R probability variable jackpot), and also specifies the jackpot opening specification command (A103). A jackpot round (in this case, 3R) is specified based on the specified jackpot round (in this case, 3R), and process data for executing a performance (in this case, V preview performance) according to the round in the specified jackpot is set.

In addition, when the performance control CPU 120 receives a command after the opening of the big winning hole (A203 command) from the CPU 103 after 3R of the 5R probability-variable jackpot, the production control CPU 120 causes the game ball to enter the V big winning hole which is a specific area between rounds. Set the process data to execute the Aim for V effect (see Figure 10-43). At this time, the production control CPU 120 specifies the type of jackpot (in this case, 5R probability variable jackpot) based on the jackpot start designation command (A0 series command) that has already been received, and also specifies the jackpot type (in this case, 5R probability variable jackpot), and also specifies the jackpot after opening jackpot opening command (A203). The finished jackpot round (in this case, 3R) is specified based on the command), and process data for executing a corresponding performance (in this case, aim for V performance) after the round during the specified jackpot is set. The Aim for V effect is a guidance display using an image display related to the V grand prize opening, which is a specific area. Specifically, in the Aim for V effect, an image is displayed that urges the player to hit the ball to the right so as to fire the game ball aiming at the V grand prize opening, which is a specific area. In the Aim for V effect, an image may be displayed pointing to the V grand prize opening itself, which is a specific area, or an image may be displayed pointing to the vicinity of the V grand prize opening, which is a specific area. , an image may be displayed that points to the route to the V grand prize opening, which is the specific area.

In addition, when the production control CPU 120 receives a big prize opening designation command (A104 command) from the CPU 103 at the start of the 4R of the 5R probability-variable jackpot, it continues to aim for V and executes the production (see Figure 10-44). Set process data for At this time, the performance control CPU 120 specifies the type of jackpot (in this case, 5R probability variable jackpot) based on the jackpot start specification command (A0 series command) that has already been received, and also specifies the jackpot type (in this case, 5R probability variable jackpot), and also specifies the jackpot opening specification command (A104). A jackpot round (in this case, 4R) is specified based on the specified jackpot round (4R in this case), and process data for executing a performance (in this case, an aim for V performance) according to the round in the specified jackpot is set.

When the performance control CPU 120 receives a big prize opening specifying command (A108 command) from the CPU 103 at the start of the 8th round of the 10R fixed-variable jackpot, the CPU 120 performs a V preview performance that foretells that the next 9th round will be the V opening round. Set process data for execution. At this time, the production control CPU 120 specifies the type of jackpot (in this case, 10R probability variable jackpot) based on the jackpot start specification command (A0 series command) that has already been received, and also specifies the jackpot type (in this case, 10R probability variable jackpot), and also specifies the jackpot opening specification command (A108 A jackpot round (in this case, 8R) is specified based on the command), and process data for executing a performance (in this case, V preview performance) corresponding to the round in the specified jackpot is set.

In addition, when the performance control CPU 120 receives a command after opening the big winning hole (A208 command) from the CPU 103 after 8R of the 10R probability-variable jackpot, the CPU 120 for performance control causes the game ball to enter the V big winning hole which is a specific area between rounds. Aim for the V that makes you want to do something. Set the process data to execute the effect. At this time, the production control CPU 120 specifies the type of jackpot (in this case, 10R probability variable jackpot) based on the jackpot start specification command (A0 series command) that has already been received, and also specifies the jackpot type (in this case, 10R probability variable jackpot), and also specifies the specification command after opening the jackpot (A208 The finished jackpot round (in this case, 8R) is specified based on the specified jackpot round (in this case, 8R), and process data for executing a corresponding performance (in this case, aim for V performance) is set.

In addition, when the performance control CPU 120 receives a big prize opening designation command (A109 command) from the CPU 103 at the start of 9R of the 10R probability-variable jackpot, it sets process data for continuing to aim for V and execute the performance. . At this time, the production control CPU 120 specifies the type of jackpot (in this case, 10R probability variable jackpot) based on the already received jackpot start specification command (A0 series command), and also specifies the jackpot opening specification command (A109). A jackpot round (in this case, 9R) is specified based on a command), and process data for executing a performance (in this case, an aim for V performance) corresponding to the round in the specified jackpot is set.

Furthermore, when the output control CPU 120 receives a probability change determination device passing designation command (AD00 command) from the CPU 103 during the jackpot round, the V winning prize control CPU 120 executes the V winning presentation by controlling the presentation device as follows. Set process data that corresponds to the performance.

When the production control CPU 120 receives a probability change determination device passage designation command (AD00 command) from the CPU 103 during 4R of the 5R probability variation jackpot, it sets process data for executing the V winning production (see Figure 10-44). .

When the performance control CPU 120 receives a probability variation determination device passage designation command (AD00) from the CPU 103 during 9R of the 10R probability variation jackpot, it sets process data for executing the V winning production.

In addition, when the performance control CPU 120 receives a jackpot end designation command (A3 type command) from the CPU 103 based on the end of the jackpot game state, the performance control CPU 120 performs an ending performance indicating the end of the jackpot game state (FIGS. 10-46 and 10). -47)).

In this way, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect devices such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9 by setting process data based on the effect control command received from the CPU 103, and performs various operations. Execute the performance.

[Outline of game progress]
In the pachinko gaming machine 1 having the feature section 075F configured as described above, the game progresses as follows. Furthermore, although the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature section 075F also has the content of the game played in the basic pachinko gaming machine 1 that has already been explained, below, we will particularly explain the game of the part related to the feature section 075F. do.

In the pachinko game machine 1, the player first hits the game ball to the left to launch the game ball toward a first downstream path passing through the left side area of the game area. When the fired game ball enters the first starting prize opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special figure game is started. As a result of the first special figure game, when the special figure 1 variable display section 075F021 becomes a display mode showing the jackpot symbol, a jackpot occurs.

As described above, the types of jackpots in the first special figure game include the 5R normal jackpot, the 5R probability variable jackpot, and the 10R probability variable jackpot. When a jackpot occurs, a fanfare performance is performed, and a right-hand-hitting promotion performance is also performed to urge the player to play right-handed. The effect to promote right-handed hitting includes characters (for example, "right-handed hitting") and figures (for example, an arrow pointing to the right, which is the direction of the second downstream path) that encourage right-handed hitting on the screen of the image display device 5. While displaying the image, right-handed hitting is encouraged by lighting means such as LEDs in the right-handed hitting display section 075F030 of the special pattern LED board 075F020 and the right-handed hitting display section 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050. As a result, the player will play right-handed from then on.

During a round in the jackpot game state, the jackpot is opened a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 times in the case of a 5R normal jackpot and a 5R probability variable jackpot, and 10 times in the case of a 10R probability variable jackpot). One opening of the grand prize opening is determined by the timing when a predetermined period of time (for example, 29 seconds) has elapsed, and the timing until the number of game balls that have entered the grand prize opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10 balls). This will continue until the earliest of the two.

In the case of a 5R normal jackpot, the normal jackpot opens in the 1st to 3rd and 5th rounds, but the V big jackpot opens only in the 4th round. However, since the control pattern of the distribution member (not shown) in the attacker is a control pattern that makes it difficult to win a V prize, a V prize will not be won. In addition, since the player does not win a V prize, the aim for V effect is not executed in the 4th round, and the same background image as in the 1st round is displayed. Specifically, in the case of a 5R normal jackpot, the normal jackpot is opened in the 1st and 2nd rounds, and in the 2nd round, a V probability variable suggestion performance that suggests whether or not it is a probability variable jackpot is executed. Then, as a result of the V probability variation suggestion performance, it is announced that it is not a probability variation jackpot but a normal jackpot. Thereafter, the V big prize opening is opened in the 4th round, but no V winning prize is generated, and the normal big prize opening is opened in the subsequent 5th round, and when the 5th round ends, the ending effect is executed.

In the case of a 5R variable jackpot, the normal big prize opening is opened in the 1st to 3rd rounds and the 5th round, but the V big winning opening is opened only in the 4th round. Specifically, in the case of a 5R fixed-variable jackpot, the regular jackpot opens in the 1st and 2nd rounds, as in the 5R normal jackpot, and in the 2nd round, a V fixed-variable jackpot that indicates whether or not it is a fixed-variable jackpot is opened. Suggestive performance is executed. Then, as a result of the V probability variation suggestion performance, it is announced that the probability variation jackpot is achieved. Then, in the subsequent 3rd round, a V preview effect is executed to foretell that the next 4th round will be a V open round. In the 4th R, when the V big prize opening is opened and the game ball that has entered the V big prize opening is detected by the V winning switch 075F024, a V winning prize is generated. As a result, the player is given the right to control the gaming state to a variable probability state after the end of the jackpot round. After that, in the 5th round, the normal big prize opening is opened again, and when the 5th round ends, the ending effect is executed.

In the case of a 10R variable jackpot, the normal big prize opening is opened in the 1st to 8th rounds and the 10th round, but the V big winning opening is opened only in the 9th round. Specifically, in the case of a 10R probability-variable jackpot, the regular big prize opening is opened in the 1st to 7th rounds, and in the 7th round, a V probability-variable suggestion effect that suggests whether or not it is a probability-variable jackpot is executed. Then, as a result of the V probability variation suggestion performance, it is announced that the probability variation jackpot is achieved. Then, in the subsequent 8th round, a V preview effect is executed to foretell that the next 9th round will be a V open round. In the 9th R, when the V big prize opening is opened and the game ball that has entered the V big prize opening is detected by the V winning switch 075F024, a V winning prize is generated. As a result, the player is given the right to control the gaming state to a variable probability state after the end of the jackpot round. After that, in the 10th round, the normal big prize opening is opened again, and when the 10th round ends, the ending effect is executed.

When the ending effect after the jackpot game state is finished, the game state is controlled to a time-saving state over a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 times in the case of 5R normal jackpot, 150 times in the case of 5R probability variable jackpot and 10R probability variable jackpot). be done. Furthermore, in the case of a 5R variable probability jackpot and a 10R variable probability jackpot, and when a V win occurs during the jackpot round, the gaming state remains in a variable probability state for a predetermined number of fluctuations (150 times) that are controlled to be in a time saving state. controlled by. That is, in the case of a 5R normal jackpot, the gaming state after the jackpot round becomes a low probability high base state, and in the case of a 5R probability variable jackpot or a 10R probability variable jackpot, the gaming state after the jackpot round becomes a high probability high base state.

Even in the variable probability state or short-time state after the jackpot round, the image display device 5, the right-hand game display section 075F030, and the right-hand game display section 075F055 continue to perform the right-hand game promotion performance. Therefore, after the first jackpot (also referred to as the first hit) occurs, the player is always urged to play right-handed by the right-handed hitting promotion performance even in a time-saving state after the jackpot round ends.

In the short time state, control is executed to shorten the average special symbol fluctuation time (the period in which the special symbol is varied) compared to the normal state, and the average regular symbol fluctuation time (the period in which the regular symbol is varied) is executed. Control is performed to shorten the period of time compared to the normal state, and furthermore, control is performed to improve the probability of "hitting the common drawing" in the common drawing game compared to the normal state. In addition, in the time saving state, by increasing the frequency of the variable winning ball device 6B forming the second starting winning hole being in the open state, the frequency at which game balls enter the second starting winning hole is increased, and the second starting winning hole is increased. Electric chew support control may be performed to facilitate winning into the winning opening (increase the number of entries, increase the frequency).

In the time saving state after the jackpot round, the second special drawing game is started by the fired game ball entering the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B. As a result of the second special figure game, when the special figure 2 variable display section 075F022 becomes a display mode showing a jackpot symbol, a jackpot (also referred to as a consecutive winning) occurs.

As described above, the type of jackpot in the second special figure game is the 10R probability variable jackpot. When a jackpot occurs, a fanfare performance is performed. Note that the right-handed hitting promotion effect by the image display device 5, the right-handed hitting display section 075F030, and the right-handed hitting display section 075F055 continues from the time of the first hit.

During a round in the jackpot game state, the jackpot is opened a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times). One opening of the grand prize opening is determined by the timing when a predetermined period of time (for example, 29 seconds) has elapsed, and the timing until the number of game balls that have entered the grand prize opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10 balls). This will continue until the earliest of the two.

Since it is a 10R variable jackpot, the normal big winning hole is opened in the 1st to 8th rounds and the 10th round, but the V big winning hole is opened only in the 9th round. Specifically, similar to the first win, the regular big prize opening is opened in the 1st to 7th rounds. Then, in the subsequent 8th round, a V preview effect is executed to foretell that the next 9th round will be a V open round. In the 9th R, when the V big prize opening is opened and the game ball that has entered the V big prize opening is detected by the V winning switch 075F024, a V winning prize is generated. As a result, the player is given the right to control the gaming state to a variable probability state after the end of the jackpot round. After that, in the 10th round, the normal big prize opening is opened again, and when the 10th round ends, the ending effect is executed.

Then, when the ending effect after the jackpot game state is finished, the game state is controlled to be a time-saving state and a variable probability state (high probability high base state) for a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 150 times), similar to the first time the winning state. be done. Even in the variable probability state after the jackpot round in consecutive winnings, the image display device 5, the right-handed hitting display section 075F030, and the right-handed hitting display section 075F055 continue to perform the right-handed hitting promotion effect. For this reason, after the first hit occurs, the player may receive consecutive winnings in a variable probability state or time-saving state after the end of the jackpot round, and the player may be in a variable-probability state or time-saving state after the jackpot round for the consecutive winnings has ended. Even in this state, the player is always encouraged to hit the ball to the right by the right-hand ball promotion performance.

The variable probability state or short time state ends without a jackpot occurring in either the variable probability state or short time state after the first jackpot round ends, or the variable probability state or short time state after the jackpot round for consecutive wins ends. Then, the gaming state is controlled to the normal state (low probability low base state), and the right-handed hitting promotion performance by the image display device 5, right-handed hitting display section 075F030, and right-handed hitting display section 075F055 also ends. As a result, the player again hits the game ball to the left to launch the game ball toward the first downstream path passing through the left side area of the game area.

[Timing chart of example of processing]
With reference to FIGS. 10-19 to 10-21, the timing of the main processes executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature section 075F will be explained. FIG. 10-19 is a timing chart showing an example of processing during winning fluctuations. FIG. 10-20 is a timing chart showing an example of processing during a jackpot. FIG. 10-21 is a timing chart showing an example of processing after the jackpot ends. Note that FIGS. 10-19 to 10-21 show the timing of processing when a 5R probability variable jackpot occurs.

As shown in FIG. 10-19, at t1, when the first special figure game is started by the game ball entering the first starting prize opening, the CPU 103 sends a hold storage number designation command to the performance control CPU 120. (C1 series command), background specification command (95 series command), symbol variation specification command (8D series command), display result specification command (8C series command), and variation pattern specification command (81 series command). On the other hand, the performance control CPU 120 displays decorative symbols in a variable manner in accordance with the fluctuations in the first special symbol, or displays fluctuating performances (for example, ready-to-reach performances, preview performances, etc.) in accordance with the fluctuations in the first special symbol. ) to set the process data to execute.

For example, the production control CPU 120 specifies the first pending memory number based on the pending memory number designation command, and updates the display of the first pending memory display area 075F005D, or changes the lighting mode of the special figure 1 memory display section 075F051. or update it. Furthermore, the performance control CPU 120 specifies the gaming state being controlled based on the background designation command, and controls the image display device 5 to display a background image corresponding to the gaming state. Further, the performance control CPU 120 specifies that the special symbol will start changing based on the symbol change designation command, and sets the start timing of the performance. Further, the performance control CPU 120 specifies the presence or absence of a jackpot and the type of jackpot based on the display result designation command, and determines a decorative pattern accordingly. Furthermore, based on the variation pattern designation command, the performance control CPU 120 determines the execution time of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the mode of the variable display of the decorative pattern (such as presence or absence of reach), and the performance content during the variable display of the decorative pattern (reach (type of production, etc.).

Thereafter, when the variation of the special symbols stops at t2, the CPU 103 transmits a symbol confirmation designation command (8F00) to the performance control CPU 120. Note that the performance control CPU 120 does not particularly set the performance based on the symbol confirmation designation command.

When a jackpot occurs as a result of the stoppage of fluctuation of the special symbol, at the subsequent t3, the CPU 103 issues a jackpot start designation command (A0 series command) and a right hit display lighting command (FD series command) to the performance control CPU 120. Send. On the other hand, the performance control CPU 120 sets the process data for executing the fanfare performance, and lights up the lighting means such as the LED in the right hit display section 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050. For example, as a fanfare performance, the performance control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to display an image congratulating the jackpot, or outputs a sound congratulating the jackpot from the speakers 8L and 8R. Set process data for In addition, the performance control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to display an image that encourages right-handed hitting, and outputs a sound that encourages right-handed hitting from the speakers 8L and 8R, as a right-handed promoting performance.

As shown in FIG. 10-20, when the jackpot round starts at t4, the CPU 103 opens the normal jackpot and sends a command (A101 command) to the production control CPU 120 to specify that the jackpot is open. Send. On the other hand, the performance control CPU 120 sets process data for executing the performance during the round in the 1R.

After that, when the 1st round ends at t5, the CPU 103 closes the normal grand prize opening and sends a command (A201 command) to specify after opening the grand prize opening to the performance control CPU 120. Note that the performance control CPU 120 does not particularly set the performance based on the specified command after opening the big winning hole.

After that, when the 2nd round starts at t6, the CPU 103 opens the normal big winning hole and transmits a big winning hole opening designation command (A102 command) to the performance control CPU 120. On the other hand, the performance control CPU 120 sets process data for executing the mid-round performance in the 2R. For example, the performance control CPU 120 sets process data for executing the V probability change suggestion performance (see FIG. 10-41) based on the large prize opening designation command (A102 command).

After that, when the 2nd round ends at t7, the CPU 103 closes the normal big winning hole and sends a special winning hole opening designation command (A202 command) to the performance control CPU 120. Note that the performance control CPU 120 does not particularly set the performance based on the specified command after opening the big winning hole.

After that, when the 3rd round starts at t8, the CPU 103 opens the normal big winning hole and transmits a big winning hole opening designation command (A103 command) to the performance control CPU 120. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 sets process data for executing the in-round effect in the 3rd round. For example, the performance control CPU 120 sets process data for executing the V preview performance (see FIG. 10-42) based on the grand prize opening designation command (A103 command).

After that, when the 3rd round ends at t9, the CPU 103 closes the normal big winning opening and transmits a special winning opening after opening designation command (A203 command) to the performance control CPU 120. On the other hand, the performance control CPU 120 sets process data for executing the inter-round performance between rounds from after the 3rd round to the 4th round. For example, the effect control CPU 120 sets process data for executing the Aim for V effect (see FIG. 10-43) based on the specified command after opening the grand prize opening (A203 command).

As shown in FIG. 10-21, after that, when the 4th round starts at t10, the CPU 103 opens the normal grand prize opening and sends a command (A104 command) to the production control CPU 120 to specify that the grand prize opening is open. Send. On the other hand, the performance control CPU 120 sets process data for executing the in-round performance in the 4th round. For example, the performance control CPU 120 executes the V preview performance (see Figure 10-42) based on the grand prize opening designation command (A104 command), and then executes the Aim for V performance (see Figure 10-43). Set process data for execution.

After that, when a V winning occurs at t11, the CPU 103 transmits a probability change determination device passage designation command (AD00 command) to the performance control CPU 120. On the other hand, the performance control CPU 120 sets process data for executing the V winning performance (see FIG. 10-44).

After that, when the 4th round ends at t12, the CPU 103 closes the normal big winning hole and sends a command after opening the big winning hole (A204 command) to the performance control CPU 120. Note that the performance control CPU 120 does not particularly set the performance based on the specified command after opening the big winning hole.

After that, when the 5th round starts at t13, the CPU 103 opens the normal big winning hole and transmits a big winning hole opening designation command (A105 command) to the performance control CPU 120. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 sets process data for executing the in-round effect in the 5th round.

After that, when the 5th round ends at t14, the CPU 103 closes the normal big winning opening and transmits a special winning opening after opening designation command (A205 command) to the performance control CPU 120. Note that the performance control CPU 120 does not particularly set the performance based on the specified command after opening the big winning hole.

After that, at t15, the CPU 103 transmits a jackpot end designation command (A3 type command) to the performance control CPU 120. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 sets process data for executing the ending effect.

After that, it is controlled to a variable probability state and a time saving state (high probability high base state), but in this state, the CPU 103 changes the production control command depending on whether the number of pending memories exceeds 0 or not.

For example, at t16, if the number of pending memories exceeds 0, the CPU 103 sends a pending memory number specification command (C2 series command), a background specification command (95 series command), a symbol variation specification command to the production control CPU 120, if the number of pending memories exceeds 0. A command (8D series command), a display result specification command (8C series command), and a variation pattern specification command (81 series command) are transmitted. On the other hand, the performance control CPU 120 displays decorative symbols in a variable manner in accordance with the fluctuations in the second special symbol, or performs fluctuating performances (for example, reach performance, preview performance, etc.) in accordance with the fluctuation in the second special symbol. ) to set the process data to execute.

On the other hand, if the number of pending memories does not exceed 0, the CPU 103 transmits a background designation command (95 series command) and a customer waiting demonstration designation command (9F series command) to the performance control CPU 120. On the other hand, the performance control CPU 120 performs a customer waiting demonstration performance (see FIG. 10-60) that can specify that no game is being played. For example, the performance control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to display an image with an initial value (for example, 123) as a decorative pattern or a small pattern, or stops the output of sound from the speakers 8L and 8R. Note that the customer waiting demonstration effect is not limited to the form shown in FIG. Any type of performance may be used as long as the person can be identified.

[Lamp lighting mode]
FIG. 10-22 is an explanatory diagram showing the lighting mode of the lamp. In this embodiment, the game effect lamps 9 (movable body lamp 9d, attacker lamp 9c, attacker upper lamp 075F009U, lower left lamp 075F009D, board right lamp 075F009F, board left lamp 075F009E, frame right lamp 075F009R, frame left lamp 075F009L) , the right-handed display section 075F030 of the special pattern LED board 075F020, and the right-handed display section 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 are all turned off in a blacked-out manner as shown in FIG. 10-22(A). Expressed as

In addition, in this embodiment, the game effect lamps 9 (movable body lamp 9d, attacker lamp 9c, attacker upper lamp 075F009U, lower left lamp 075F009D, board right lamp 075F009F, board left lamp 075F009E, frame right lamp 075F009R, frame left lamp 075F009L), the right-hand display section 075F030 of the special pattern LED board 075F020, and the right-hand display section 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 are lit up by white painting as shown in Figure 10-22 (B). It is expressed in the form of

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the game effect lamps 9 (movable lamp 9d, attacker lamp 9c, upper attacker lamp 075F009U, lower left lamp 075F009D, board right lamp 075F009F, board left lamp 075F009E, frame right lamp 075F009R, frame left lamp 075F009L), the right-hand display section 075F030 of the special pattern LED board 075F020, and the right-hand display section 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 light up/flash/blink in a manner according to the effect and the background displayed on the image display device 5. The state in which the light is turned off is represented by hatching as shown in FIG. 10-22(C).

[Production mode of pachinko gaming machine 1]
Next, the presentation mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 during the game will be explained. FIGS. 10-23 to 10-33 and FIGS. 10-38 to 10-50 are explanatory diagrams showing performance modes of the pachinko gaming machine 1 during a game.

As shown in FIG. 10-23(a), when the losing symbols stop due to the change in the special symbols of the previous game, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the stopping of the losing symbols. After that, if there is a first pending memory number, the CPU 103 sends a pending memory number specification command (C1 series command), a background specification command (95 series command), a symbol variation specification command (8D series command) to the performance control CPU 120. ), a display result designation command (8C series command), and a variation pattern designation command (81 series command). On the other hand, based on commands from the CPU 103, the production control CPU 120 displays decorative symbols in a variable manner in accordance with fluctuations in the first special symbol, or performs fluctuating production (for example, , reach performance, preview performance, etc.). Note that the effect control CPU 120 stores the data of each effect shown in FIGS. 10-23 (b1) to 10-24 (b3) as a reservation memory number designation command (C1 series command), a background designation command (95 series command), Settings are made based on the symbol variation specification command (8D series command), display result specification command (8C series command), and variation pattern specification command (81 series command). In other words, each performance performed between FIG. 10-23 (b1) to FIG. 10-24 (b3) is not triggered by a performance control command, but progresses over time.

As shown in FIG. 10-23 (b1), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the variation of the first special symbol. Further, as shown in FIG. 10-23 (b2), in the case of jackpot fluctuation, an image corresponding to the reach effect is displayed on the image display device 5, and a sound corresponding to the reach effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Then, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner according to the reach effect.

Thereafter, when the special symbols stop changing, the CPU 103 transmits a symbol confirmation designation command (8F00) to the performance control CPU 120. Note that the performance control CPU 120 does not particularly set the performance based on the symbol confirmation designation command.

As shown in FIG. 10-24 (b3), when a jackpot occurs as a result of the stoppage of the fluctuation of the special symbols, the CPU 103 sends a jackpot start designation command (A0 series command) to the performance control CPU 120 and lights up the right hit display. Send a command (FD-related command). On the other hand, the performance control CPU 120 executes the fanfare performance based on the command from the CPU 103, and lights up the lighting means such as the LED in the right-hand display section 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050. In addition, the production control CPU 120 inputs the data of each production shown in FIGS. 10-24 (c1) to 10-38 (d2) into a jackpot start designation command (A0 series command) and a right hit display lighting command (FD series command). Set based on. In other words, each performance performed between FIG. 10-24 (c1) to FIG. 10-38 (d2) is not triggered by a performance control command, but progresses over time.

Here, the fanfare performance will be explained in detail. The fanfare production is divided into multiple production parts. In this embodiment, the fanfare performance includes a blessing part, a name display part, and a right-handed driving promotion part. The blessing part is a performance part in which a performance to congratulate the jackpot is performed, and as described later in FIG. 10-24 (c1), an image congratulating the jackpot is displayed on the image display device 5. A sound congratulating the jackpot is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 changes to a lighting mode congratulating the jackpot. The name display part is a production part that not only informs the player that a jackpot round has started by notifying the name of the jackpot gaming state that has occurred, but also informs the player of the type of jackpot gaming state that has occurred, and is shown in FIG. -24 (c2) and (c3), as described later, a name image indicating the name of the jackpot gaming state is displayed on the image display device 5, and a sound corresponding to the start of the jackpot is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. , the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 changes so that the lighting mode corresponds to the start of the jackpot. The right-handed driving promotion part is a performance part that encourages the player to play right-handed, and uses text and graphic image displays as described later in Figures 10-24 (c4) to 10-33 (c29). A big right-handed hitting promotion performance is performed to encourage the player to hit right-handed. The performance control CPU 120 receives a symbol confirmation designation command (8F00) from the CPU 103 after the jackpot symbol stops and the symbol is determined, and then receives a jackpot start designation command (A0 series command) from the CPU 103. , the fanfare performance is started, and the fanfare is executed until the normal jackpot is opened and the jackpot round starts.

As shown in Figure 10-24 (c1), an image congratulating the jackpot (in this example, a character image and a character image saying "Congratulations!!") is displayed as a celebration part in the fanfare performance. The lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 changes so that it is displayed on the device 5, a sound congratulating the jackpot is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the lighting mode congratulates the jackpot. or In addition, as a performance to promote right-handed hitting, a small image consisting of a figure (in this example, an arrow pointing to the right) and text (in this example, the words "Right-handed") is displayed in the upper right corner of the image display device 5 to promote right-handed hitting. The performance is executed. The image display device 5 has a plurality of layers, and can display a predetermined image in each layer. As shown in Figure 10-24 (c1), the image consisting of figures and letters in the small right-handed promotion performance is an image congratulating the jackpot (in this example, a character image and "Congratulations!!") character image) is displayed in a layer on the front side (in the direction of the player when viewed from the pachinko gaming machine 1 side). In addition, in the fanfare performance, a sound that encourages right-handed batting is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and as a performance to promote right-handed batting, the lighting modes of right-handed batting display section 075F030 and right-handed batting display section 075F055 are designed to encourage right-handed batting. (in this example, it lights up). The starting order of the above-mentioned image display, lighting, etc. is as follows. First, after determining the symbol, the CPU 103 transmits a jackpot start designation command (A0-based command) and a right-hitting display lighting command (FD-based command), and lights up the right-hitting display section 075F030. The production control CPU 120 lights up the right-handed display section 075F055 based on the received right-handed display lighting command (FD-based command), and at the same time lights up the small-right-based hitting promotion production based on the received jackpot start designation command (A0-based command). An image consisting of figures and characters in , and an image congratulating the jackpot are displayed on the image display device 5. At this time, the image consisting of figures and letters in the small right-handed driving promotion effect located closer to the front side is displayed on the image display device 5 at an earlier timing than the image congratulating the player on hitting the jackpot. In other words, first, the lamps light up in the order of right-handed hitting display section 075F030 and right-handed hitting display section 075F055, and then an image consisting of figures and letters to promote small right-handed hitting, and an image congratulating the jackpot. The image is displayed. In addition, the display of images consisting of figures and letters in the small right-handed promotion effect, and the lighting in the right-handed display section 075F030 and the right-handed display section 075F055, determine the symbol by the final fluctuation in the high base state before returning to the normal state. will be carried out until At this time, first, after determining the symbol, the CPU 103 transmits a right-handed display light-off designation command along with a background designation command, and turns off the right-handed display section 075F030. The effect control CPU 120 turns off the right-hander display section 075F055 based on the received right-hander display extinguishing command, while displaying an image consisting of figures and characters in the small right-hander promotion effect based on the received background designation command. Upon completion, the background image in the normal state is displayed on the image display device 5. Note that the image consisting of figures and characters in the small right-handed driving promotion effect and the lighting of the right-handed hitting display section 075F030 and the right-handed hitting display section 075F055 may start at the same timing and end at the same timing. In this way, the display period of the image consisting of figures and characters in the small right-handed driving promotion effect matches the lighting period of the right-handed hitting display section 075F030 and the right-handed hitting display section 075F055, so that the player can control the right-handed hitting period. becomes easier to understand.

As shown in Figure 10-24 (c2), part of the name image indicating the name of the jackpot game state that has occurred (in this example, one of the character images of "CHANCE BONUS!!") is used as the name display part in the fanfare performance. "CHANCE") is displayed in the center of the image display device 5, a sound corresponding to the start of a jackpot is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9 is turned on so that the lighting mode corresponds to the start of a jackpot. The lighting mode may change.

As shown in Figure 10-25 (c3), following Figure 10-24 (c2), the remaining part of the name image (in this example "BONUS!!" of the character image "CHANCE BONUS!!") is newly added and displayed in the center of the image display device 5. As a result, a character image of "CHANCE BONUS!!" is displayed in the center of the image display device 5 as a name image indicating the name of the jackpot game state that has occurred. In addition, the game effect lamp 9 is temporarily turned off in preparation for the big right-handed hitting promotion performance to be executed in the right-handed hitting promotion part of the fanfare performance starting at the next timing. After that, from Figure 10-24 (c4) to Figure 10-33 (c29), a figure (in this example, an arrow pointing to the right) and text (in this example, the words "Right-handed player") are used as an effect to promote right-handed players. ) is displayed in a large size in the center of the image display device 5 to promote a big right-handed hit.

Here, the performance control CPU 120 controls the game effect lamp 9 in the fanfare performance and the big right hit promotion performance based on the lighting data stored in the lighting data table shown in FIGS. 10-34 to 10-37. These lighting data tables are stored in the ROM 121. For example, based on the lighting data stored in the lighting data table, the performance control CPU 120 emits a guide light to prompt the player to hit the ball to the right by moving the light emitting location of the frame lamp. In this embodiment, a light-emitting location literally refers to a location that emits light. For example, among a plurality of lamps included in a frame lamp, a location where a lit lamp is located is called a light-emitting location; A location where a lamp that is not lit (that is, a lamp that is turned off) is located is not called a light emitting location. In other examples, a light-emitting location refers to a location that emits light with high brightness; for example, among multiple lamps included in a frame lamp, a location where a lamp that is lit with high brightness is located emits light. A location where a lamp that is lit at a luminance lower than the luminance of a lamp located at the light emitting location is located may not be referred to as a light emitting location. Hereinafter, lighting control (light emission control) of various lamps by the performance control CPU 120 will be specifically explained.

FIG. 10-34 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a parent table in the lighting data table. As shown in FIG. 10-34, the parent table in the lighting data table includes frame lamps (frame right lamp 075F009R, frame left lamp 075F009L), movable lamp 9d, lower left lamp 075F009D, upper attacker lamp 075F009U, panel left lamp 075F009E, For each lamp included in the game effect lamps 9, such as the board right lamp 075F009F and the attacker lamp 9c, the performance time of each of the fanfare performance and the big right hitting promotion performance is defined. For example, each lamp in the game effect lamp 9 executes a fanfare effect for 9880 msec, and then executes a big right hit promotion effect for 2000 msec. In addition, since the big right-handed hit promotion performance is configured to be repeated multiple times (twice in this embodiment), the game effect lamp 9 repeats the 2000 msec big right-handed hit promotion performance twice. Become.

FIG. 10-35 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a child table in the lighting data table. As shown in FIG. 10-35, in the child table of the lighting data table, each time of the fanfare effect and the big right-handed promotion effect is subdivided for each lamp in the game effect lamp 9, and is referenced in each time period. A grandchild table is specified.

Here, regarding the big right-handed driving promotion effect, the common grandchild table W11 is designated for the frame right lamp 075F009R and the frame left lamp 075F009L. Further, the lower left lamp 075F009D, the upper attacker lamp 075F009U, and the left lamp 075F009E of the board are not used in the big right-handed promotion effect and are turned off, so no grandchild table is provided. Therefore, the capacity of lighting data used in the ROM 121 can be reduced as much as possible. Regarding the attacker lamp 9c, a plurality of grandchild tables are specified by further subdividing 2000 msec, which is the execution time of the big right-handed hit promotion effect, into a plurality of periods. For example, grandchild table A11a is specified for 330 msec, grandchild table A11b is specified for 1350 msec, and grandchild table A11c is specified for 320 msec.

FIGS. 10-36 and 10-37 are explanatory diagrams showing examples of grandchild tables in the lighting data table. FIG. 10-36 shows data in the grandchild table W11 for the frame right lamp 075F009R and the frame left lamp 075F009L. As shown in FIG. 10-36, in the grandchild table W11 for the frame right lamp, RGB data is defined at intervals of 30 msec from T1 to T56, and furthermore, at the final time of 1000 msec (T57), all the lamps are Data indicating that the light is off (0x000000) is specified. In the grandchild table, the data of the first to eleventh lamps as shown in FIG. 10-2 are defined for each of the frame right lamp 075F009R and the frame left lamp 075F009L. In addition, in Figure 10-36, in order to clearly indicate the lighting period for each lamp included in the frame lamp, data (F00) at the timing to start lighting and data (000) at the timing to end lighting are used. In contrast, a dashed circle is attached.

Referring to the data in the grandchild table W11, first the fourth lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L is lit at T1, then the third lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L is lit at T2, and then the third lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L is lit at T3. The second lamp is lit, then at T4 the first lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L is lit, then at T5 the second lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is lit, then at T6 the third lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is lit. The lamp lights up, then at T7 the 4th lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R lights up, then at T8 the 5th lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R lights up, then at T9 the 6th lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R lights up. Then, at T10, the seventh lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is lit, and then at T11, the eighth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is lit. After starting to light up, each lamp continues to light up while changing colors into seven colors. After that, the fourth lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L is first turned off at T46, then the third lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L is turned off at T47, and then the second lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L is turned off at T48. Next, at T49, the first lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L turns off, then at T50, the second lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R turns off, then at T51, the third lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R turns off, and then At T52, the fourth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R turns off, then at T53 the fifth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R turns off, then at T54 the sixth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R turns off, and then at T55. The seventh lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off, and then at T56 the eighth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off. Thereafter, each lamp is turned off until 2000 msec has elapsed in one big right-handed hit promotion performance. Note that after all the lamps are turned off at T56, the remaining time until 2000 msec has elapsed in one big right hit promotion performance is about 320 msec. In other words, since the time used to turn on the light is 30 msec x 56 = 1680 msec, there is only about 320 msec left, but in order to ensure that the remaining time is turned off, the final turn off time is 1000 msec (which is longer than the remaining time). T57). Note that the first, fifth to eleventh lamps of the left frame lamp 075F009L and the first, ninth to eleventh lamps of the right frame lamp 075F009R are turned off at all times.

If you use the grandchild table W11 in which the data described above is stored, as shown in Figures 10-25 (c4) to 10-32 (c24), starting from the lighting of the fourth lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L. , up to the 8th lamp of frame right lamp 075F009R, the frame lamps light up in seven colors in an arch from the left side to the right side. Such a big right hit promotion effect using the frame lamp is performed twice.

FIG. 10-37 shows data in the grandchild table K11 for the movable lamp 9d and the grandchild tables A11a to A11c for the attacker lamp 9c. As shown in FIG. 10-37, in the grandchild table K11 for the movable lamp 9d, RGB data is specified at intervals of 30 msec from T1 to T56, and furthermore, at the final time of 1000 msec (T57), all RGB data are specified. Data indicating that the lamp is turned off (0x000000) is specified. In addition, in the grandchild table K11, for the movable body lamp 9d, among the letters "XXX" attached to the movable body 32, the left X (left X), the middle X (middle X), and the right X (right X) Data is specified for each of the following. In addition, in FIG. 10-37, in order to clearly show the lighting period for each lamp included in the movable lamp 9d, data (F00) at the timing to start lighting and data (000) at the timing to end lighting are shown. ) is marked with a dashed circle.

Referring to the data in the grandchild table K11, first the left X lamp of the movable lamp 9d is lit at T3, then the middle X lamp of the movable lamp 9d is lit at T4, and then the movable lamp 9d is turned on at T5. The lamp on the right X of 9d lights up. After starting to light up, each lamp continues to light up while changing colors into seven colors. After that, the left X lamp of the movable lamp 9d is first turned off at T48, then the middle X lamp of the movable lamp 9d is turned off at T49, and then the right X lamp of the movable lamp 9d is turned off at T50. Lights out. Thereafter, each lamp is turned off until 2000 msec has elapsed in one big right-handed hit promotion performance. Note that after all the lamps are turned off at T50 and continue to be turned off until T56, the remaining time until 2000 msec has elapsed in one big right hit promotion performance is about 320 msec. In other words, since the time used for lighting etc. is 30 msec x 56 = 1680 msec, there is only about 320 msec remaining, but in order to ensure that the remaining time is turned off, the final light off time is 1000 msec, which is longer than the remaining time. (T57). Furthermore, compared to the grandchild table W11 of the frame lamp, the movable lamp 9d starts to turn on later than the frame lamp (that is, the first T1 and T2 remain off) and turns off earlier than the frame lamp.

By using the grandchild table K11 in which the data described above is stored, the fourth and third lamps of the frame left lamp 075F009L are While the movable lamp 9d is lit, the movable lamp 9d goes out, and then the left X of the movable lamp 9d lights up at the same timing as the second lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L lights up, and then the middle X and right X lamps turn on. When lit, each lamp continues to light up in seven colors, and at the same timing that the second lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L goes out, the left X of the movable lamp 9d goes out, and then the middle X and right X lamps go out. Lights out. As a result, the movable lamps 9d light up in seven colors starting from the left X lamp, then the middle X lamp, and then the right X lamp in an arch from the left side to the right side. Such a large right-handed hit promotion effect using the movable lamp 9d is performed twice.

Further, FIG. 10-37 shows data in grandchild tables A11a, A11b, and A11c for the attacker lamp 9c. As shown in FIG. 10-37, in the grandchild table A11a of the attacker lamp 9c, RGB data is defined for a very long time of 600000 msec compared to 330 msec for lighting, and that data is for turning off the light. Data (0x000000) is defined.

In the grandchild table A11b of the attacker lamp 9c, RGB data is defined at intervals of 20 msec for 1350 msec to be lit. However, since the attacker lamp 9c only repeats color changes in a predetermined pattern (for example, seven colors) over 1350 msec, the grandchild table A11b specifies only 280 nsec for one pattern color change. ing. In other words, the performance control CPU 120 lights up the attacker lamp 9c for 280 ns each time it refers to the grandchild table A11b once in 1350 msec, and then repeatedly refers to the grandchild table A11b until the end of 1350 msec and performs a predetermined Repeating color changes in a pattern (for example, seven colors).

In the grandchild table A11c of the attacker lamp 9c, RGB data is specified for a very long time of 600000 msec compared to 320 msec for lighting, and the data for turning off (0x000000) is specified. There is.

When the big right hit promotion performance is started, the production control CPU 120 turns off the attacker lamp 9c by referring to the grandchild table A11a for the first 330 msec, and then turns off the grandchild table A11b at 280 nsec intervals for 1350 msec. By referring to the table A11c multiple times, the attacker lamp 9c is caused to repeat a predetermined pattern (for example, seven colors) of color change, and then, by referring to the grandchild table A11c for the last 320 msec, the attacker lamp 9c is turned off. As a result, as shown in Figures 10-25 (c4) to 10-32 (c24), the frame lamp lights up in an arch from the left side to the right side, and soon the 8th lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R lights up. After reaching the vicinity of the attacker, the attacker lamp 9c lights up, then the frame lamps turn off in an arch from the left side to the right side, and eventually the 8th lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R turns off, and then the attacker lamp 9c will turn off. Such a big right hit promotion effect using the attacker lamp 9c is performed twice.

In addition, in the case of a lighting pattern such as the grandchild tables A11a, A11b, and A11c of the attacker lamp 9c, in which the light goes out at the beginning, repeats a predetermined pattern of colors in the middle, and then goes out, the attacker lamp 9c is turned off three times. By creating a scenario in stages and repeatedly referring to the same grandchild table A11b for repeating the color of the predetermined pattern in the middle, there is no need to prepare data for all times from the beginning to the end of the 2000 msec lighting. , it is sufficient to prepare data only for the repeated portion. Therefore, the capacity of lighting data used in the ROM 121 can be reduced as much as possible.

Returning to FIG. 10-25 (c4), the presentation mode of the big right-handed hitting promotion performance executed in the right-handed hitting promotion part of the fanfare performance will be described. As shown in FIG. 10-25 (c4), the image display device 5 displays the tip of the arrow image pointing rightward. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the fourth lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L starts lighting up. The speakers 8L and 8R output sound in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion performance in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 10-25 (c5), the image display device 5 further displays the tip of the arrow image pointing rightward. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the third lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L starts lighting. The speakers 8L and 8R output sound in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion performance in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 10-26 (c6), the image display device 5 further displays the tip of the arrow image pointing rightward. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the second lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L starts lighting. Furthermore, since the frame lamp has reached the vicinity of the movable lamp 9d, the left X of the movable lamp 9d starts lighting up. The speakers 8L and 8R output sound in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion performance in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 10-26 (c7), the image display device 5 further displays the tip of the arrow image pointing rightward. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the first lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L starts lighting. Furthermore, the middle X of the movable lamp 9d starts lighting up. The speakers 8L and 8R output sound in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion performance in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 10-26 (c8), the image display device 5 further displays the tip of the arrow image pointing rightward. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the second lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R starts lighting. Furthermore, the right X of the movable lamp 9d starts lighting up. The speakers 8L and 8R output sound in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion performance in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 10-27 (c9), the image display device 5 further displays an arrow image pointing rightward. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the third lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R starts lighting. The speakers 8L and 8R output sound in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion performance in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 10-27 (c10), the image display device 5 further displays an arrow image pointing rightward. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the fourth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R starts lighting. The speakers 8L and 8R output sound in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion performance in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 10-27 (c11), the image display device 5 further displays an arrow image pointing rightward. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the fifth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R starts lighting up. Furthermore, since the frame lamp has reached the vicinity of the panel right lamp 075F009F, the panel right lamp 075F009F starts lighting. The speakers 8L and 8R output sound in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion performance in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 10-28 (c12), the image display device 5 further displays an arrow image pointing rightward. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the sixth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R starts lighting up. The speakers 8L and 8R output sound in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion performance in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 10-28 (c13), the image display device 5 further displays an arrow image pointing rightward. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the seventh lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R starts lighting. The speakers 8L and 8R output sound in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion performance in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 10-28 (c14), the image display device 5 continues to display an arrow image pointing rightward. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the eighth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R starts lighting. The speakers 8L and 8R output sound in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion performance in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 10-29 (c15), on the image display device 5, a character image of "RIGHT" is displayed superimposed on the arrow image pointing rightward. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the fourth lamp on the left side of the frame 075F009L is turned off. Furthermore, since the frame lamp has reached the vicinity of the attacker lamp 9c, the attacker lamp 9c starts lighting. Note that from then on, the attacker lamp 9c repeats turning on and turning off (that is, blinks). The speakers 8L and 8R output sound in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion performance in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 10-29 (c16), on the image display device 5, the character image "right" continues to be displayed superimposed on the arrow image pointing rightward. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the third lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L is turned off. The speakers 8L and 8R output sound in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion performance in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 10-29 (c17), on the image display device 5, a character image of "hit right" is displayed superimposed on the arrow image pointing rightward. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the second lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L is turned off. Furthermore, the left X of the movable lamp 9d is also turned off. The speakers 8L and 8R output sound in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion performance in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 10-30 (c18), on the image display device 5, a character image of "hit right" is displayed superimposed on the arrow image pointing rightward. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the first lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L is turned off. Furthermore, the middle X of the movable lamp 9d is also turned off. The speakers 8L and 8R output sound in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion performance in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 10-30 (c19), on the image display device 5, a character image of "Right-handed" is displayed superimposed on the arrow image pointing to the right. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the second lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off. Furthermore, the right X of the movable lamp 9d is also turned off. The speakers 8L and 8R output sound in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion performance in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 10-30 (c20), on the image display device 5, a character image of "hit right" is displayed superimposed on the arrow image pointing rightward. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the third lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off. The speakers 8L and 8R output sound in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion performance in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 10-31 (c21), on the image display device 5, a text image of "Hit the right" is displayed superimposed on the arrow image pointing to the right. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the fourth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off. The speakers 8L and 8R output sound in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion performance in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 10-31 (c22), on the image display device 5, a text image of "Right-handed hitter" is displayed superimposed on the arrow image pointing rightward. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the fifth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off. The speakers 8L and 8R output sound in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion performance in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 10-31 (c23), on the image display device 5, a text image of "Right hit!!" is displayed superimposed on the arrow image pointing rightward. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the sixth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off. Furthermore, the panel right lamp 075F009F goes out. The speakers 8L and 8R output sound in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion performance in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 10-32 (c24), on the image display device 5, a text image of "Right hit!!" is displayed superimposed on the arrow image pointing rightward. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the seventh lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off. The speakers 8L and 8R output sound in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion performance in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 10-32 (c25), on the image display device 5, a text image of "Right hit!!" is displayed superimposed on the arrow image pointing to the right. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the eighth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off. Furthermore, the flashing attacker lamp 9c also turns off. Sound output also stops from the speakers 8L and 8R. This completes the series of first big right-handed hit promotion effects.

As shown in FIG. 10-32 (c26), the second big right hit promotion performance starts. At this time, regarding the game effect lamps 9, only the fourth lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L starts lighting. In addition, in the second big right-handed hitting promotion performance, the speakers 8L and 8R do not output sound in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion performance. As a result, when transitioning to the jackpot round after the big right-handed hit promotion performance ends, the BGM (sound according to the background of the jackpot round) during the jackpot round and the sound in the big right-handed promotion performance will not overlap. It has become.

As shown in FIGS. 10-33 (c27) to (c29), in the second big right hitting promotion performance, the game effect lamp 9 lights/blinks/extinguishes in the same manner as the first big right hitting promotion performance. However, during that time, no sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion effect.

In this way, the large right-handed hitting promotion performance uses larger text and graphic image displays than the small right-handed hitting promotion performance, and is a performance that encourages the player to play right-handed hitting in a manner that is more emphasized than the small right-handed hitting promotion performance. be. Therefore, by executing the big right-handed hit promotion performance during the fanfare performance, it is possible to encourage the player to play right-handed in an easy-to-understand manner.

In addition, in the first big right-handed hitting promotion performance, the speakers 8L and 8R output sounds (for example, a sound effect for playing right-handed) in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion performance, thereby effectively appealing to the player. While it is possible to encourage right-handed hitting, in the second big right-handed hitting promotion performance, the sound is not output from speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion performance, so that the BGM during the jackpot round that starts after that is not output. can be made so as not to interfere with

In addition, in the big right-handed driving promotion effect, arrow images and character images are displayed in a manner that gradually appears in stages, and moreover, the game effect lamp 9 lights up or flashes to effectively encourage right-handed hitting. This effect is more flashy than the effect shown in FIG. 10-24 (c2) that displays the name image of the jackpot game state. For example, the character images in the big right-handed promotion effect appear one character at a time, but all the character images in the name image in the jackpot game state appear at once. Furthermore, regarding the size of the character image in the big right-handed promotion performance, the character image in the name image of the jackpot game state is larger than all the character images. Furthermore, the execution time of the effect promoting a big right-handed hit is longer than the execution time of the effect displaying the name image. Thereby, after the name image of the jackpot game state is displayed and the player is informed of the jackpot, it is possible to notify the player by emphasizing right-handed hitting by the big right-handed promoting performance.

The attacker lamp 9c is the place that the player aims at when launching the game ball in order to actually carry the game ball, so it lights up in a flashy color that is easy for the player to recognize, such as seven colors, and also blinks. It is possible to make the player pay more attention to the target area. Note that the attacker lamp 9c may always be lit in a predetermined color, such as seven colors, without blinking.

In the following example, the performance mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when a 5R probability-variable jackpot occurs will be explained. Although the number of rounds is different for the 10R fixed-variable jackpot, other performance aspects are the same as for the 5R fixed-variable jackpot. Furthermore, the 5 normal jackpot is different in that the V preview performance and the V prize winning performance are not executed, but the other performance aspects are the same as the 5R probability-variable jackpot.

As shown in FIG. 10-38 (c26), when the game effect lamp 9 goes out and the second big right-handed promotion effect ends, the switch to the jackpot round starts as shown in FIG. 10-38 (c27). Start. Specifically, the arrow image and the character image "Right hit!" fade out, resulting in a gradual decrease in visibility. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the fade-out. After that, as shown in FIG. 10-38 (c28), the entire screen of the image display device 5 becomes completely white. Note that the image promoting small right-handed shots displayed in the upper right corner of the screen remains displayed without being affected by the fade-out. As mentioned above, based on the jackpot start designation command (A0 series command), a series of effect data up to the stage shown in FIG. 10-38 (c28) is set.

When the fanfare performance is finished, the CPU 103 transmits a command (A101 command) specifying that the grand prize opening is open to the performance control CPU 120. On the other hand, the performance control CPU 120 switches from the fanfare performance to the in-round performance based on the command from the CPU 103, and executes the in-round performance in the 1R. Note that the performance control CPU 120 sets the data of each performance shown in FIGS. 10-39 (d3) to 10-40 (e4) based on the large prize opening designation command (A101 command). In other words, each performance performed between FIG. 10-39 (d3) to FIG. 10-40 (e4) is not triggered by a performance control command, but progresses over time.

As shown in FIG. 10-39 (d3), the background image during the jackpot round appears by fading in from a state where the entire screen of the image display device 5 becomes pure white. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the fade-in. It should be noted that the image promoting small right-handed shots displayed at the top right of the screen remains displayed without being affected by the fade-in.

Here, "fade in" and "fade out" will be specifically explained. Fade-in and fade-out are a type of effect in image display called "transition." "Transition" is a transition inserted between the first cut (image) and the second cut (image) when the scene of the video changes from the first cut (image) to the second cut (image) when editing the video. It's about the effect. In addition to fade-ins and fade-outs, transitions include various techniques in video editing, such as wipes and overlaps.

"Fade in" is an effect in which an image representing some object (background, character, etc.) gradually appears on the screen. As a specific method, fade-in involves changing the transparency (also called transmittance) of an object (image) from a first degree (for example, 100% or 99%) to a second degree lower than the first degree (for example, 0). % or 1%) over a predetermined period of time. For example, if the predetermined time is 2 seconds, use 1 second between 0 and 1 second to gradually change the transparency (transmittance) from 100% (first degree) to 50%, Using the next 1 to 2 seconds, the transparency (transmittance) is gradually lowered from 50% to 0% (second degree). On the other hand, a method that changes the transparency (transmittance) from 100% (first degree) to 0% (second degree) at once to change the object (image) to opaque, A fade-in is not a fade-in if it does not gradually change the rate) to a lower value. Note that when changing opacity (also referred to as opacity) rather than transparency (transmittance), the above-mentioned % value is reversed. That is, in fade-in, the opacity (opacity) of an object (image) is changed from a second degree (for example, 0% or 1%) to a first degree that is higher than the second degree (for example, 100% or 99%). ) over a predetermined period of time.

"Fade out" is an effect in which an image showing some object (background, character, etc.) gradually disappears from the screen. As a specific method, fade-out involves changing the transparency (transmittance) of an object (image) from a second degree (for example, 0% or 1%) to a first degree higher than the first degree (for example, 100% or 99%). %) over a predetermined period of time. For example, if the predetermined time is 2 seconds, the transparency (transmittance) is gradually increased from 0% (second degree) to 50% using 1 second between 0 and 1 seconds, Using the next 1 to 2 seconds, the transparency (transmittance) is gradually increased from 50% to 100% (first degree). On the other hand, a method that changes the transparency (transmittance) from 0% (second degree) to 100% (first degree) at once to change the object (image) to transparency, It is not a fade-out if the rate (rate) does not gradually increase. Note that when changing the opacity (opacity) rather than the transparency (transparency), in fade-out, the opacity (opacity) of the object (image) is changed to the first degree (for example, 100% or 99%). ) to a second degree lower than the first degree (for example, 0% or 1%) over a predetermined period of time.

For example, in this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 10-38 (c26) and (d1), the transparency (transparent By gradually increasing the transparency (transmittance) of the first layer of the screen to 100% when the transparency (rate) is 0%, the arrow image and the text "Right hit!!" Make the image transparent in stages and make it difficult to see (fade out). As a result, as shown in FIG. 10-38 (d2), only the white image on the second layer of the screen located further back than the first layer of the screen is shown to the player. Then, as shown in Figure 10-38 (d3), when the transparency (transmittance) of the first layer of the screen is 100%, the transparency (transmittance) of the first layer of the screen is reduced to 0%. By gradually lowering the background image to , the background image during the jackpot round becomes gradually opaque and easily visible (fade-in). As a result, the background image during the jackpot round in the first layer located in front of the second layer on the screen is shown to the player.

Note that as a transition, there is also a method called "crossfade." For example, cross-fading is achieved by fading out the first layer of a screen showing some object, while fading in the second layer of the screen showing some object located further back than the first layer. , in appearance, is a method in which the first layer of the screen is shown and then the second layer of the screen is shown. On the other hand, in the case of this embodiment, as described above, by fading out the first layer of the screen and then fading in, the white image that is always displayed on the second layer of the screen located on the back side is is shown once during the transition from the image in the first ED period to the image in the second ED period, which is different from a technique such as cross-fade.

In this embodiment, even if the switching display of the background image such as the above-mentioned transition is executed, the image that promotes small right-handed hits displayed at the top right of the screen is not affected by the switching display of the background image. The display is maintained without being affected. Here, "affected by the switching display of the background image" means that due to the switching display of the background image such as fade-in or fade-out, the player cannot completely see the image promoting small right-handed shots, or the player The player's visibility of the image promoting small right-handed hitting may be hindered or reduced, such as when the player can see the image promoting small right-handed hitting a little but cannot understand the meaning of the image (promoting right-handed hitting). This means that the player's visibility is affected in some way, such as by On the other hand, in a situation where the above-mentioned phenomenon does not occur and the player's visibility of the image promoting small right-handed hitting is not obstructed or reduced, the image promoting small right-handed hitting is not the background image. It can be said that it is not affected by the switching display.

As shown in Figure 10-39 (d4), after the background image during the jackpot round appears by fading in, as shown in Figure 10-39 (e1), when 1R starts, the normal jackpot opens. , a background image corresponding to the effect during the round is displayed at the center of the screen of the image display device 5. Note that a point image corresponding to the number of prize balls obtained during the jackpot round is displayed at the lower left of the screen of the image display device 5. Furthermore, an image (arrow and text) promoting small right-handed shots is continuously displayed in the upper right corner. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner according to the performance during the round. Further, the speakers 8L and 8R start outputting BGM (sound corresponding to the background of the jackpot round) in a manner corresponding to the performance during the round. Note that, as described above, at the time this BGM is output, the output of the sound corresponding to the big right hitting promotion effect has already ended.

As shown in FIG. 10-40 (e2), during the 1R, a background image corresponding to the effect during the round is displayed at the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and an image for promoting a small right hit ( arrows and text) are displayed.

As shown in FIG. 10-40 (e3), when the 1st round ends, the normal grand prize opening is closed, and the CPU 103 sends a command (A201 command) specifying after opening the grand prize opening to the performance control CPU 120. do. Note that the performance control CPU 120 does not particularly set the performance based on the specified command after opening the big winning hole.

As shown in FIG. 10-40 (e4), between rounds, the grand prize opening usually remains closed, a background image corresponding to the effect during the round is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and An image (arrow and text) promoting small right-handed shots is displayed in the upper right corner.

When the period between rounds ends, the CPU 103 transmits a large prize opening designation command (A102 command) to the performance control CPU 120. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect during the round in the 2R based on the command from the CPU 103. Note that the performance control CPU 120 sets the data of each performance shown in FIGS. 10-41 (e5) to 10-42 (e8) based on the large prize opening designation command (A102 command). In other words, each performance performed between FIG. 10-41 (e5) to FIG. 10-42 (e8) is not triggered by a performance control command, but progresses over time.

As shown in FIG. 10-41 (e5), when the 2nd round starts, the normal big prize opening is opened, a background image corresponding to the performance during the round is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and then the background image is displayed in the upper right corner. An image (arrow and text) promoting small right-handed shots is displayed. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner according to the performance during the round.

As shown in FIG. 10-41 (e6), during 2R, a V probability change suggestion effect is executed. Specifically, a text image of "PUSH!!" is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5 together with an image prompting the user to operate the push button 31B, overlapping the background image corresponding to the performance during the round. Furthermore, in the upper right corner of the screen, an image (arrow and text) promoting small right-handed shots is continuously displayed in the upper right corner. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the performance during the round (V probability change suggestion performance, etc.). Sounds are also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the effects during the round (V-probability change suggestion effects, etc.).

As shown in FIG. 10-41 (e7), when the player operates the push button 31B in the V probability change suggestion performance, a V An image of the text "Success!!" is displayed to notify you of a guaranteed jackpot. Furthermore, in the upper right corner of the screen, an image (arrow and text) promoting small right-handed shots is continuously displayed in the upper right corner. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the performance during the round (V probability change suggestion performance, etc.). Sounds are also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the effects during the round (V-probability change suggestion effects, etc.).

As shown in FIG. 10-42 (e8), when the 2nd round ends, the normal grand prize opening is closed, and the CPU 103 sends a command after opening the grand prize opening (A202 command) to the performance control CPU 120. do. Note that the performance control CPU 120 does not particularly set the performance based on the specified command after opening the big winning hole.

As shown in FIG. 10-42 (e9), between rounds, the big prize opening usually remains closed, and a background image corresponding to the effect during the round is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and a message " A text image "Success!!" is displayed, and furthermore, an image (arrow and text) promoting small right-handed shots is displayed in the upper right corner.

When the period between rounds ends, the CPU 103 transmits a large prize opening designation command (A103 command) to the performance control CPU 120. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect during the round in the 3rd round based on the command from the CPU 103. Note that the performance control CPU 120 sets the data of each performance shown in FIGS. 10-42 (e10) to 10-43 (e12) based on the large prize opening designation command (A103 command). In other words, each performance performed between FIG. 10-42 (e10) to FIG. 10-43 (e12) is not triggered by a performance control command, but progresses over time.

As shown in FIG. 10-42 (e10), when the 3rd round starts, the normal big prize opening is opened and the V preview effect is executed. Specifically, in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, a character image and a text image "Catch V in the next round!!" are displayed together with a character image so as to overlap a background image corresponding to the performance during the round. Furthermore, in the upper right corner of the screen, an image (arrow and text) promoting small right-handed shots is continuously displayed in the upper right corner. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the performance during the round (V preview performance, etc.). Sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the presentation during the round (V preview presentation, etc.).

As shown in FIG. 10-43 (e11), during the 3R, the V preview effect continues to be performed, and is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, overlapping the background image corresponding to the in-round effect, together with the character image. A text image "Catch the V in the next round!!" is displayed, and furthermore, an image (arrow and text) promoting a small right-hand hit is subsequently displayed in the upper right corner. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the performance during the round (V preview performance, etc.). Sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the presentation during the round (V preview presentation, etc.).

As shown in FIG. 10-43 (e12), when the 3rd round ends, the normal grand prize opening is closed, and the CPU 103 sends a command (A203 command) to the production control CPU 120 to specify after opening the grand prize opening. do. On the other hand, based on the command from the CPU 103, the effect control CPU 120 executes an effect aiming for V during the rounds from after the 3rd round to the 4th round.

As shown in FIG. 10-43 (e13), between rounds, the Aim for V effect is executed with the grand prize opening remaining closed, that is, with the game ball unable to enter the grand prize opening. Specifically, V variable winning ball device 075F007B (V large prize ball device 075F007B), which is the target (location) that the player is made to aim at by hitting right, is placed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5 so as to overlap the background image according to the performance during the round. An arrow image pointing to the winning opening) and a text image of "Aim" are displayed. In this way, according to the Aim for V effect, by using the image display regarding the V big winning hole, it is possible to urge the player to hit the ball to the right so that the game ball enters the V big winning hole. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the effect during the round (aim for V effect, etc.). Sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the effect during the round (aim for V effect, etc.).

When the period between rounds ends, the CPU 103 transmits a large prize opening designation command (A104 command) to the performance control CPU 120. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect during the round in the 4th round based on the command from the CPU 104. Note that the performance control CPU 120 sets the data of each performance shown in FIGS. 10-44 (e14) and (e15) based on the large prize opening designation command (A104 command). In other words, each performance performed between FIG. 10-44 (e14) to FIG. 10-44 (e15) is not triggered by a performance control command, but progresses over time.

As shown in FIG. 10-44 (e14), when the 4th round starts, the V big prize opening is opened and the Aim for V effect is executed. As a result, the player can aim for the V-big prize opening by hitting the ball to the right. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the effect during the round (aim for V effect, etc.). Sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the effect during the round (aim for V effect, etc.).

As shown in FIG. 10-44 (e15), during the 4R, an aim for V effect is executed, and furthermore, an image (arrow and text) of a small right hit promotion effect is continuously displayed in the upper right corner. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the effect during the round (aim for V effect, etc.). Sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the effect during the round (aim for V effect, etc.).

When a game ball enters the V big prize opening and a V prize is generated, the CPU 103 transmits a probability change determination device passage designation command (AD00 command) to the performance control CPU 120. On the other hand, the performance control CPU 120 executes the V winning performance. Note that the performance control CPU 120 sets the data of each performance shown in FIGS. 10-44 (e16) to 10-45 (e18) based on the probability change determination device passage designation command (AD00 command). In other words, each performance performed between FIG. 10-44 (e16) to FIG. 10-45 (e18) is not triggered by a performance control command, but progresses over time.

As shown in FIG. 10-44 (e16), when the V-winning effect is executed, a " V'' image is displayed, and furthermore, an image (arrow and text) promoting small right-handed shots is displayed in the upper right corner. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the performance during the round (V winning performance, etc.). Sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the performance during the round (V winning performance, etc.).

As shown in FIG. 10-45 (e17), when the 4th round ends, the V grand prize opening closes, and the CPU 103 sends a command after opening the grand prize opening (A204 command) to the performance control CPU 120. do. Note that the performance control CPU 120 does not particularly set the performance based on the specified command after opening the big winning hole.

As shown in FIG. 10-45 (e18), between rounds, the V big prize opening and the normal big prize opening remain closed, and a background image corresponding to the effect during the round is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. In this way, the character image of "V" is displayed, and furthermore, an image (arrow and characters) for promoting small right-handed shots is displayed in the upper right corner.

When the period between rounds ends, the CPU 103 transmits a large prize opening designation command (A105 command) to the performance control CPU 120. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect during the round in the 5th round based on the command from the CPU 103. Note that the performance control CPU 120 sets the data of each performance shown in FIGS. 10-45 (e19) to 10-46 (e21) based on the large prize opening designation command (A105 command). In other words, each performance performed between FIG. 10-45 (e19) to FIG. 10-46 (e21) is not triggered by a performance control command, but progresses over time.

As shown in FIG. 10-45 (e19), when the 5th round starts, the normal big prize opening is opened, a background image corresponding to the performance during the round is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and then the background image is displayed in the upper right corner. An image (arrow and text) promoting small right-handed shots is displayed. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner according to the performance during the round.

As shown in FIG. 10-46 (e20), during 5R, an in-round effect is executed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and furthermore, in the upper right of the screen, an image of a small right hit promotion effect is continuously displayed in the upper right of the screen. (arrow and text) is displayed. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner according to the performance during the round. Sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the performance during the round.

As shown in FIG. 10-46 (e21), when the 5th round ends, the normal grand prize opening is closed, and the CPU 103 sends a command (A205 command) to the production control CPU 120 to specify after opening the grand prize opening. do. Note that the performance control CPU 120 does not particularly set the performance based on the specified command after opening the big winning hole. Furthermore, at a predetermined timing after that, the CPU 103 transmits a jackpot end designation command (A3 type command) to the performance control CPU 120. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 executes the ending effect based on the command from the CPU 103. Note that the performance control CPU 120 sets the data of each performance shown in FIGS. 10-46 (f1) to 10-47 (f4) based on the jackpot end designation command (A3 series command). In other words, each performance performed between FIG. 10-46 (f1) to FIG. 10-47 (f4) is not triggered by a performance control command, but progresses over time.

As shown in FIG. 10-46 (f1), when the ending effect starts, an image is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5 to select a stage in a variable probability state after the jackpot game state. Further, in the upper right of the screen, an image (arrow and text) promoting small right-handed hits is continuously displayed in the upper right. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner according to the ending performance. Sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the ending effect.

As shown in FIG. 10-47 (f2), during the ending performance, a name image (in this example, a character image of "Yumemu RUSH!!") indicating the name of the variable state is displayed on the image display device 5 along with the character image. displayed in the center. Further, in the upper right of the screen, an image (arrow and text) promoting small right-handed hits is continuously displayed in the upper right. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner according to the ending effect. Sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the ending effect.

As shown in FIG. 10-47 (f3), during the ending effect, an immersion suppression notification effect is executed. Specifically, an image is displayed in the center of the image display device 5 to prevent the player from becoming addicted to the game, such as "Be careful not to get addicted to it. Pachinko is a game that can be enjoyed in moderation." Further, in the upper right of the screen, an image (arrow and text) promoting small right-handed hits is continuously displayed in the upper right. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner according to the ending effect. Sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the ending effect. In addition, at the time of consecutive winnings, a game result image showing the result of the game in the jackpot game state (for example, the number of prize balls, etc.) is displayed at the bottom of the screen during the ending performance, but when the first hit is Also, such a game result image may be displayed during the ending performance.

As shown in FIG. 10-47 (f4), a forgetting prevention image is displayed in the center of the image display device 5 to prevent forgetting to take out a card owned by a player related to a game, such as a prepaid card or a membership card. Further, in the upper right of the screen, an image (arrow and text) promoting small right-handed hits is continuously displayed in the upper right. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner according to the ending performance. Sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the ending effect.

After the ending effect is finished, if there is a second pending memory number, the CPU 103 sends the effect control CPU 120 a pending memory number specification command (C2 series command), a background specification command (95 series command), and a symbol variation specification. A command (8D series command), a display result specification command (8C series command), and a variation pattern specification command (81 series command) are transmitted. On the other hand, based on commands from the CPU 103, the production control CPU 120 displays decorative symbols in a variable manner in accordance with the fluctuations in the second special symbol, or performs fluctuating production (for example, , reach performance, preview performance, etc.). In addition, the performance control CPU 120 inputs the data of each performance shown in FIGS. 10-48 (g1) and (g2) into a pending storage number specification command (C2 series command), a background specification command (95 series command), and a symbol variation specification command. (8D series command), display result specification command (8C series command), and variation pattern specification command (81 series command). In other words, each performance performed between (g1) and (g2) in FIGS. 10-48 is not triggered by a performance control command, but progresses over time.

As shown in FIG. 10-48 (g1), even while the second special symbol is changing, an image (arrow and text) promoting a small right hit is continuously displayed at the upper right of the screen. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the start of variation of the special symbols. Sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the start of variation of the special symbols.

As shown in FIG. 10-48 (g2), the second special symbol stops changing and a losing symbol is displayed. At this time as well, the image (arrow and text) for promoting small right-handed hits continues to be displayed in the upper right corner of the screen. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the stoppage of losing symbols. Sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the stoppage of the losing symbol.

After the fluctuation of the second special symbol has stopped, if there is a second pending memory number, the CPU 103 sends a pending memory number specification command (C2 series command), background specification command (95 series command) to the production control CPU 120. , a symbol variation specification command (8D series command), a display result specification command (8C series command), and a variation pattern specification command (81 series command). On the other hand, based on commands from the CPU 103, the production control CPU 120 displays decorative symbols in a variable manner in accordance with the fluctuations in the second special symbol, or performs fluctuating production (for example, , reach performance, preview performance, etc.). In addition, the effect control CPU 120 stores the data of each effect shown in FIGS. 10-48 (g3) to 10-49 (g5) as a reservation storage number specification command (C2 series command), a background specification command (95 series command), Settings are made based on the symbol variation specification command (8D series command), display result specification command (8C series command), and variation pattern specification command (81 series command). In other words, each performance performed between FIG. 10-48 (g3) to FIG. 10-49 (g5) is not triggered by a performance control command, but progresses over time.

As shown in FIG. 10-48 (g3), even while the second special symbol is changing, an image (arrow and text) promoting a small right hit continues to be displayed at the upper right of the screen. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the start of variation of the special symbols. Sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the start of variation of the special symbols.

As shown in FIG. 10-49 (g4), in the case of jackpot fluctuation, an image corresponding to the reach effect is displayed on the image display device 5, and a sound corresponding to the reach effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. A game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner according to the reach effect. In the upper right corner of the screen, an image (arrow and text) promoting small right-handed shots is continuously displayed in the upper right corner.

As shown in FIG. 10-49 (g5), a group preview performance is executed as a preview performance during jackpot fluctuations. The group preview effect refers to objects such as characters appearing in stages or all at once on the screen of the image display device 5, making it difficult to see the ready-to-reach symbols, and then disappearing to make it difficult to see the reach symbols. This is an effect that makes a matching pattern (for example, 777, etc.) appear. Even if a preview effect that makes it difficult to see the symbols in such a reach mode is executed, the image of the small right hit promotion effect ( arrows and text) are displayed. Here, "affected by the display of effect images" means that due to the display of effect images such as group previews, the player cannot completely see the image of the effect promoting small right-handed hits, or the player is affected by the display of effect images such as group previews. Players' visibility of the image promoting small right-handed hitting may be hindered or reduced, such as when they can see the image of the effect a little but cannot understand the meaning of the image (promoting right-handed hitting). This means that the player's visibility is affected in some way. On the other hand, in a situation where the above-mentioned phenomenon does not occur and the player's visibility of the image promoting small right-handed hitting is not obstructed or reduced, the image promoting small right-handed hitting is not the same as the effect image. It can be said that the results are not affected by the display.

When the variation of the special symbols stops, the CPU 103 transmits a symbol confirmation designation command (8F00) to the performance control CPU 120. Note that the performance control CPU 120 does not particularly set the performance based on the symbol confirmation designation command.

As shown in FIG. 10-49 (g6), when a jackpot (10R variable jackpot) occurs as a result of the stoppage of fluctuation of the special symbol, the CPU 103 sends a jackpot start designation command (A0 series command) to the performance control CPU 120. Send. Note that since the right-handed hitting promotion effect has already been executed, the right-handed hitting display lighting command (FD type command) is not transmitted. On the other hand, the performance control CPU 120 executes the fanfare performance based on the command from the CPU 103. Note that the performance control CPU 120 sets the data of each performance shown in FIGS. 10-50 (h1) and (h2) based on the jackpot start designation command (A0 series command). In other words, each performance performed between (h1) and (h2) in FIGS. 10-50 is not triggered by a performance control command, but progresses over time.

As shown in FIG. 10-50 (h1), as a fanfare performance, an image congratulating the jackpot (in this example, a character image and a text image of "Yattane!!") is displayed on the image display device 5. A sound congratulating the jackpot is outputted from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 changes so that the lighting mode congratulates the jackpot. In the upper right corner of the screen, an image (arrow and text) promoting small right-handed shots is continuously displayed in the upper right corner.

As shown in FIG. 10-50 (h2), after the fanfare performance has started, a name image (in this example, a character image of "SPECIAL BONUS!!") indicating the name of the jackpot game state that has occurred is displayed on the image display device 5. , a sound corresponding to the start of the jackpot is output from the speakers 8L, 8R, and the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 changes so that the lighting mode corresponds to the start of the jackpot. In addition, in the case of consecutive winnings with 2 special symbols, since the big right-hitting promotion performance has already been executed when the special symbol 1 is won, the big right-hitting promotion performance is not executed again. For this reason, as shown in Figures 10-25 (c4) to 10-32 (c24), no sound is output from speakers 8L and 8R in a manner that corresponds to the big right-handed hit promotion effect, and furthermore, , the frame lamp does not light up in a manner corresponding to the big right-handed hit promotion effect.

When the fanfare performance is finished, the CPU 103 transmits a command (A101 command) specifying that the grand prize opening is open to the performance control CPU 120. On the other hand, the performance control CPU 120 switches from the fanfare performance to the in-round performance based on the command from the CPU 103, and executes the in-round performance in the 1R.

As shown in FIG. 10-50 (i1), when the jackpot 1R starts, the normal jackpot opens, a background image corresponding to the effect during the round is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and then the background image is displayed in the upper right corner. An image (arrow and text) promoting small right-handed shots is displayed. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner according to the performance during the round.

After that, although not shown, various performances such as V preview performance, Aim for V performance, and V winning performance are executed during the round as shown in Figures 10-40 to 10-46, and eventually, when the jackpot round ends, , the ending effect is executed as shown in FIGS. 10-46 and 10-47. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-48, control is again made to the variable probability state after the jackpot game state. In this series of games, in the upper right of the screen of the image display device 5, an image (arrow and text) for promoting small right-handed hitting is displayed, as well as the right-handed hitting display section 075F030 of the special pattern LED board 075F020, and the fourth symbol. Each of the right-handed display parts 075F055 of the unit 075F050 continues to light up. Eventually, when the variable probability state after the jackpot game state ends without a jackpot occurring and the state is controlled to the normal state, a right-hit display light off designation command is sent from the CPU 103 to the production control CPU 120, and the production control CPU 120 The CPU 120 erases the image (arrow and text) of the small right-handed promotion effect in the upper right corner of the screen of the image display device 5, and also erases the right-handed hitting display part 075F030 of the special pattern LED board 075F020 and the right-handed hitting display of the fourth symbol unit 075F050. Each of the sections 075F055 is turned off. As a result, the player will play left-handed again in the normal state.

[Performance mode of pachinko gaming machine 1 when recovering from power outage]
FIG. 10-51 is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the pachinko game machine 1 recovers from a power outage during the fanfare presentation due to one special drawing win. The power outage shown in Figure 10-51 is assumed to be power outage 1 when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off during a fanfare performance and then the power supply is restored, as shown in Figure 10-20. .

As shown in FIG. 10-51, an image congratulating the jackpot (in this example, a character image and a text image of "Congratulations!!") is displayed on the image display device 5 (FIG. 10-51). -24 (c1) state), a state in which a name image indicating the name of the jackpot game state (in this example, a character image of "CHANCE BONUS!!") is displayed on the image display device 5 (FIG. 10-24 (c2)) ), a state in which only the arrow image in the big right-handed hitting promotion performance is displayed on the image display device 5 (the state of FIG. 10-28 (c14)), and a state in which the arrow image in the big right-handed hitting promotion performance is displayed together with "Right-handed hitting!" !” character image is displayed on the image display device 5 (the state shown in FIG. 10-31 (c23)), if a power outage occurs, the image is no longer displayed on the image display device 5. Thereafter, when the power is turned on, a character image "Restoring..." is displayed on the image display device 5.

Here, even during recovery, an image (arrow and text) for promoting small right-handed hits continues to be displayed in the upper right corner of the image display device 5. Further, although not shown in the drawings, when the power is turned on, the right-handed hitting display section 075F030 of the special pattern LED board 075F020 and the right-handed hitting display section 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 are also lit to encourage right-handed hitting.

After that, the production control CPU 120 waits until it receives a command for specifying that the big winning hole is open (A101 command) from the CPU 103, and when it receives the command for specifying that the big winning hole is open (A101 command), the CPU 120 specifies that the big winning hole is open. Based on the command (A101 command), an effect image during 1R as shown in FIG. 10-39 (e1) is displayed on the image display device 5. Additionally, an image congratulating you on hitting the jackpot (in this example, a character image and a character image saying "Congratulations!!"), and a name image showing the name of the jackpot gaming state (in this example, "CHANCE BONUS!!") After the power is turned on, all of the images, including the arrow image in the big right-handed driving promotion performance, and the character image ``Right-handed!!'' added to the arrow image in the big right-handed game promotion performance, are canceled and not displayed after the power is turned on.

In this way, even if a power outage occurs before the big right hit promotion performance is executed or before the big right hit promotion performance is completed, the small right hit promotion performance will be executed from the time the power is turned on afterwards. Therefore, immediately after recovering from a power outage, it is possible to at least encourage the player to hit the ball to the right, and if the player forgets to hit the ball to the right, he or she is unable to enter the game ball into the winning hole. This makes it possible to prevent players from being disadvantaged as much as possible.

FIG. 10-52 is an explanatory diagram showing the performance mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the game returns from a power outage during one round of the jackpot at the time of winning the special figure. The power outage shown in FIG. 10-52 assumes a power outage 2 in which the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off during 1R and then the power supply is restored, as shown in FIG. 10-20.

As shown in FIG. 10-52, if a power outage occurs while the image corresponding to the performance during 1R is displayed on the image display device 5 (the state shown in FIG. 10-40 (e2)), the image display device 5 After the image is no longer displayed, a character image "Restoring..." is displayed on the image display device 5 when the power is turned on.

Here, even during recovery, an image (arrow and text) for promoting small right-handed hits continues to be displayed in the upper right corner of the image display device 5. Further, although not shown in the drawings, when the power is turned on, the right-handed hitting display section 075F030 of the special pattern LED board 075F020 and the right-handed hitting display section 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 are also lit to encourage right-handed hitting.

After that, the performance control CPU 120 waits until it receives a command for specifying that the big winning hole is open (A102 command) from the CPU 103, and when it receives the command for specifying that the big winning hole is open (A102 command), the CPU 120 specifies that the big winning hole is open. Based on the command (A102 command), the image display device 5 displays a performance image during 2R as shown in FIG. 10-41 (e5). Note that the point image corresponding to the number of prize balls obtained during the jackpot round is displayed as 0pt because the memory of the point in the RAM 122 is erased due to power outage. If prize balls are obtained during subsequent rounds, points may be added again starting from 0 pt, such as adding 10 points for every 10 balls obtained. Note that the point image is not limited to one that is displayed at 0pt after recovery from a power outage, but may be made so that the point cannot be recognized by a predetermined image such as "??".

In this way, even if a power outage occurs during a jackpot round, the small right-handed hit promotion effect will be executed from the time the power is turned on, so at the very least, immediately after the power outage returns, the player will not be able to hit right. To prevent a player from being disadvantaged, such as not being able to enter a game ball into a regular big prize opening in the next round, due to forgetting to hit the ball to the right. I can do it.

FIG. 10-53 is an explanatory diagram showing the performance mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the pachinko game machine 1 recovers from a power outage during the round after the first round of jackpot at the time of winning the special figure 1. The power outage shown in Figure 10-53 is the power outage 3 when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off during the round after 1R and then the power supply is restored, as shown in Figure 10-20. Suppose.

As shown in FIG. 10-53, if a power outage occurs while the image corresponding to the performance between rounds is displayed on the image display device 5 (the state shown in FIG. 10-40 (e4)), the image display device 5 After the image is no longer displayed, a character image "Restoring..." is displayed on the image display device 5 when the power is turned on.

Here, even during recovery, an image (arrow and text) for promoting small right-handed hits continues to be displayed in the upper right corner of the image display device 5. Further, although not shown in the drawings, when the power is turned on, the right-handed hitting display section 075F030 of the special pattern LED board 075F020 and the right-handed hitting display section 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 are also lit to encourage right-handed hitting.

After that, the performance control CPU 120 waits until it receives a command for specifying that the big winning hole is open (A102 command) from the CPU 103, and when it receives the command for specifying that the big winning hole is open (A102 command), the CPU 120 specifies that the big winning hole is open. Based on the command (A102 command), the image display device 5 displays a performance image during 2R as shown in FIG. 10-41 (e5). Note that the point image corresponding to the number of prize balls obtained during the jackpot round is displayed as 0pt because the memory of the point in the RAM 122 is erased due to power outage.

In this way, even if a power outage occurs between rounds, the small right hit promotion effect will be executed from the time the power is turned on afterwards, so at the very least, the player will be encouraged to hit right right immediately after the power is restored. It is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged, such as forgetting to hit the ball to the right and not being able to enter the game ball into the big prize opening in the next round. can.

FIG. 10-54 is an explanatory diagram showing the performance mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the game returns from a power outage during the second round of the jackpot when the first special drawing is won. The power outage shown in FIG. 10-54 is assumed to be power outage 4 when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off during 2R and then the power supply is restored, as shown in FIG. 10-20.

As shown in FIG. 10-54, if a power outage occurs while the image corresponding to the V probability change suggestion effect during 2R is displayed on the image display device 5 (the state of FIG. 10-41 (e7)), the image After the image is no longer displayed on the display device 5, a character image “Restoring...” is displayed on the image display device 5 when the power is turned on.

Here, even during recovery, an image (arrow and text) for promoting small right-handed hits continues to be displayed in the upper right corner of the image display device 5. Further, although not shown in the drawings, when the power is turned on, the right-handed hitting display section 075F030 of the special pattern LED board 075F020 and the right-handed hitting display section 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 are also lit to encourage right-handed hitting.

After that, the production control CPU 120 waits until it receives a command for specifying that the big winning hole is open (A103 command) from the CPU 103, and when it receives the command for specifying that the big winning hole is open (A103 command), the CPU 120 specifies that the big winning hole is open. Based on the command (A103 command), the effect image during 2R is displayed on the image display device 5. Note that the point image corresponding to the number of prize balls obtained during the jackpot round is displayed as 0pt because the memory of the point in the RAM 122 is erased due to power outage. Furthermore, since the stored data regarding the type of jackpot has been erased, the image corresponding to the V preview effect as shown in FIG. 10-42 (e10) is canceled and not displayed after the power is turned on. In addition, if the CPU 103 is configured to send a jackpot start specifying command (A0 series command) to the production control CPU 120 in addition to the jackpot opening specifying command (A103 command) after returning from the power outage, the production control The CPU 120 executes a V preview performance as shown in FIG. 10-42 (e10) based on the jackpot opening designation command (A103 command) and jackpot start designation command (A0 series command) received from the CPU 103. It can also be configured as

In this way, even if a power outage occurs during a jackpot round, the small right-handed hit promotion effect will be executed from the time the power is turned on, so at the very least, immediately after the power outage returns, the player will not be able to hit right. To prevent a player from being disadvantaged, such as not being able to enter a game ball into a regular big prize opening in the next round, due to forgetting to hit the ball to the right. I can do it.

FIG. 10-55 is an explanatory diagram showing the performance mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the pachinko game machine 1 recovers from a power outage between rounds after the second round of the jackpot when the special figure 1 is won. The power outage shown in FIG. 10-55 is the power outage 5 when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off during the round after 2R and then the power supply is restored, as shown in FIG. 10-20. Suppose.

As shown in FIG. 10-55, if a power outage occurs while the image corresponding to the round after 2R is displayed on the image display device 5 (the state of FIG. 10-42 (e9)), the image display device After the image is no longer displayed on the image display device 5, a character image "Restoring..." is displayed on the image display device 5 when the power is turned on.

Here, even during recovery, an image (arrow and text) for promoting small right-handed hits continues to be displayed in the upper right corner of the image display device 5. Further, although not shown in the drawings, when the power is turned on, the right-handed hitting display section 075F030 of the special pattern LED board 075F020 and the right-handed hitting display section 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 are also lit to encourage right-handed hitting.

After that, the production control CPU 120 waits until it receives a command for specifying that the big winning hole is open (A103 command) from the CPU 103, and when it receives the command for specifying that the big winning hole is open (A103 command), the CPU 120 specifies that the big winning hole is open. Based on the command (A103 command), the effect image during 2R is displayed on the image display device 5. Note that the point image corresponding to the number of prize balls obtained during the jackpot round is displayed as 0pt because the memory of the point in the RAM 122 is erased due to power outage. Furthermore, since the stored data regarding the type of jackpot has been erased, the image corresponding to the V preview effect as shown in FIG. 10-42 (e10) is canceled and not displayed after the power is turned on. In addition, if the CPU 103 is configured to send a jackpot start specifying command (A0 series command) to the production control CPU 120 in addition to the jackpot opening specifying command (A103 command) after returning from the power outage, the production control The CPU 120 executes a V preview performance as shown in FIG. 10-42 (e10) based on the jackpot opening designation command (A103 command) and jackpot start designation command (A0 series command) received from the CPU 103. It can also be configured as

In this way, even if a power outage occurs between rounds, the small right hit promotion effect will be executed from the time the power is turned on afterwards, so at the very least, the player will be encouraged to hit right right immediately after the power is restored. It is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged, such as forgetting to hit the ball to the right and not being able to enter the game ball into the big prize opening in the next round. can.

FIG. 10-56 is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation mode of the pachinko gaming machine when the pachinko game machine recovers from a power outage during the round after the third round of the jackpot at the time of winning the first special drawing. The power outage shown in FIG. 10-56 is the power outage 6 when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off during the round after 3R and then the power supply is restored, as shown in FIG. 10-21. Suppose.

As shown in FIG. 10-56, if a power outage occurs while the image corresponding to the round after 3R is displayed on the image display device 5 (the state of FIG. 10-43 (e13)), the image display device After the image is no longer displayed on the image display device 5, a character image "Restoring..." is displayed on the image display device 5 when the power is turned on.

Here, even during recovery, an image (arrow and text) for promoting small right-handed hits continues to be displayed in the upper right corner of the image display device 5. Further, although not shown in the drawings, when the power is turned on, the right-handed hitting display section 075F030 of the special pattern LED board 075F020 and the right-handed hitting display section 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 are also lit to encourage right-handed hitting.

After that, the production control CPU 120 waits until it receives a command to specify that the big winning hole is open (A104 command) from the CPU 103, and when it receives the command to specify that the big winning hole is open (A104 command), the CPU 120 specifies that the big winning hole is open. Based on the command (A104 command), the effect image during 4R is displayed on the image display device 5. Note that the point image corresponding to the number of prize balls obtained during the jackpot round is displayed as 0pt because the memory of the point in the RAM 122 is erased due to power outage. Furthermore, since the stored data regarding the type of jackpot has been erased, the image corresponding to the Aim for V effect as shown in FIG. 10-44 (e14) is canceled and not displayed after the power is turned on. In addition, if the CPU 103 is configured to send a jackpot start specifying command (A0 series command) to the production control CPU 120 in addition to the jackpot opening specifying command (A104 command) after returning from a power outage, the production control The CPU 120 receives from the CPU 103 and executes an effect aimed at V as shown in FIG. 10-44 (e14) based on the jackpot opening specifying command (A103 command) and the jackpot start specifying command (A0 series command). It can also be configured as follows.

In this way, even if a power outage occurs between rounds, the small right hit promotion effect will be executed from the time the power is turned on afterwards, so at the very least, the player will be encouraged to hit right right immediately after the power is restored. It is possible to prevent players from being disadvantaged, such as forgetting to hit to the right and not being able to enter the game ball into the V-winning slot in the next round. can.

FIG. 10-57 is an explanatory diagram showing the performance mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the game returns from a power outage during the 4th round of the jackpot when the special figure 1 is won. The power outage shown in FIG. 10-57 assumes a power outage 7 in which the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off during 4R and then the power supply is restored, as shown in FIG. 10-21.

As shown in FIG. 10-57, an image corresponding to the Aim for V in 4R effect is displayed on the image display device 5 (state of FIG. 10-44 (e15)), or an image corresponding to the V winning effect. If a power outage occurs in a state where is displayed on the image display device 5 (the state shown in FIG. 10-44 (e16)), after the image is no longer displayed on the image display device 5, when the power is turned on, "Recovering..." will be displayed. The character image is displayed on the image display device 5.

Here, even during recovery, an image (arrow and text) for promoting small right-handed hits continues to be displayed in the upper right corner of the image display device 5. Further, although not shown in the drawings, when the power is turned on, the right-handed hitting display section 075F030 of the special pattern LED board 075F020 and the right-handed hitting display section 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 are also lit to encourage right-handed hitting.

After that, the production control CPU 120 waits until it receives a command to specify that the big winning hole is open (A105 command) from the CPU 103, and when it receives the command to specify that the big winning hole is open (A105 command), the CPU 120 specifies that the big winning hole is open. Based on the command (A105 command), a performance image during 5R as shown in FIG. 10-45 (e19) is displayed on the image display device 5. Note that the point image corresponding to the number of prize balls obtained during the jackpot round is displayed as 0pt because the memory of the point in the RAM 122 is erased due to power outage.

In this way, even if a power outage occurs during a jackpot round, the small right-handed hit promotion effect will be executed from the time the power is turned on, so at the very least, immediately after the power outage returns, the player will not be able to hit right. To prevent a player from being disadvantaged, such as not being able to enter a game ball into a regular big prize opening in the next round, due to forgetting to hit the ball to the right. I can do it. Furthermore, as in the 4R, if a power outage occurs while a small right hit promotion performance is being executed along with the V target performance, or as shown in Figure 10-51 mentioned above, a small right hit promotion performance and a small right hit promotion performance may occur. In the case where a power outage occurs while a right-handed hit promotion performance is being executed, the common thing is that after returning from the power outage, the aim for V performance and the large right-handed hit promotion performance are not executed, while the small right-handed hit promotion performance is performed. is running at least. Therefore, in any situation, it is possible to at least encourage the player to play right-handed immediately after recovering from a power outage, in a manner common to all situations.

FIG. 10-58 is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the pachinko game machine 1 recovers from a power outage between rounds after the 4th round of the jackpot at the time of winning the special figure 1. The power outage shown in FIG. 10-58 is the power outage 8 when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off during the round after 4R and then the power supply is restored, as shown in FIG. 10-21. Suppose.

As shown in Figure 10-58, when a power outage occurs in a state where the image corresponding to the V winning effect is displayed on the image display device 5 (the state of Figure 10-45 (e18)) between rounds after 4R After the image is no longer displayed on the image display device 5, a character image “Restoring...” is displayed on the image display device 5 when the power is turned on.

Here, even during recovery, an image (arrow and text) for promoting small right-handed hits continues to be displayed in the upper right corner of the image display device 5. Further, although not shown in the drawings, when the power is turned on, the right-handed hitting display section 075F030 of the special pattern LED board 075F020 and the right-handed hitting display section 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 are also lit to encourage right-handed hitting.

After that, the production control CPU 120 waits until it receives a command to specify that the big winning hole is open (A105 command) from the CPU 103, and when it receives the command to specify that the big winning hole is open (A105 command), the CPU 120 specifies that the big winning hole is open. Based on the command (A105 command), the effect image during 5R is displayed on the image display device 5. Note that the point image corresponding to the number of prize balls obtained during the jackpot round is displayed as 0pt because the memory of the point in the RAM 122 is erased due to power outage.

In this way, even if a power outage occurs between rounds, the small right hit promotion effect will be executed from the time the power is turned on afterwards, so at the very least, the player will be encouraged to hit right right immediately after the power is restored. It is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged, such as forgetting to hit the ball to the right and not being able to enter the game ball into the big prize opening in the next round. can.

FIG. 10-59 is an explanatory diagram showing the performance mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the game returns from a power outage during the final round of the jackpot when the special figure 1 is won. The power outage shown in FIG. 10-59 assumes a power outage 9 when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off during 5R and then the power supply is restored, as shown in FIG. 10-21.

As shown in FIG. 10-59, a state in which an image corresponding to the in-round effect during 5R is displayed on the image display device 5 (the state in FIG. 10-46 (e20)), or a state after the end of 5R (in FIG. -46 (state e21)), after the image is no longer displayed on the image display device 5, a character image “Restoring...” is displayed on the image display device 5 when the power is turned on.

Here, even during recovery, an image (arrow and text) for promoting small right-handed hits continues to be displayed in the upper right corner of the image display device 5. Further, although not shown in the drawings, when the power is turned on, the right-handed hitting display section 075F030 of the special pattern LED board 075F020 and the right-handed hitting display section 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 are also lit to encourage right-handed hitting.

After that, the production control CPU 120 waits until it receives a jackpot end designation command (A3 type command) from the CPU 103, and when it receives the jackpot end designation command (A3 type command), the production control CPU 120 executes the jackpot end designation command (A3 type command). Based on this, an effect image corresponding to the ending effect as shown in FIG. 10-46 (f1) is displayed on the image display device 5.

In this way, even if a power outage occurs during the final round of a jackpot, the small right hit promotion effect will be executed from the time the power is turned on, so at the minimum, players will be able to It can encourage players to hit right-handed, and it can prevent them from forgetting to hit right-handed as much as possible.

FIG. 10-60 is an explanatory diagram showing the performance mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the pachinko game machine 1 recovers from a power outage during the ending performance at the time of winning the special drawing 1. The power outage shown in FIG. 10-60 assumes a power outage 10 in which the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off during the ending performance and then the power supply is restored, as shown in FIG. 10-21. .

As shown in FIG. 10-60, in the ending performance, an image for selecting a stage in a variable probability state after the jackpot game state is displayed on the image display device 5 (state of FIG. 10-46 (f1)), a character A state in which a name image indicating the name of the probability change state is displayed on the image display device 5 together with the image (the state shown in FIG. 10-47 (f2)), an image corresponding to the addictive suppression notification effect, and a game result in the jackpot game state are shown. A game result image is displayed on the image display device 5 (the state shown in FIG. 10-47 (f3)), and a forgetting prevention image for preventing players from forgetting to take out cards owned by the player is displayed on the image display device 5. If a power outage occurs in any of the displayed states (the state shown in Figure 10-47 (f4)), after the image is no longer displayed on the image display device 5, the character image "Restoring..." will be displayed when the power is turned on. is displayed on the image display device 5.

Here, even during recovery, an image (arrow and text) for promoting small right-handed hits continues to be displayed in the upper right corner of the image display device 5. Further, although not shown in the drawings, when the power is turned on, the right-handed hitting display section 075F030 of the special pattern LED board 075F020 and the right-handed hitting display section 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 are also lit to encourage right-handed hitting.

After that, if there is a pending memory number, the production control CPU 120 sends a pending memory number specification command (C1 series command, C2 series command), background specification command (95 series command), symbol variation specification command (8D series command) from the CPU 103. , the display result specification command (8C series command), and the fluctuation pattern specification command (81 series command) are received, and when these commands are received, the pending storage number specification command (C1 series command, C2 series command), Based on the background specification command (95 series command), symbol variation specification command (8D series command), display result specification command (8C series command), and variation pattern specification command (81 series command), the An image display device 5 displays an effect image corresponding to the variation of the special symbol.

On the other hand, if there is no pending memory number, the production control CPU 120 waits until it receives a background designation command (95 series command) and a customer waiting demo designation command (9F00 command) from the CPU 103. Based on the specified command (95 series command) and the customer waiting demonstration specification command (9F00 command), the display on the image display device 5 is restored with the initial pattern (in this example, "123" as a decorative pattern and small pattern) stopped. .

In this way, even if a power outage occurs during the ending, the small right hit promotion effect will be executed from the time the power is turned on afterwards, so the player will at least be encouraged to hit right right after the power is restored. This prevents as much as possible the players from being disadvantaged, such as forgetting to hit the right hand and not being able to enter the second starting prize slot in a variable state after a jackpot game state. be able to.

[Main effects obtained by characteristic part 075F]
Below, the technical effects obtained by the various configurations of the feature portion 075F described above will be individually listed.

(1-1) A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result. There it is,
a firing means (for example, a ball-striking operation handle 30) capable of firing a game medium (for example, a game ball) into a game area according to a player's operation;
A first downstream path (for example, a path passing through the left area of the gaming area) and a second downstream path (for example, a path passing through the right area of the gaming area) through which the gaming medium can flow down in the gaming area. Among them, a guidance display means (for example, for performance control) that displays a guidance display (for example, an image display encouraging the player to play right) using an image display to prompt the player to fire the game medium toward the second downstream path. A process for executing a right-handed hitting suggestion effect or an aim-for-V effect by the CPU 120);
A specific area into which the gaming medium flowing down the second downstream path can enter (for example, a detection area of the V winning switch 075F024 after passing through the V grand prize opening provided inside the special variable winning ball device 075F007B); Equipped with
The guidance display includes a first guidance display using an image display of characters and figures (for example, an image display corresponding to the big right-handed hitting promotion effect located in the center of the screen shown in FIG. 10-32 (c25)), and A second guide display using an image display smaller than the first guide display (for example, an image display corresponding to the small right-hand hit promotion effect located at the upper right of the screen shown in FIG. 10-24 (c1)) and an image related to the specific area. including a third guidance display using a display (for example, an image display corresponding to the Aim for V effect shown in FIG. 10-43 (e13)),
The guide display means includes:
After the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the first guide display and the second guide display are executed during execution of a start effect (for example, a fanfare effect) that notifies the start of control of the advantageous state. (for example, image display corresponding to the large right-handed hitting suggestion performance and image display corresponding to the small right-handed hitting suggestion performance shown in FIGS. 10-25 (c4) to 10-38 (c26)),
Thereafter, while ending the first guidance display, the second guidance display is continued (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-38 (d1) and (d2), the image display corresponding to the big right hit suggestion effect is ended). (The part that continues to display the image corresponding to the small right hit suggestion effect),
Thereafter, the third guidance display is performed while the game medium cannot enter the specific area, and the second guidance display is continued (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-43 (e13), aim for V. (a part that displays an image corresponding to the production and continues to display an image corresponding to the small right hit suggestion production),
Thereafter, the second guide display and the third guide display are continued even after the state where the game medium cannot enter the specific area changes from the state where the game medium cannot enter the specific area (for example, the second guide display and the third guide display are continued). As shown in 10-44 (e15), the part that continues the image display corresponding to the V-aiming effect and the image display corresponding to the small right hit suggestion effect),
Thereafter, when the game medium enters the specific area, the third guidance display is terminated while the second guidance display is continued (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-44 (e16), aim for V. (a part where the image display corresponding to the small right hit suggestion effect is continued while the image display corresponding to the small right hit suggestion effect is ended),
While the first guidance display and the second guidance display are being performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-31 (c23), an image display corresponding to a large right-hand hitting suggestion effect and an image corresponding to a small right-hand hitting suggestion effect) 10-44 (e15) while the second guidance display and the third guidance display are being performed. When a power outage occurs (while displaying an image corresponding to the V target effect and an image displaying a small right hit suggestion effect), and when recovering from the power outage, the first The image display is performed again in such a manner that the guidance display and the third guidance display are not performed, but the second guidance display is performed (for example, after the power is turned on as shown in FIGS. 10-51 and 10-57, "Restoring...") (The part where the text image and the image promoting small right-handed shots are displayed).

(1-2) A gaming machine (for example, Pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result. There it is,
a firing means (for example, a ball-striking operation handle 30) capable of firing a game medium (for example, a game ball) into a game area according to a player's operation;
A first downstream path (for example, a path passing through the left area of the gaming area) and a second downstream path (for example, a path passing through the right area of the gaming area) through which the gaming medium can flow down in the gaming area. Among them, a guidance display means (for example, for performance control) that displays a guidance display (for example, an image display encouraging the player to play right) using an image display to prompt the player to fire the game medium toward the second downstream path. A process for executing a right-handed hitting suggestion effect or an aim-for-V effect by the CPU 120);
A specific area into which the gaming medium flowing down the second downstream path can enter (for example, a detection area of the V winning switch 075F024 after passing through the V grand prize opening provided inside the special variable winning ball device 075F007B); Equipped with
The guidance display includes a first guidance display using an image display of text and figures (for example, an image display corresponding to the big right-handed hitting promotion effect located in the center of the screen shown in FIG. 10-32 (c25)); A second guidance display using an image display smaller than the first guidance display (for example, an image display corresponding to the small right-handed hit promotion effect located at the upper right of the screen shown in FIG. 10-24 (c1)), and an image related to the specific area. including a third guidance display using a display (for example, an image display corresponding to the Aim for V effect shown in FIG. 10-43 (e13)),
The guide display means includes:
After the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the first guide display and the second guide display are executed during execution of a start effect (for example, a fanfare effect) that notifies the start of control of the advantageous state. (for example, image display corresponding to the large right-handed hitting suggestion performance and image display corresponding to the small right-handed hitting suggestion performance shown in FIGS. 10-25 (c4) to 10-38 (c26)),
Thereafter, in conjunction with the release of the attacker corresponding to the first round, the first guide display is ended while the second guide display is continued (for example, FIGS. 10-38 (d1), (d2) ), where the image display corresponding to the large right-handed hit suggestion effect is ended while the image display corresponding to the small right-handed shot suggestion effect is continued),
Thereafter, in conjunction with the closing of the attacker corresponding to the round before the round that allows entry into the specific area, the third guidance display is performed and the second guidance display is continued (for example, in Figure 10-43 As shown in (e13), the part that displays an image corresponding to the Aim for V effect and continues to display the image corresponding to the small right hit suggestion effect),
Thereafter, in conjunction with the release of the attacker corresponding to the round before the round that allows entry into the specific area, the second guide display and the third guide display are continued (for example, in FIG. 10-44). As shown in e15), the part that continues to display the image corresponding to the Aim for V effect and the image display corresponding to the small right hit suggestion effect),
Thereafter, in conjunction with the game medium entering the specific area, the third guide display is ended while the second guide display is continued (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-44 (e16), (The part where the image display corresponding to the aiming effect ends while the image display corresponding to the small right hit suggestion effect continues),
While the first guidance display and the second guidance display are being performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-31 (c23), an image display corresponding to a large right-hand hitting suggestion effect and an image corresponding to a small right-hand hitting suggestion effect) 10-44 (e15) while the second guidance display and the third guidance display are being performed. When a power outage occurs (while displaying an image corresponding to the V target effect and an image displaying a small right hit suggestion effect), and when recovering from the power outage, the first The image display is performed again in such a manner that the guidance display and the third guidance display are not performed, but the second guidance display is performed (for example, after the power is turned on as shown in FIGS. 10-51 and 10-57, "Restoring...") (The part where the text image and the image promoting small right-handed shots are displayed).

(1-3) A gaming machine (for example, Pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result. There it is,
a firing means (for example, a ball-striking operation handle 30) capable of firing a game medium (for example, a game ball) into a game area according to a player's operation;
A first downstream path (for example, a path passing through the left area of the gaming area) and a second downstream path (for example, a path passing through the right area of the gaming area) through which the gaming medium can flow down in the gaming area. Among them, a guidance display means (for example, for performance control) that displays a guidance display (for example, an image display encouraging the player to play right) using an image display to prompt the player to fire the game medium toward the second downstream path. A process of executing a right-handed hitting suggestion effect or an aim-for-V effect by the CPU 120);
A specific area into which the gaming medium flowing down the second downstream path can enter (for example, a detection area of the V winning switch 075F024 after passing through the V grand prize opening provided inside the special variable winning ball device 075F007B); Equipped with
The guidance display includes a first guidance display using an image display of text and figures (for example, an image display corresponding to the big right-handed hitting promotion effect located in the center of the screen shown in FIG. 10-32 (c25)); A second guidance display using an image display smaller than the first guidance display (for example, an image display corresponding to the small right-handed hit promotion effect located at the upper right of the screen shown in FIG. 10-24 (c1)), and an image related to the specific area. including a third guidance display using a display (for example, an image display corresponding to the Aim for V effect shown in FIG. 10-43 (e13)),
The guide display means includes:
After the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the first guide display and the second guide display are executed during execution of a start effect (for example, a fanfare effect) that notifies the start of control of the advantageous state. (for example, image display corresponding to the large right-handed hitting suggestion performance and image display corresponding to the small right-handed hitting suggestion performance shown in FIGS. 10-25 (c4) to 10-38 (c26)),
Thereafter, by receiving a 1R opening command (for example, the grand prize opening designation command (A101 command)), the first guidance display is terminated while the second guidance display is continued (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-38). As shown in (d1) and (d2), the part where the image display corresponding to the large right-handed hit suggestion effect ends while the image display corresponding to the small right-handed hit suggestion effect is continued),
Thereafter, by receiving a command after the end of 3R (for example, a command after opening the big prize opening (A203 command)), the third guidance display is performed and the second guidance display is continued (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-43). As shown in (e13), the part that displays an image corresponding to the Aim for V effect and continues to display the image corresponding to the small right hit suggestion effect),
Thereafter, by receiving the 4R opening command (for example, the grand prize opening designation command (A104 command)), the second guide display and the third guide display are continued (for example, in FIG. 10-44 (e15)). As shown, the part that continues to display the image corresponding to the Aim for V effect and the image display corresponding to the small right hit suggestion effect),
Thereafter, by receiving a V passage command (for example, a probability change determination device passage designation command (AD00 command)), the third guidance display is terminated while the second guidance display is continued (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-44). As shown in (e16), the part where the image display corresponding to the Aim for V effect ends while the image display corresponding to the small right hit suggestion effect continues),
While the first guidance display and the second guidance display are being performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-31 (c23), an image display corresponding to a large right-hand hitting suggestion effect and an image corresponding to a small right-hand hitting suggestion effect) 10-44 (e15) while the second guidance display and the third guidance display are being performed. When a power outage occurs (while displaying an image corresponding to the V target effect and an image displaying a small right hit suggestion effect), and when recovering from the power outage, the first The image display is performed again in such a manner that the guidance display and the third guidance display are not performed, but the second guidance display is performed (for example, after the power is turned on as shown in FIGS. 10-51 and 10-57, "Restoring...") (The part where the text image and the image promoting small right-handed shots are displayed).

Specifically, during the execution of the fanfare performance, a large right-handed batting promotion performance and a small right-handed batting promotion performance are executed to emphasize the promotion of right-handed batting, thereby encouraging the player to bat right-handed in subsequent games. After that, it is possible to prevent the player from appealing to the player about excessively hitting the right by making the player recognize it surely, and then continuing the performance promoting the small right-handed hit while ending the big right-handed hitting promotion performance. In addition, the Aim for V effect to make people aim for the V grand prize opening will be executed from the time when the V grand prize opening is still closed, and will continue as it is even after the V grand prize opening is opened. It is possible to appeal to the player the importance of aiming for the big winning hole, and to ensure that the game ball enters the V big winning hole. In addition, by ending the Aim for V effect after a V win occurs and the V big win opening is closed, it is possible to prevent unnecessary promotional notifications from being given to the player. Furthermore, in the above-mentioned flow, the small right-handed promotion performance is continuously executed, so players are encouraged to always play right-handed from before the V-big winning opening opens to after the V-winning occurs. can be encouraged. Thereby, it is possible to suitably instruct the player to hit the ball to the right. In addition, when a power outage occurs while displaying an image corresponding to a big right hit suggestion effect and an image display corresponding to a small right hit suggestion effect and the power is restored from the power outage, it also corresponds to the Aim for V effect. If a power outage occurs while the image display and the image corresponding to the small right hit suggestion effect are being displayed and the power is restored from the power outage, the text image "Restoring..." and the small Since an image promoting right-handed playing is displayed, even if a power outage occurs, the player can be at least encouraged to continue playing right-handed in subsequent games.

(2) A gaming machine (for example, Pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result. ,
a firing means (for example, a ball-striking operation handle 30) capable of firing a game medium (for example, a game ball) into a game area according to a player's operation;
A first downstream path (for example, a path passing through the left area of the gaming area) and a second downstream path (for example, a path passing through the right area of the gaming area) through which the gaming medium can flow down in the gaming area. Among them, a guidance display means (for example, for performance control) that displays a guidance display (for example, an image display encouraging the player to play right) using an image display to prompt the player to fire the game medium toward the second downstream path. a process for executing a right-handed hitting promotion effect by the CPU 120;
The guidance display includes a first guidance display (for example, an image display corresponding to the big right-handed hitting promotion effect located in the center of the screen shown in FIG. 10-32 (c25)) and a second guidance display (for example, FIG. 10-24 (c25)). image display corresponding to the small right-handed hit promotion effect located at the top right of the screen shown in c1),
The guide display means includes:
After the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the first guidance display and Performing the second guidance display (for example, image display corresponding to the large right-handed hitting promotion performance and image display corresponding to the small right-handed hitting promotion performance shown in FIGS. 10-25 (c4) to 10-38 (c26)),
In the period after the predetermined period, the first guidance display is ended while the second guidance display is continued (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-39 (e1) to FIG. 10-46 (e21), the jackpot is (The part where the image corresponding to the big right hit promotion performance is not displayed during the round, while the image corresponding to the small right hit promotion performance is continued),
In the special state (for example, probability change state, time saving state) after the control of the advantageous state has ended, the second guidance display is continued (for example, after the jackpot as shown in FIGS. 10-48 and 10-49). part that continues to display an image corresponding to the small right-handed hit promotion effect in a variable probability state),
The second guidance display is not affected by the switching display of the background image (for example, the switching display by fade-out and fade-in) performed in connection with the control of the advantageous state (for example, FIG. 10-38 (d1) to As shown in FIG. 10-39 (d4), the part where the image display corresponding to the small right hit promotion effect is continued without being affected by the switching display of the background image by fade-in and fade-out),
The second guidance display is not affected by the display of the effect image in the special state (for example, the image display due to the group preview effect) (for example, the image display due to the group preview effect as shown in FIG. 10-49 (g5)). (The part that continues to display the image corresponding to the small right hit promotion effect without being affected by).

Specifically, during the execution of the fanfare performance, a large right-handed batting promotion performance and a small right-handed batting promotion performance are executed to emphasize the promotion of right-handed batting, thereby encouraging the player to bat right-handed in subsequent games. To ensure that a player is aware of excessive hitting to the right, and during the subsequent jackpot round, to end a big right hitting promotion performance while continuing a small right hitting promotion performance, thereby not appealing to a player that he hits the right excessively. I can do it. In addition, by continuing to perform the small right-handed hit promotion performance even in the variable probability state or time-saving state after the jackpot game state ends, it is possible to encourage the player to always play right. Furthermore, after a jackpot occurs, the small right hit promotion effect will not be affected by the switching display (fade out, fade in, etc.) that is performed when switching to the jackpot round after the fanfare effect is executed, and the jackpot game state will not be affected. Since the small right-handed hit promotion performance is not affected by the image display such as the group preview performance performed in the probability change state or time-saving state after the game ends, the player can always be encouraged to play the right hit. Thereby, it is possible to suitably instruct the player to hit the ball to the right.

(3-1) A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko machine) that performs a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result. A gaming machine 1),
a firing means (for example, a ball-striking operation handle 30) capable of firing a game medium (for example, a game ball) into a game area according to a player's operation;
A first downstream path (for example, a path passing through the left area of the gaming area) and a second downstream path (for example, a path passing through the right area of the gaming area) through which the gaming medium can flow down in the gaming area. Among them, a guidance display means (for example, for performance control) that displays a guidance display (for example, an image display encouraging the player to play right) using an image display to prompt the player to fire the game medium toward the second downstream path. A process of executing a right-handed hitting promotion effect by the CPU 120);
Guide means (e.g., emitting guidance light to prompt the player to fire the game media toward the second downstream path by moving the light emitting portions of the light emitting means (e.g., frame right lamp 075F009R and frame left lamp 075F009L); , a process of executing a right-hitting suggestion performance using a frame lamp by the performance control CPU 120);
Sound output means (for example, speakers 8L, 8R) for outputting sound,
The guidance display includes a first guidance display (for example, an image display corresponding to the big right-handed hitting promotion effect located at the center of the screen shown in FIG. 10-32 (c25)) and a second guidance display (for example, FIG. 10-24 Image display corresponding to the small right-handed hit promotion effect located at the top right of the screen shown in (c1)),
As the first guidance display, an image display is performed that urges the player to fire the game medium toward the second downstream path in a manner that is more emphasized than the second guidance display (for example, a large right-handed hit is promoted). The presentation uses images of larger letters and shapes than the small right-hand hit promotion presentation),
After the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the guide display means displays a name of the advantageous state that is part of a start performance (for example, a fanfare performance) that notifies the start of control of the advantageous state. Before the display (for example, display of a name image indicating the name of the jackpot gaming state) is completed, the second guidance display is performed (for example, displaying the name of the jackpot gaming state as shown in FIG. 10-24 (c1). Before the display of the name image is completed, the image corresponding to the small right hit promotion effect is displayed), and after the name display of the advantageous state is completed, the first guidance display is performed (FIG. 10-25 to FIG. 10- 33, after the display of the name image indicating the name of the jackpot game state is completed, an image corresponding to the big right hit promotion performance is displayed),
The guide means repeats the guide light emission a plurality of times in conjunction with the first guide display (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-25 to 10-33, displays an image corresponding to a big right-handed hit promotion effect). (The part where the frame lamps are lit twice in an arching motion from the left side to the right side)
The sound output means is
A corresponding sound corresponding to the guide light emission is output in conjunction with the first guide light emission among the plurality of guide light emissions (for example, Fig. 10-25 (c4) to Fig. 10-32 (c24) ), when the frame lamp is turned on in the first big right-handed driving promotion performance, the speakers 8L and 8R output sound in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion performance),
When the last guide light emission is performed among the plurality of guide light emissions, the corresponding sound is not output (for example, the second time as shown in FIGS. 10-32 (c26) to 10-33 (c29)). (The part where no sound is output from speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion effect when the frame lamp is lit in the big right-handed hitting promotion effect),
After the control of the advantageous state is started, the sound corresponding to the advantageous state is output (for example, as shown in FIG. (a part that outputs sound in a manner according to the
In a special state that is different from the advantageous state and is advantageous to the player after the control of the advantageous state has ended (for example, a variable probability state, a time saving state), the display result of the variable display is the same as the specific display result. (For example, as shown in Figure 10-50 (h2), in the case of a consecutive jackpot with 2 special symbols, the corresponding sound is output from speakers 8L and 8R. part that does not output sound depending on the mode).

Specifically, after a jackpot has occurred, the player is first encouraged to hit the right hand modestly by executing a small right hit promotion effect, and then by displaying a name image indicating the name of the jackpot gaming state. The player can be made aware that the game is controlled to a jackpot gaming state. Then, after making the player aware that the jackpot round has started, the player is informed that he or she will hit right in an emphasized manner using a big right hit promotion effect, thereby encouraging the player to hit right in subsequent games. It can be recognized with certainty. In addition, while the big right-handed hit promotion effect is being executed, the lighted part of the frame lamp moves to the right to promote right-handed hits, so the player is encouraged to hit right more effectively. can be encouraged. Furthermore, when the first frame lamp promotes right-handed hitting, sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the promotion of right-handed hitting. When the frame lamp (second time) is used to promote right-handed hitting, no sound is output from speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the promotion of right-handed hitting. The player can smoothly hear the BGM during the jackpot round without overlapping the BGM with the sound corresponding to the promotion of right-handed hitting. In addition, in the probability change state or time saving state after the jackpot game state, if a consecutive winning with 2 special symbols occurs, since we have already promoted right-handed hitting, when the first hit with 1 special symbol occurs. Since the big right-handed hitting promotion performance is not executed, and the sound corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion performance is not outputted, the right-handed hitting promotion is frequently emphasized and the player can be prevented from feeling bothersome. Thereby, it is possible to suitably instruct the player to hit the ball to the right.

(3-2) A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko machine) that performs a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result. A gaming machine 1),
a firing means (for example, a ball-striking operation handle 30) capable of firing a game medium (for example, a game ball) into a game area according to a player's operation;
A first downstream path (for example, a path passing through the left area of the gaming area) and a second downstream path (for example, a path passing through the right area of the gaming area) through which the gaming medium can flow down in the gaming area. Among them, a guidance display means (for example, for performance control) that displays a guidance display (for example, an image display encouraging the player to play right) using an image display to prompt the player to fire the game medium toward the second downstream path. A process of executing a right-handed hitting promotion effect by the CPU 120);
Guide means (e.g., emitting guidance light to prompt the player to fire the game media toward the second downstream path by moving the light emitting portions of the light emitting means (e.g., frame right lamp 075F009R and frame left lamp 075F009L); , a process of executing a right-hitting suggestion performance using a frame lamp by the performance control CPU 120);
Sound output means (for example, speakers 8L, 8R) for outputting sound,
The guidance display includes a first guidance display (for example, an image display corresponding to the big right-handed hitting promotion effect located at the center of the screen shown in FIG. 10-32 (c25)) and a second guidance display (for example, FIG. 10-24 Image display corresponding to the small right-handed hit promotion effect located at the top right of the screen shown in (c1)),
As the first guidance display, an image display is performed that urges the player to fire the game medium toward the second downstream path in a manner that is more emphasized than the second guidance display (for example, a large right-handed hit is promoted). The presentation uses images of larger letters and shapes than the small right-hand hit promotion presentation),
After the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the guide display means displays a name of the advantageous state that is part of a start performance (for example, a fanfare performance) that notifies the start of control of the advantageous state. Before the display (for example, display of a name image indicating the name of the jackpot gaming state) is completed, the second guidance display is performed (for example, displaying the name of the jackpot gaming state as shown in FIG. 10-24 (c1). Before the display of the name image is completed, the image corresponding to the small right hit promotion effect is displayed), and after the name display of the advantageous state is completed, the first guidance display is performed (FIG. 10-25 to FIG. 10- 33, after the display of the name image indicating the name of the jackpot game state is completed, an image corresponding to the big right hit promotion performance is displayed),
The guide means repeats the guide light emission a plurality of times in conjunction with the first guide display (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-25 to 10-33, displays an image corresponding to a big right-handed hit promotion effect). (The part where the frame lamps are lit twice in an arching motion from the left side to the right side)
The sound output means includes:
A corresponding sound corresponding to the guide light emission is output in conjunction with the first guide light emission among the plurality of guide light emissions (for example, Fig. 10-25 (c4) to Fig. 10-32 (c24) ), when the frame lamp is turned on in the first big right-handed driving promotion performance, the speakers 8L and 8R output sound in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion performance),
When the last guide light emission is performed among the plurality of guide light emissions, the corresponding sound is not output (for example, the second time as shown in FIGS. 10-32 (c26) to 10-33 (c29)). (The part where no sound is output from speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion performance when the frame lamp is lit in the big right-handed hitting promotion performance),
After the control of the advantageous state is started, the sound corresponding to the advantageous state is output (for example, as shown in FIG. (a part that outputs sound in a manner according to the
The guide means is configured to control the display result of the variable display in a special state that is different from the advantageous state and is advantageous to the player after the control of the advantageous state has ended (for example, a variable probability state, a time saving state). When the specific display result is obtained, the guide light is not emitted (for example, as shown in Figure 10-50 (h2), in the case of a consecutive jackpot with 2 special symbols, the frame lamp will display a large right-handed hit promotion effect) (the part that does not light up depending on the situation).

Specifically, after a jackpot has occurred, the player is first encouraged to hit the right hand modestly by executing a small right hit promotion effect, and then by displaying a name image indicating the name of the jackpot gaming state. The player can be made aware that the game is controlled to a jackpot gaming state. Then, after making the player aware that the jackpot round has started, the player is informed that he or she will hit right in an emphasized manner using a big right hit promotion effect, thereby encouraging the player to hit right in subsequent games. It can be recognized with certainty. In addition, while the big right-handed hit promotion effect is being executed, the lighted part of the frame lamp moves to the right to promote right-handed hits, so the player is encouraged to hit right more effectively. can be encouraged. Furthermore, when the first frame lamp promotes right-handed hitting, sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the promotion of right-handed hitting. When the frame lamp (second time) is used to promote right-handed hitting, no sound is output from speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the promotion of right-handed hitting. The player can smoothly hear the BGM during the jackpot round without overlapping the BGM with the sound corresponding to the promotion of right-handed hitting. In addition, in the probability change state or time saving state after the jackpot game state, if a consecutive winning with 2 special symbols occurs, since we have already promoted right-handed hitting, when the first hit with 1 special symbol occurs. Since the big right-handed hitting promotion effect is not executed like this, and the frame lamp is not lit in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion effect, the right-handed hitting promotion is frequently emphasized. This can prevent players from feeling bothered. Thereby, it is possible to suitably instruct the player to hit the ball to the right.

(4-1) A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko machine) that performs a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result. A gaming machine 1),
a firing means (for example, a ball-striking operation handle 30) capable of firing a game medium (for example, a game ball) into a game area according to a player's operation;
A first downstream path (for example, a path passing through the left area of the gaming area) and a second downstream path (for example, a path passing through the right area of the gaming area) through which the gaming medium can flow down in the gaming area. Among them, a guidance display means (for example, for performance control) that displays a guidance display (for example, an image display encouraging the player to play right) using an image display to prompt the player to fire the game medium toward the second downstream path. A process of executing a right-handed hitting promotion effect by the CPU 120);
Guide means (e.g., emitting guidance light to prompt the player to fire the game media toward the second downstream path by moving the light emitting portions of the light emitting means (e.g., frame right lamp 075F009R and frame left lamp 075F009L); , a process of executing a right-hitting suggestion performance using a frame lamp by the performance control CPU 120);
Sound output means (for example, speakers 8L, 8R) for outputting sound,
The guidance display includes a first guidance display (for example, an image display corresponding to the big right-handed hitting promotion effect located at the center of the screen shown in FIG. 10-32 (c25)) and a second guidance display (for example, FIG. 10-24 Image display corresponding to the small right-handed hit promotion effect located at the top right of the screen shown in (c1)),
As the first guidance display, an image display is performed that urges the player to fire the game medium toward the second downstream path in a manner that is more emphasized than the second guidance display (for example, a large right-handed hit is promoted). The presentation uses images of larger letters and shapes than the small right-hand hit promotion presentation),
After the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the guide display means displays a name of the advantageous state that is part of a start performance (for example, a fanfare performance) that notifies the start of control of the advantageous state. Before the display (for example, display of a name image indicating the name of the jackpot gaming state) is completed, the second guidance display is performed (for example, displaying the name of the jackpot gaming state as shown in FIG. 10-24 (c1). Before the display of the name image is completed, the image corresponding to the small right hit promotion effect is displayed), and after the name display of the advantageous state is completed, the first guidance display is performed (FIG. 10-25 to FIG. 10- 33, after the display of the name image indicating the name of the jackpot game state is completed, an image corresponding to the big right hit promotion performance is displayed),
The guide means emits the guide light in conjunction with the first guide display after turning off the light emitting means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-25 to 10-33, after turning off the light, (The part that lights the frame lamp in an arch from the left side to the right side in conjunction with the image display corresponding to the promotional effect)
The sound output means is
After the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, a corresponding sound corresponding to the guide light emission is output in conjunction with the guide light emission (for example, FIG. 10-25 (c4) to FIG. As shown in 10-32 (c24), when the frame lamp is turned on in the first big right-handed driving promotion performance, the speakers 8L and 8R output sound in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion performance),
Thereafter, in a special state that is different from the advantageous state and is advantageous to the player after the control of the advantageous state has ended (for example, a variable probability state, a time saving state), the display result of the variable display is changed to the specific display. When a result is obtained, the corresponding sound is not output (for example, as shown in Figure 10-50 (h2), in the case of a consecutive jackpot with 2 special symbols, the speaker 8L, 8R will output a big right-handed promotion effect. parts that do not output sound in a corresponding manner).

Specifically, after a jackpot has occurred, the player is first encouraged to hit the right hand modestly by executing a small right hit promotion effect, and then by displaying a name image indicating the name of the jackpot gaming state. The player can be made aware that the game is controlled to a jackpot gaming state. Then, after making the player aware that the jackpot round has started, the player is informed that he or she will hit right in an emphasized manner using a big right hit promotion effect, thereby encouraging the player to hit right in subsequent games. It can be recognized with certainty. In addition, while the big right-handed hit promotion effect is being executed, the frame lamp once goes out, and then the lighted part of the lamp moves to the right to promote right-handed hits, making it easier to understand and more effective. The player can be encouraged to play right-handed. Further, when the frame lamp is used to promote right-handed hitting, sounds are outputted from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the promotion of right-handed hitting, so that the player is encouraged to play right-handed by the sound as well. I can do it. In addition, in the probability change state or time saving state after the jackpot game state, if a consecutive winning with 2 special symbols occurs, since we have already promoted right-handed hitting, when the first hit with 1 special symbol occurs. Since the big right-handed hitting promotion performance is not executed, and the sound corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion performance is not outputted, the right-handed hitting promotion is frequently emphasized and the player can be prevented from feeling bothersome. Thereby, it is possible to suitably instruct the player to hit the ball to the right.

(4-2) A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko machine) that performs a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result. A gaming machine 1),
a firing means (for example, a ball-striking operation handle 30) capable of firing a game medium (for example, a game ball) into a game area according to a player's operation;
A first downstream path (for example, a path passing through the left area of the gaming area) and a second downstream path (for example, a path passing through the right area of the gaming area) through which the gaming medium can flow down in the gaming area. Among them, a guidance display means (for example, for performance control) that displays a guidance display (for example, an image display encouraging the player to play right) using an image display to prompt the player to fire the game medium toward the second downstream path. A process of executing a right-handed hitting promotion effect by the CPU 120);
Guide means (e.g., emitting guidance light to prompt the player to fire the game media toward the second downstream path by moving the light emitting portions of the light emitting means (e.g., frame right lamp 075F009R and frame left lamp 075F009L); , a process of executing a right-hitting suggestion performance using a frame lamp by the performance control CPU 120);
Sound output means (for example, speakers 8L, 8R) for outputting sound,
The guidance display includes a first guidance display (for example, an image display corresponding to the big right-handed hitting promotion effect located at the center of the screen shown in FIG. 10-32 (c25)) and a second guidance display (for example, FIG. 10-24 Image display corresponding to the small right-handed hit promotion effect located at the top right of the screen shown in (c1)),
As the first guidance display, an image display is performed that urges the player to fire the game medium toward the second downstream path in a manner that is more emphasized than the second guidance display (for example, a large right-handed hit is promoted). The presentation uses images of larger letters and shapes than the small right-hand hit promotion presentation),
After the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the guide display means displays a name of the advantageous state that is part of a start performance (for example, a fanfare performance) that notifies the start of control of the advantageous state. Before the display (for example, display of a name image indicating the name of the jackpot gaming state) is completed, the second guidance display is performed (for example, displaying the name of the jackpot gaming state as shown in FIG. 10-24 (c1). Before the display of the name image is completed, the image corresponding to the small right hit promotion effect is displayed), and after the name display of the advantageous state is completed, the first guidance display is performed (FIG. 10-25 to FIG. 10- 33, after the display of the name image indicating the name of the jackpot game state is completed, an image corresponding to the big right hit promotion performance is displayed),
The guide means is
After the light emitting means is turned off, the guide light is emitted in conjunction with the first guide display (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-25 to 10-33, after the light is once turned off, it corresponds to a big right-handed drive promotion effect) (The part that lights the frame lamp in an arch from the left side to the right side in conjunction with the image display)
Thereafter, in a special state that is different from the advantageous state and is advantageous to the player after the control of the advantageous state has ended (for example, a variable probability state, a time saving state), the display result of the variable display is changed to the specific display. When a result is obtained, the guide light is not emitted (for example, as shown in Figure 10-50 (h2), in the case of a consecutive jackpot with 2 special symbols, the frame lamp responds to the big right hit promotion effect. (The part that does not light up depending on the mode)

Specifically, after a jackpot has occurred, the player is first encouraged to hit the right hand modestly by executing a small right hit promotion effect, and then by displaying a name image indicating the name of the jackpot gaming state. The player can be made aware that the game is controlled to a jackpot gaming state. Then, after making the player aware that the jackpot round has started, the player is informed that he or she will hit right in an emphasized manner using a big right hit promotion effect, thereby encouraging the player to hit right in subsequent games. It can be recognized with certainty. In addition, while the big right-handed hit promotion effect is being executed, the frame lamp once goes out, and then the lighted part of the lamp moves to the right to promote right-handed hits, making it easier to understand and more effective. The player can be encouraged to play right-handed. Further, when the frame lamp is used to promote right-handed hitting, sounds are outputted from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the promotion of right-handed hitting, so that the player is encouraged to play right-handed by the sound as well. I can do it. In addition, in the probability change state or time saving state after the jackpot game state, if a consecutive winning with 2 special symbols occurs, since we have already promoted right-handed hitting, when the first hit with 1 special symbol occurs. Since the big right-handed hitting promotion effect is not executed like this, and the frame lamp is not lit in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion effect, the right-handed hitting promotion is frequently emphasized. This can prevent players from feeling bothered. Thereby, it is possible to suitably instruct the player to hit the ball to the right.

(5) The second guide display is displayed in a manner that is more emphasized than the name display of the advantageous state that is part of the start effect.

Specifically, the image display in the big right-handed driving promotion effects shown in FIGS. 10-25 to 10-33 has a larger character image than the name image display in the fanfare effect shown in FIG. 10-24 (c2). The characters appear one by one in stages, take a long time to execute, and are displayed in an emphasized manner. With this, it is possible to emphasize to the player that he should play right-handed.

(6) The guide means repeatedly emits the guide light a plurality of times in conjunction with the first guide display,
The sound output means is
Outputting a corresponding sound corresponding to the guide light emission in conjunction with the first guide light emission among the plurality of guide light emission;
Not outputting a corresponding sound corresponding to the guide light emission in conjunction with the intermediate guide light emission among the plurality of guide light emission;
When the last guide light emission among the plurality of guide light emissions is performed, the corresponding sound is not output.

Specifically, among the multiple right-handed driving promotion performances using frame lamps, a sound corresponding to the right-handed batting promotion performance is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in conjunction with the first right-handed batting promotion, but the second one Regarding the subsequent right-handed driving promotion, the speakers 8L and 8R do not output sound corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion effect. For example, if the frame lamp is used to promote right-handed players three times, the speakers 8L and 8R output sound in conjunction with the first right-handed player promotion based on the sound data for the right-handed players. Also, no sound is output in conjunction with the promotion of right-handed hitting from the second time onwards. In other words, the sound data for promoting right-handed hitting only includes sound data linked to the first right-handed promoting. As a result, the BGM during the jackpot round that is output after the big right-hitting promotion effect is not overlaid with the sound of the mode corresponding to the promotion of right-handed hitting, and the player can smoothly hear the BGM during the jackpot round. can be heard.

(7) The guide means repeatedly emits the guide light a plurality of times in conjunction with the first guide display,
The sound output means includes:
Outputting a corresponding sound corresponding to the guide light emission in conjunction with the first guide light emission among the plurality of guide light emission;
Outputting a corresponding sound corresponding to the guide light emission in conjunction with the intermediate guide light emission among the plurality of guide light emission;
When the last guide light emission among the plurality of guide light emissions is performed, the corresponding sound is not output.

Specifically, among the multiple right-handed driving promotion performances using frame lamps, a sound corresponding to the right-handed batting promotion performance is output from speakers 8L and 8R in conjunction with the first right-handed batting promotion, and then In conjunction with the promotion of hitting to the right, the speakers 8L and 8R output sounds corresponding to the presentation to promote hitting to the right, but regarding the final promotion to hitting to the right, the speakers 8L and 8R do not output sounds corresponding to the presentation to promote hitting to the right. For example, when a frame lamp is used to promote right-handed players three times, the speakers 8L and 8R are linked to the first and second right-handed players based on the sound data for the right-handed players. and outputs a sound in conjunction with the promotion of the third right-handed hit. In other words, the sound data for promoting right-handed hitting includes only sound data linked to the first and second right-handed promoting. Note that the sound data may include only sound data linked to one time's right-handed promotion, and the production control CPU 120 may execute two loops of the sound data linked to one right-handed promotion. . Alternatively, the sound data may include sound data that is linked to promoting two right-handed hits, and the production control CPU 120 may execute the sound data that is linked to promoting two right-handed hits once. . As a result, the BGM during the jackpot round that is output after the big right-hitting promotion effect is not overlaid with the sound of the mode corresponding to the promotion of right-handed hitting, and the player can smoothly hear the BGM during the jackpot round. can be heard.

(8) The light emitting means is constituted by a plurality of lamps, and emits the guide light in conjunction with the first guide display after all of the plurality of lamps are turned off (for example, Fig. 10-25 (c3) As shown in , after all the lamps of the frame lamp are once turned off, the frame lamp is turned on in a manner corresponding to the big right hit promotion effect).

Specifically, after all the lamps in the frame lamp are turned off, the frame lamp is turned on in a manner that corresponds to the big right hit promotion effect, so that the player is encouraged to hit right more easily and effectively. I can do it.

(9) The light emitting means emits the guide light in conjunction with the first guide display based on data defined by a lighting data table;
The lighting data table includes a parent table (for example, the parent table shown in FIG. 10-34) that defines the execution time of the guide light emission, and a child table (for example, the grandchild table that defines the data referred to by the light emitting means). , the child table shown in FIG. 10-35) and the grandchild table (for example, the child table shown in FIGS. 10-36 and 10-37).

Specifically, the game effect lamp 9 including the frame lamp specifies the execution time of the big right hit promotion effect by referring to the parent table, and specifies the grandchild table in which lighting data is specified by referring to the child table. It is specified and turned on/blinking/off by referring to the grandchild table. Thereby, the game effect lamp 9 can be efficiently lit in an appropriate lighting manner.

(10) Among the light emitting means, the grandchild table corresponding to the light emitting means that does not emit the guide light is not defined as the child table.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10-35, the lower left lamp 075F009D, upper attacker lamp 075F009U, and board left lamp 075F009E are not used in the big right-handed promotion effect and are turned off, so a grandchild table is provided. do not have. Thereby, the capacity of lighting data used in the ROM 121 can be reduced as much as possible.

(11) The guide means emits the guide light by sequentially moving the light emitting portion of the light emitting means in the direction in which the player shoots the game medium (for example, FIG. 10-25 to FIG. 10- As shown in 33, each lamp included in the frame lamp is turned on in order from the left side to the right side of the gaming area).

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 10-25 to 10-33, by lighting up each lamp included in the frame lamp in order from the left side to the right side of the gaming area, a big right-handed hit promotion effect is executed. By doing so, it is possible to urge the player to play right-handed in an easy-to-understand manner.

(12) The guide means emits the guide light while changing the color of the light emitted from the light emitting means (for example, a part that lights up a frame lamp in seven colors).

Specifically, since the frame lamp performs a big right-handed hit promotion effect while lighting up in seven colors, it is possible to more effectively encourage the player to play right-handed.

(13) The second guidance display is not affected by the switching display by fade-in and fade-out as the switching display of the background image performed in connection with the control of the advantageous state (for example, FIG. 10-38 (d1) ~ As shown in FIG. 10-39 (d4), the part where the image display corresponding to the small right hit promotion effect is continued without being affected by the switching display of the background image by fade-in and fade-out).

Specifically, as shown in Figures 10-38 (d1) to 10-39 (d4), the small right-handed hit promotion effect involves switching the background image by fade-in and fade-out when switching from the fanfare effect to the jackpot round. It continues without being affected by the display. Thereby, even if the fanfare performance is switched to the jackpot round by switching the display of the background image, the player can be encouraged to continue hitting the ball to the right.

(14) The second guide display is not affected by the display in the preview effect that suggests that the display result of the variable display will be the specific display result as the display of the effect image in the special state (for example, in FIG. -49 (as shown in g5), the part where the image display corresponding to the small right hit promotion effect is continued without being affected by the image display by the group preview effect).

Specifically, as shown in Figure 10-49 (g5), the small right hit promotion effect affects the display in the preview effect that suggests that a jackpot will occur in the variable probability state after the end of the jackpot advantageous state. continues without being affected. As a result, even if the visibility of the decorative pattern becomes difficult due to the execution of the preview effect, the arrow images and text images in the small right-handed promotion effect will continue to be displayed without hindering their visibility. The player can be encouraged to play right-handed.

(15) In the special state, when the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the corresponding sound is not output and the guide light is not emitted (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-50 (h2) So, in the case of consecutive winnings with 2 special symbols, no sound is output from speakers 8L and 8R in a manner that corresponds to the big right-handed promotion effect, and the frame lamp is in a manner that corresponds to the large right-handed promotion effect. parts that do not light up).

Specifically, as shown in Figure 10-50 (h2), in the case of consecutive winnings with 2 special symbols, the mode corresponding to the big right-handed promotion effect is from speakers 8L and 8R as in the case of the first winning. , the sound is not output, and the frame lamp does not light up in a manner that corresponds to the big right-handed hit promotion effect. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling bothered by the promotion of right-handed play being frequently emphasized.

[Modified example of characteristic part 075F]
A modification of the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the above-described feature section 075F will be explained.

(About turning off the lights before the execution of the big right-handed hit promotion performance)
In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10-25 (c3), after all the lamps in the frame lamp are once turned off, the frame lamp is turned on in a manner corresponding to the big right hit promotion effect. However, it is not limited to turning off all the lamps, and some of the lamps may be turned on. For example, the lamp that is lit first in the big right-handed driving promotion effect (in this example, the fourth lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L) may be lit. In this way, it is possible to clearly show the connection when the frame lamp is subsequently lit in a manner corresponding to the big right-handed hit promotion effect.

(About the switching display during the jackpot round)
In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10-38 (d1) to FIG. 10-39 (d4), as a switching display during the jackpot round, when switching from the fanfare performance to the jackpot round, fade-in and fade-out are used. Although switching display of background images has been illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as a switching display during the jackpot round, a production effect such as a whiteout in which a pure white screen is inserted between the fanfare production and the jackpot round, or a blackout in which a pure black screen is inserted may be used.

Further, the switching display during the jackpot round may be such that a BGM selection screen for selecting BGM (song) is displayed, and the background image is switched to a background image corresponding to the BGM selected by the BGM selection screen.

Further, the switching display during the jackpot round may be such that a mode selection screen for selecting a performance mode is displayed, and the background image is switched to a background image corresponding to the mode selected by the mode selection screen.

In either case, even if a special switching display is performed during the jackpot round, it is sufficient to ensure that the image display corresponding to the small right hit promotion performance is not affected.

(Regarding the display of the performance image in the probability change state after the jackpot game ball state)
In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10-49 (g5), as the display of the performance image in the probability change state after the jackpot game ball state, the image display based on the group preview performance is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, to display the performance image in the variable probability state after the jackpot game ball state, a whiteout effect that inserts a pure white screen during the reach effect, or a blackout effect that inserts a pure black screen may be used. You may use the effect of a pseudo-continuous notice that repeats the fluctuation and temporary stop of the decorative pattern multiple times, or you can make the visibility of the decorative pattern difficult by lighting or blinking the light guide plate provided on the front side of the game area. You may also use a production effect that makes you feel In any case, even if a special performance display is performed in a probability change state after a jackpot game ball state, it is sufficient to prevent the image display corresponding to the small right hit promotion performance from being affected.

(About the production aiming for V)
In this embodiment, the detection area of the V winning switch 075F024 after passing through the V grand prize opening provided inside the special variable winning ball device 075F007B is exemplified as the specific area, and as an effect of aiming for V, As shown in FIG. 10-43 (e13), an image pointing to the V large prize opening was displayed. However, the image display in the Aim for V effect, which is the third guide display using image display related to a specific area, is not limited to this, and the image display in the Aim for V effect does not only point to the V grand prize opening itself, but also refers to the vicinity of the V grand prize opening. Alternatively, it may refer to a route leading to the V-sized winning opening, for example, a lid portion that opens and closes the V-sized winning opening located upstream of the V-sized winning opening.

(About the promotion of big right-handed hits)
In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10-25 (c4) to FIG. 10-31 (c23), an arrow graphic image appears first, and then a text image of "Right hit!!" appears. However, it is not limited to this. For example, a text image of "Right hit!!" may appear first, and then a graphic image of an arrow may appear. In addition, the image display for promoting a large right-handed hit, which is an example of the first guidance display, is composed of an arrow image and a character image, whereas the image display for promoting a small right-handed hit, which is an example of the second guidance display, is composed of an arrow image and a character image. However, it may be composed of only arrow images or only character images.

(About advantageous conditions)
In this embodiment, the periods shown in FIG. 10-24 (c1) to FIG. 10-47 (f4) (periods from t3 in FIG. 10-20 to t16 in FIG. 10-21 are used as periods of "advantageous state" ), but the example is not limited to this. For example, the period of "advantageous state" is the period excluding the fanfare production period, that is, the period shown in Figure 10-39 (d3) to Figure 10-47 (f4) (from t4 in Figure 10-20 to Figure 10-21 (up to t16). Further, the fanfare performance and the big right hit promotion performance may be performed during a period in which a symbol in which a jackpot occurs is determined (symbol determination period).

(About the promotion of right-handed hitting in case of first hit)
In the present embodiment, in the case of a jackpot with one special figure, the speakers 8L and 8R output sound in a manner corresponding to the big right-handed driving promotion effect, and the frame lamp is outputted in a manner corresponding to the big right-handed hitting promotion effect. However, this is not limited to this. For example, depending on the type of jackpot in one special drawing, the aspects of the big right-hitting promotion effect of the speakers 8L, 8R and the frame lamp may be made different. For example, if the jackpot for one special drawing is a normal jackpot, the frame lamp lights up in a manner that corresponds to the big right-handed driving promotion effect, and the speakers 8L and 8R make sounds in a manner that corresponds to the big right-handed hit promotion effect. is not output, and if the jackpot for one special drawing is a variable jackpot, the frame lamp lights up in a manner that corresponds to the big right-handed hit promotion performance, and the speakers 8L and 8R respond to the big right-handed hit promotion performance. The sound may be output in different ways. In addition, if the jackpot for one special drawing is a normal jackpot, the frame lamp will not light up in a manner that corresponds to the big right-handed driving promotion effect, and the speakers 8L and 8R will not emit sound in a manner that corresponds to the big right-handed driving promotion effect. You may also choose not to output it.

(About the promotion of right-handed hitting in the case of consecutive winnings with 2 special drawings)
In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10-50 (h2), in the case of consecutive winnings with 2 special symbols, the speakers 8L and 8R output sound in a manner corresponding to the big right-handed promotion effect. Or, the frame lamp does not light up in a manner that corresponds to the big right-handed hit promotion effect, but the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, while the frame lamp lights up in a manner that corresponds to the presentation that promotes a big right-handed hit, the speakers 8L and 8R may not output sound in a manner that corresponds to the presentation that promotes a large right-handed hit.

Further, depending on the type of consecutive winnings in the special figure 2 winnings, the aspect of the big right-hitting promotion effect of the speakers 8L, 8R and the frame lamp may be changed. For example, if the jackpot for one special drawing is a normal jackpot, the frame lamp lights up in a manner that corresponds to the big right-handed driving promotion effect, and the speakers 8L and 8R make sounds in a manner that corresponds to the big right-handed hit promotion effect. is not output, and if the consecutive winnings on 2 special drawings are a guaranteed strange jackpot, the frame lamp lights up in a manner corresponding to the big right-handed promotion effect, and the speakers 8L and 8R display the big right-handed promotion effect. Sound may be output in a corresponding manner. In addition, if the consecutive winning of the special figure 2 is a normal jackpot, the frame lamp does not light up in a manner that corresponds to the big right-handed promotion effect, and the frame lamp does not light up in a manner that corresponds to the big right-handed promotion effect from speakers 8L and 8R. You may also choose not to output any sound. If the consecutive winnings on special drawings 2 are a guaranteed strange jackpot, unlike the first winning on special drawings 1, the frame lamp will appear in a special manner according to the big right-handed promotion effect (for example, gold, seven colors, etc.) ) may be turned on, or the speakers 8L and 8R may output sound in a special manner in accordance with the effect of promoting a big right-handed hit. Also, on the screen of the image display device 5, a big right-hitting promotion effect may be performed in a special manner (for example, a special character appears) that is different from the first hit for one special figure. .

(About the third information display)
In the present embodiment, as the third guide display using the image display regarding the specific area, an image pointing to the V big prize opening during the jackpot round in the variable probability jackpot is exemplified, but the invention is not limited to this. For example, as the third guidance display, an image may be displayed that prompts the player to shoot the game ball aiming at the second starting prize opening in the variable probability state after the end of the jackpot game state, or a variable winning ball may be displayed as the third guidance display. Displaying an image that prompts the player to shoot a game ball at the device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) may be applied. For example, after the ending performance is finished, the production control CPU 120 receives from the CPU 103 a pending memory number specification command (C2 series command), a background specification command (95 series command), a symbol variation specification command (8D series command), a display result command, etc. Based on the reception of the specified command (8C series command) and the variable pattern specification command (81 series command), an arrow image pointing to the second starting winning hole and the variable winning ball device 6B (normal electric accessory) is displayed along with the message "Aim!" ” may be displayed on the image display device 5. Even if such an image display is performed, the figures and character images in the small right-handed driving promotion effect may continue to be displayed.

(About time-saving state control by displaying losing symbols)
In each of the above-mentioned features and modifications, the transition to the time saving state (high base state) is always via the jackpot state or small win state in which the special variable winning ball device 7 or the special variable winning ball device 075F007A operates. Although the present invention is not limited to this, for example, when a time-saving symbol is derived and displayed as a special symbol, the special variable winning ball device 7 or the special variable winning ball device It is also possible to shift to the time saving state (high base state) without operating 075F007A.

In addition, as the above-mentioned time-saving symbols, these time-saving symbols may be part of the losing symbols or may be part of the small winning symbols.

In addition, when performing lottery processing related to the derivation display of time-saving symbols, the lottery may be performed using special random numbers for the time-saving symbol lottery, or lottery random numbers for losing symbols or jackpot symbols may be used for these lottery processing. The lottery may be performed using other random numbers for performing a lottery, such as a lottery random number for a small winning symbol, a random number for determining a jackpot lottery, or a lottery random number for a falling lottery.

Further, these time-saving symbols may be of a plurality of types, and may be used in combination with a combination of symbols displayed as other symbols such as small winning symbols and losing symbols. In this case, whether or not to shift to the time saving state may be determined based on the small winning symbols used together. However, when the time saving symbol is won, there is no further lottery to determine whether or not there will be a transition to the time saving state, nor to determine the number of time saving times.

In addition, when drawing a time-saving symbol, if the setting value can be changed, the lottery probability of the time-saving symbol does not change according to the setting value, that is, the lottery probability of the time-saving symbol at all setting values. are the same, but the lottery probabilities of these time-saving symbols may be different between the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

In addition, regarding the timing of obtaining random numbers when drawing time-saving symbols, whether using a special random number or another random number, the starting opening (first starting winning opening), It is sufficient to win at the time of winning in the second starting prize opening).

In addition, for winnings when drawing time-saving symbols, if special random numbers (time-saving random numbers) are used, the winning value is the lottery result using the dedicated random numbers (time-saving random numbers), and the small winning symbol is used in the time-saving symbol lottery. When using random numbers, the random number of a specific small winning symbol can be used as the winning value, and when the random number for the fall lottery judgment value is used for the time saving symbol lottery, the random number for the fall lottery judgment value can be used as the winning value. For example, a time-saving area may be provided inside the special variable prize winning ball device 7, and the passing of the game ball through the time-saving area may be regarded as a winning of the time-saving symbol.

In addition, when drawing time-saving symbols using structures, when the small winning symbol is used in conjunction with the time-saving symbol, the variable number of times the time-saving state is displayed (time-saving number) is set so that it does not change depending on whether or not the time-saving area is passed. Make it.

In addition, regarding winning when drawing a time-saving symbol, if a losing symbol random number is used in the time-saving symbol drawing, a specific losing symbol random number is used as the winning value, and if a jackpot symbol random number is used in the time-saving symbol drawing, a specific losing symbol random number is used as the winning value. The jackpot symbol random number value can be used as the winning value. However, if these random numbers are used as winning values, performance other than the jackpot probability will vary depending on the settings, so this is only possible if the set values cannot be changed.

Moreover, the determination timing of the lottery result of the time-saving symbol may be executed at the timing after the jackpot determination. In addition, no matter which random number the random number used for the lottery is, the time-saving symbol lottery is not executed in the time-saving state (high base) or in the high probability state, but only in the low probability low base state. . However, even if the time-saving symbol is derived and displayed in a time-saving state, the difference between resetting the time-saving number and not drawing a lottery may be determined for each gaming machine.

Further, the number of time saving times when the time saving symbols are derived and displayed can be a plurality of predetermined times depending on the winning value (symbol) and each gaming state. Further, the time saving granting conditions can be made different for each time saving symbol.

In addition, when the number of time-saving symbols differs depending on the time-saving symbol, the lottery for distributing the time-saving symbol can be changed between the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2.

Further, even when the same time-saving symbol is derived and displayed, the number of time-savings awarded may be different depending on the gaming state at that time. However, it is required that it be predetermined for the gaming state.

Moreover, a lottery result of "time saving number of times" can be included as a lottery result of a time saving symbol in a low probability low base state.

Alternatively, a lottery for deriving a time-saving end symbol (time-saving end lottery) may be executed, and the number of time-savings may be set as the number of times after the time-saving start until the time-saving end symbol is derived and displayed, or until a jackpot symbol is derived and displayed. In other words, the number of time reductions may not be set, but may be unlimited in principle.

Further, the number of times of time saving and the granting conditions may be different between the time saving state controlled by the time saving symbol and the time saving state controlled by the occurrence of a jackpot.

Further, when the time-saving symbol is derived and displayed, the timing at which the time-saving state is controlled is when the symbol confirmation time of the time-saving symbol has elapsed. However, in the case where a small winning symbol random number is used for the lottery of time saving symbols, and when the small winning is won and the time saving state is to be entered, the end of the small winning operation is the timing at which the time saving state is controlled.

Further, in the case of a lottery using a structure, the timing at which the time saving state is controlled is the timing at which the operation of the structure ends in a game state in which the structure is operated (for example, a small winning state).

In addition, in the case of a gaming machine that is controlled to a high probability low base state for a predetermined variable display number of times after hitting a jackpot (so-called fixed number fixed variable display machine (ST machine)), the high probability low base state is controlled when the gaming hall opens. After the high probability low base state is finished after variable display has been performed a predetermined number of times, the time saving state may be controlled.

In addition, when a time-saving limiter function is installed and a time-saving symbol is derived and displayed, the number of times of the time-saving limiter is updated. Further, the symbol confirmation time of the time saving symbol may be set to be a different time from the symbol confirmation time of other symbols.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to characteristic part 075F, in order for the gaming state to be controlled to the time-saving state, the game state must go through the jackpot gaming state, so in order to encourage the player to play right in the time-saving state. The big right hit promotion performance and the small right hit promotion performance could be performed during the fanfare performance performed when a jackpot occurs. However, if a losing symbol as described above is used as a time-saving symbol, the gaming state is controlled to the time-saving state without going through the jackpot gaming state. It is necessary to secure time for executing the large right-handed hit promotion performance and the small right-handed hit promotion performance from the time the symbol is displayed until the time-saving state is controlled. Therefore, a large right-handed hit promotion performance or a small right-handed hit promotion performance may be performed using the method described below.

For example, if the symbol confirmation time until the fluctuation of losing symbols that are not time-saving symbols stops is 0.5 seconds, the symbol confirmation time until the variation of losing symbols that are time-saving symbols stops is set to 30 seconds, which is longer than that. During this time, a time-saving fanfare effect may be executed to notify the start of the time-saving state control. In addition, in the display result specification command (8C series command), the CPU 103 uses, as a loss specification command, a display result specification command that indicates a normal loss variation to which no time saving is given, as well as a loss variation for time saving to which a time saving is given. It is sufficient to prepare a display result designation command indicating , and send the production control command to the production control CPU 120 by using both commands depending on whether or not it is a losing variation of the time saving symbol. Then, the performance control CPU 120 sets the symbol confirmation time to 0.5 seconds if it receives a display result designation command indicating a normal loss variation, and sets the symbol confirmation time to 0.5 seconds if it receives a display result designation command indicating a time-saving loss variation. may be set to 30 seconds.

The production control CPU 120 displays a name image indicating the name of the time-saving state (for example, "Time-saving RUSH") on the image display device 5 during the 30 seconds of the symbol confirmation time, and also displays the time-saving state control from the speakers 8L and 8R. A sound is output in a corresponding manner, and the game effect lamp 9 is turned on in a manner corresponding to the time saving state control. A part of such a time-saving fanfare performance can be made to correspond to a part of a fanfare performance as shown in FIG. 10-24 (c2).

As in the example shown in Figure 10-24 (c1), even before the name image ("Time-saving RUSH") created by this time-saving fanfare effect is displayed, an image congratulating the time-saving state (for example, "O ``Congratulations!!'' (character image) is displayed on the image display device 5, a sound congratulating the time-saving state is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a light is turned on to congratulate the time-saving state. The lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 may be changed to match the game effect lamp 9. In addition, as a small right-handed hitting promotion performance, a small right-handed hitting promotion performance is executed in which an image consisting of a figure (arrow indicating the right direction) and text (letters "right-handed hitting") is displayed in a small size at the upper right of the image display device 5, A sound that encourages right-handed hitting may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, or the lighting mode of right-handed hitting display section 075F030 and right-handed hitting display section 075F055 may be changed to a mode (lighting) that encourages right-handed hitting. Note that the image in the small right-handed driving promotion effect displayed on the upper right of the image display device 5 and the lighting of the right-handed hitting display section 075F030 and the right-handed hitting display section 075F055 start at the same timing and end at the same timing. That is, both encourage the player to play right-handed over the same period of time.

After that, similar to the example shown in Fig. 10-24 (c2), the small right hit promotion effect is continued while the name image ("Time Saving RUSH") by the time-saving fanfare effect is displayed, and then, After turning off the game effect lamp 9 once as in the example shown in (c3), the big right hit is promoted during the time-saving fanfare performance as in the examples shown in FIGS. 10-25 (c4) to 10-38 (c26). You may also perform a performance. During this time, the small right hit promotion effect continues to be executed. Then, after executing the large right-handed hitting promotion performance, the gaming state may be controlled to a time-saving state and the small right-handed hitting promotion performance may be continued, similarly to the examples shown in FIGS. 10-48 to 10-50.

In this way, even if the time-saving state is controlled due to a losing symbol, by securing a symbol confirmation time that is longer than the symbol confirmation time for a losing symbol that is not a time-saving symbol, it is possible to make a big difference in the symbol confirmation time. It is possible to perform a hitting promotion performance and a small right hitting promotion performance.

In addition, in the case where the time-saving state is controlled due to a losing symbol, it is not limited to the one that uses the symbol confirmation time to execute the large right-handed promotion performance or the small right-handed promotion production as described above, but also the loss pattern that gives time savings. If there is a pending memory corresponding to a loss for playing the next game (variation) after the game in which the symbols have been determined, in the next game (variation), a time-saving fanfare performance is executed, as well as a large right hit promotion performance and a small right strike promotion performance. A hitting promotion performance may also be performed. Specifically, if the next game (variation) after a game in which a losing pattern has been confirmed is a losing variation, a time-saving fanfare production is performed instead of executing a production that makes you expect a hit such as a reach production or a preview production. At the same time as this, a large right-handed hit promotion performance or a small right-handed hit promotion performance may be executed. However, if the next game (variation) after the game in which the losing symbols have been determined is a jackpot, then the fanfare performance as shown in FIG. 10-24 (c1) is executed, so the time-saving fanfare performance is not executed.

On the other hand, if there is no pending memory for playing the next game (variation) after the game in which the losing symbol with time saving is confirmed, the time saving fanfare performance is executed with the symbol not changing, and the big right hit promotion performance and the small A right-handed hitting promotion performance may also be performed. However, in this case, in order to prevent the customer waiting demonstration performance from being executed and hindering the time-saving fanfare performance, the CPU 103 does not send the customer waiting demonstration designation command (9F series command) to the performance control CPU 120. . Alternatively, even if the customer waiting demonstration designation command (9F series command) is received from the CPU 103, the performance control CPU 120 may execute the time-saving fanfare performance without executing the customer waiting demonstration performance.

(Explanation regarding association of characteristic parts)
Each configuration related to a characteristic part may be combined with a part or all of each configuration related to other characteristic parts as appropriate. Features combined in this way, or individual features that are not combined, may be combined with some or all of the configurations of other features, as appropriate.

The embodiments disclosed this time should be considered to be illustrative in all respects and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the claims rather than the above description, and it is intended that all changes within the meaning and range equivalent to the claims are included.

The present invention is not limited to what has been described above. In addition, the specific configuration is included in the present invention, in addition to the above-described embodiments and other embodiments described below, even if there are changes or additions within the scope of the present invention.

Further, all or some of the configurations shown in the embodiment and each modification example described above, and the configurations shown in the embodiment example and each modification example described below may be combined arbitrarily.

It should be noted that the above-described embodiments and the later-described embodiments disclosed this time are illustrative in all respects and should not be considered restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the claims rather than the above description and the following description, and it is intended that all changes within the meaning and scope equivalent to the claims are included.

In addition, the gaming machine of the present invention is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result,
a firing means capable of firing a game medium into a game area according to a player's operation;
A guidance display that uses an image display to prompt the player to launch the gaming medium toward the second downstream path of the first downstream path and the second downstream path through which the gaming medium can flow down in the gaming area. and a guide display means for
The guide display includes a first guide display and a second guide display,
The guide display means includes:
During a predetermined period after the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, before the display of the name of the advantageous state is completed, which is part of the start effect to notify the start of control of the advantageous state, performing a second guidance display, and after completing the display of the name of the advantageous state, performing the first guidance display and continuing the second guidance display;
Continuing the second guidance display while ending the first guidance display in a period after the predetermined period;
Continuing the second guidance display in the special state after the control of the advantageous state has ended;
moreover,
The display means is capable of moving and displaying the pseudo movable body display from a first display position to a second display position different from the first display position,
a movable body that is movable from a first position to a second position different from the first position;
A performance execution means capable of performing the performance,
Equipped with
The performance execution means is
a pseudo movable body display effect that moves and displays the pseudo movable body display from the first display position to the second display position;
a movable body effect that moves the movable body from the first position to the second position;
is executable,
It is better to perform the movable body performance and the pseudo movable body display performance in a predetermined period by the performance execution means, and to display the pseudo movable body without executing the movable body performance in the predetermined period. An example is a gaming machine that is controlled to the advantageous state at a higher rate than when the body display performance is executed.

According to this feature, it is possible to suitably execute an instruction urging the player to shoot the game ball in a predetermined direction. Furthermore, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the fact that the movable body effect and the pseudo movable body display effect are executed.

In other words, during a predetermined period after the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result, the instruction to launch the game ball in a predetermined direction is emphasized on the first guide display and the second guide display, and after that, the first guide display is By instructing to shoot the game ball in a predetermined direction by taking over the second guidance display without taking over, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience by not emphasizing the instruction too much, and also to display the second guidance display first. and modestly instruct the player to launch the game ball in a predetermined direction, then have the player recognize the name of the advantageous state, and after having the player recognize it, use the first guidance display to firmly instruct the player to launch the game ball in a predetermined direction. In addition, since the player pays attention to the performance in anticipation of the execution of the movable body performance when the pseudo movable body display performance is executed, the interest of the performance can be improved. In other words, it is possible to provide a game machine that, when installed in a game parlor, can easily give instructions on the direction in which game balls should be fired in an advantageous state to the player, attracting the player's interest, and easily improving the interest of the performance.

Further, even when a pseudo movable object effect is executed, it is preferable to display it so as not to overlap with the guidance display. By doing so, more suitable performance can be executed while informing the player of accurate information, thereby increasing the player's interest.

Further, as an example of a form of a gaming machine that can draw the player's attention to the execution of the pseudo movable object display effect, a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player,
Display means capable of moving and displaying a pseudo movable body display from a first display position to a second display position different from the first display position;
a movable body that is movable from a first position to a second position different from the first position;
A performance execution means capable of performing the performance,
Equipped with
The performance execution means is
a pseudo movable body display effect that moves and displays the pseudo movable body display from the first display position to the second display position;
a movable body effect that moves the movable body from the first position to the second position;
is executable,
It is better to perform the movable body performance and the pseudo movable body display performance in a predetermined period by the performance execution means, and to display the pseudo movable body without executing the movable body performance in the predetermined period. An example is a gaming machine that is controlled to the advantageous state at a higher rate than when the body display performance is executed. An example of the form of this gaming machine will be explained below as another example of the form.

(Other form examples)

DESCRIPTION OF THE PREFERRED EMBODIMENTS A mode for implementing a gaming machine according to the present invention will be explained below based on the drawings.

(Characteristic part 241SG form)
Type 1 gaming machine is
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of playing games,
Display means capable of moving and displaying a pseudo movable body display from a first display position to a second display position different from the first display position (for example, the performance control CPU 120 displays the first pseudo movable body display on the image display device 5) (a part that can be displayed by moving Z100 from the first initial display position to the first effect display position);
A movable body that is movable from a first position to a second position different from the first position (for example, a mounted movable body 32 that is movable from an origin position to a production position);
Equipped with
The direction in which the pseudo movable body display moves and displays from the first display position to the second display position and the direction in which the movable body moves from the first position to the second position are the same direction ( For example, the direction in which the first pseudo movable body display Z100 moves from the first initial display position to the first effect display position and the direction in which the mounted movable body 32 moves from the origin position to the effect position are the same downward direction),
The movement of the pseudo movable body display from the first display position to the second display position is faster than the movement of the movable body from the first position to the second position (for example, the first pseudo The movement amount L2 of the movable object display Z100 per unit time TL2 is larger than the movement amount L1A per unit time TL2 of the mounted movable object 32 (see FIG. 14-37),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by displaying the pseudo movable body, it is possible to perform an impactful performance that is faster than the movement of the movable body, thereby surprising the player.

Type 2 gaming machine is
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of playing games,
Equipped with a display means capable of displaying a pseudo movable body display (for example, a portion where the performance control CPU 120 can display the first pseudo movable body display Z100 on the image display device 5),
The pseudo movable body display causes a reaction movement of a predetermined amount of movement when it moves from a first position (for example, a first origin position) to a second position (for example, a first presentation position) different from the first position. It is a display imitating a movable body (for example, the first non-mounted movable body M100) to be carried out,
The display means can move and display the pseudo movable body display from a first display position corresponding to the first position to a second display position corresponding to the second position (for example, the effect control CPU 120 On the display device 5, the first pseudo movable body display Z100 can be displayed moving in the vertical direction between a first initial display position corresponding to the first origin position and a first effect display position corresponding to the first effect position. some part),
The pseudo-movable body display displays a reaction movement of a specific amount of movement when moved from the first display position to the second display position (for example, the performance control CPU 120 displays the first pseudo-movable body display Z100). (a part that displays a reaction action (bounce display) of a predetermined movement amount when moving and displaying from the first initial display position to the first effect display position and stopping and displaying at the first effect display position),
The specific movement amount is larger than the predetermined movement amount (for example, the first pseudo movable object display Z100 is moved and displayed from the first initial display position to the first effect display position). The movement amount L12 of the reaction action display is larger than the movement amount L13 of the first reaction action display performed when the first non-mounted movable body M100 moves and displays from the first origin position to the first presentation position. (see Figure 14-38),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by displaying a pseudo-movable object, it is possible to simulate the same effect as a movable object without installing a movable object, and it is also possible to simulate the reaction that occurs when the movable object moves to the second position. By displaying the motion in an exaggerated manner, it is possible to provide a performance that leaves a lasting impression on the player.

Type 3 gaming machine is
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
Display means capable of moving and displaying a pseudo movable body display from a first display position to a second display position different from the first display position (for example, the performance control CPU 120 displays the first pseudo movable body display on the image display device 5) (a part that can be displayed by moving Z100 from the first initial display position to the first effect display position);
A movable body that is movable from a first position to a second position different from the first position (for example, a mounted movable body 32 that is movable from an origin position to a production position);
A performance execution means (for example, performance control CPU 120) capable of executing the performance,
Equipped with
The performance execution means is
A pseudo movable body display effect that moves and displays the pseudo movable body display from the first display position to the second display position (for example, the effect control CPU 120 moves the first pseudo movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the second display position). (portion that can be moved and displayed in one direction display position),
a movable body performance that moves the movable body from the first position to the second position (for example, a portion where the performance control CPU 120 can move the mounted movable body 32 from the origin position to the performance position);
is executable,
It is better to perform the movable body performance and the pseudo movable body display performance in a predetermined period by the performance execution means, and to display the pseudo movable body without executing the movable body performance in the predetermined period. The rate of control to the advantageous state is higher than when the body display performance is executed (for example, during the variable display period of the symbol based on the variation pattern of super reach β or super reach γ, development using the mounted movable body 32 When the performance A and the developed performance B using the second pseudo movable body display Z200 are executed, the control is made into a jackpot game state than when the developed performance B is executed without the developed performance A being executed. (expectation of jackpot) is high (see Figure 14-11),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the fact that the movable body effect and the pseudo movable body display effect are being executed.

Type 4 gaming machine is
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
A display means capable of moving and displaying a pseudo movable body display from a first display position to a second display position different from the first display position (for example, the performance control CPU 120 displays a second pseudo movable body display on the image display device 5). (a part that can be displayed by moving the Z200 from the first specific initial display position to the first specific effect display position);
A performance execution means (for example, performance control CPU 120) capable of executing the performance,
Equipped with
The performance execution means is
A special suggestion performance that suggests that the pseudo movable body display will be controlled to the advantageous state by displaying the pseudo movable object display (for example, a preview performance A that foretells the possibility (expectation level) that the variable display result will be a jackpot);
A notification performance that notifies players of content that is advantageous to the player (for example, development performance B that notifies that the game will develop into a strong super reach performance);
A predetermined effect (for example, development effect B) that is executed before the notification effect and indicates that the notification effect is to be executed by displaying a notification-related image (for example, character image Z310) related to the notification effect. development suggestion that suggests the possibility of implementation), and
is executable,
In the predetermined effect, the pseudo movable body display is displayed in one of a plurality of modes (for example, patterns PS-1 to PS1-4) in which the degree of expectation for the notification effect to be executed differs;
The display means is
In the special suggestion effect, the pseudo movable body display is moved and displayed from the first display position to the second display position, and then moved and displayed from the second display position to the first display position, and then hidden ( (See Figures 14-25 (C) to (F)),
In the predetermined effect, after displaying the pseudo movable object display at the second display position, the pseudo movable body display is hidden without moving from the second display position to the first display position (Fig. 14-26 (A ) to (J), see Figure 14-27 (A)),
Before executing the notification effect and when hiding the pseudo movable body display displayed at the second display position, the notification related image (for example, Character image Z310) can be displayed (see FIGS. 14-26(F) to (J), FIG. 14-27(A)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in the special suggestion performance, the pseudo-movable object display moves in the same way as the movable object as a structure, so attention is paid to whether it can be controlled to an advantageous state without giving the player a sense of discomfort. On the other hand, in the predetermined effect, the pseudo movable object display prioritizes the display of the notification-related image over moving and displaying it in the same way as the movable object, without returning from the second display position to the first display position. Since it is not displayed, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the suggestion of execution of the notification effect.

Type 5 gaming machine is
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
A display means capable of moving and displaying a pseudo movable body display from a first display position to a second display position different from the first display position (for example, the performance control CPU 120 moves the first pseudo movable body display Z100 to a first initial display) (a part that can be moved and displayed from the position to the first effect display position, a part that can be displayed by moving the second pseudo movable body display Z200 from the first specific initial display position to the first specific effect display position on the image display device 5) ,
A performance execution means (for example, performance control CPU 120) capable of executing the performance,
Equipped with
The performance execution means is
a special performance that notifies that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (for example, a decision performance that notifies whether or not the game will be controlled to the jackpot gaming state);
A specific performance that suggests that the special performance will be executed before the special performance is executed (for example, a development performance B that notifies that the final performance will be executed after developing into a strong super reach performance);
is executable,
The display means is
The pseudo movable body display can be displayed in a moving manner in the specific performance and the special performance,
When moving and displaying the pseudo movable body display in the specific performance, after moving and displaying the pseudo movable body display from the first display position to the second display position, the display moves from the second display position to the first display. The image is hidden without being moved to the position and displayed, and a suggestive image suggesting execution of the special effect (for example, the mode at the start of display of the reach title image Z51) is displayed in the display area including the second display position. It is possible (see Figure 14-27 (B) (D) to (F)),
When moving and displaying the pseudo movable body display in the special performance, after moving and displaying the pseudo movable body display from the first display position to the second display position, the display moves from the second display position to the first display. move to a certain position and display it, then hide it (see Figures 14-30 (A) to (F)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, before the special effect is executed, the pseudo movable object display prioritizes the display of the suggestive image over moving and displaying it in the same way as a movable object as a structure, and moves from the second display position to Since it is hidden without returning to the 1 display position, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the suggestion that the special effect is to be executed. On the other hand, in the special effect, the pseudo movable object display is displayed moving in the same way as the movable object. , it is possible to draw attention to the information that is advantageous to the player without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Form 6 gaming machine is
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of playing games,
Display means capable of moving and displaying the pseudo movable body display from a first display position to a second display position different from the first display position (for example, the performance control CPU 120 moves the first pseudo movable body display Z100 to the first initial display) (a part that can be moved and displayed from the position to the first production display position),
The display means is
moving and displaying the pseudo movable object display from the first display position to the second display position via an intermediate display position (for example, a first intermediate display position);
Movement display of the pseudo movable body display from the first display position to the second display position is performed in the order of the first display position, the intermediate display position, and the second display position for each display frame (Fig. 14-40 (A) to (C)),
In a display area including the first display position, the intermediate display position, and the second display position, a specific image that emphasizes the moving display of the pseudo movable object display (for example, an image showing a plurality of broken glass pieces due to cracked glass) It is possible to display an effect image Z71) in which Z71A is scattered (see Figure 14-31),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the pseudo movable object display can be displayed moving quickly without reducing visibility, and by emphasizing the moving display with a specific image, it is possible to give a favorable impression of the moving display to the player. can.

Type 7 gaming machine is
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
Display means capable of displaying a pseudo movable body display including a first pseudo movable body display and a second pseudo movable body display different from the first pseudo movable body display (for example, the performance control CPU 120 Moving the display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first effect display position and moving the second pseudo movable object display Z200 from the first specific initial display position to the first specific effect display position on the image display device 5. (a movable and displayable part),
The first pseudo movable body display can be moved and displayed from a first display position to a second display position different from the first display position (see FIG. 14-16(B)),
The second pseudo movable object display can be moved and displayed from a first predetermined display position to a second predetermined display position different from the first predetermined display position (see FIG. 14-16(C));
The display means is
The first pseudo movable body display is moved and displayed from the first display position to the second display position via an intermediate display position (for example, a first intermediate display position) (see FIGS. 14-40 (A) to (C)). ),
A movement display of the first pseudo-movable body display from the first display position to the second display position is performed in the order of the first display position, the intermediate display position, and the second display position for each display frame. (See Figures 14-40 (A) to (C)),
Display of movement of the first pseudo movable body display from the first display position to the second display position; and Display of movement of the second pseudo movable body display from the first predetermined display position to the second predetermined display position. (For example, the movement display from the first initial display position of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 to the first effect display position is faster than the movement display from the first specific initial display position of the second pseudo movable body display Z200.) faster than the movement display from to the first specific effect display position (see Figure 14-40),
When the first pseudo movable object display is moved and displayed from the first display position to the second display position, and when the second pseudo movable object display is moved from the first predetermined display position to the second predetermined display position. The rate at which the advantageous state is controlled differs depending on when it is displayed (for example, in preview performance B, a pattern in which the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed from the first initial display position to the first performance display position) When PBY-3 or the pattern PBY-4 that is moved and displayed from the second initial display position to the second effect display position is executed, the second pseudo movable object display Z200 is moved from the second specific initial display position to the second intermediate effect. The rate at which the jackpot gaming state is controlled (jackpot expectation level) differs depending on when the pattern PBY-1 that is moved and displayed at the display position or the pattern PBY-2 that is moved and displayed at the second specific effect display position is executed. (See Figure 14-10, Figure 14-20 (B)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention to which of the first pseudo movable body display and the second pseudo movable body display is displayed in a moving manner, and the first pseudo movable body display has a different ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state. The player can recognize the movable body display and the second pseudo movable body display by the difference in speed of the moving display.

The gaming machine of Form 8 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 7,
A movable body (for example, a first non-mounted movable body M100) that is movable from a first position (for example, a first origin position) to a second position (for example, a first production position) different from the first position,
When the movable body is moved from the first position to the second position, a reaction movement of a certain amount of movement is performed (see FIG. 14-36);
When the pseudo movable body display is moved and displayed from the first display position to the second display position, a reaction movement display of a specific movement amount is performed (see FIG. 14-36);
The specific amount of movement is larger than the certain amount of movement (for example, the first pseudo movable object display Z100 is moved and displayed from the first initial display position to the first effect display position). The movement amount L12 of the reaction action display is larger than the movement amount L13 of the first reaction action display performed when the first non-mounted movable body M100 moves and displays from the first origin position to the first presentation position. (see Figure 14-38),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by displaying a pseudo movable object, it is possible to simulate the same effect as a movable object without installing a movable object, and also to reduce the reaction that occurs when the movable object moves to the second position. By displaying the motion in an exaggerated manner, it is possible to provide a performance that leaves a lasting impression on the player.

The gaming machine of Form 9 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 8,
A movable body (for example, a mounted movable body 32) that can be moved from a first position (for example, the origin position) to a second position (for example, a production position) different from the first position,
The distance from the first display position to the second display position (e.g. movement display distance L2) is longer than the distance from the first position to the second position (e.g. movement distance L1) (Fig. 14-16),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the pseudo movable object display has a faster moving speed and a longer moving distance than the movable object, it is possible to provide a performance that leaves a lasting impression on the player.

The gaming machine of Form 10 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 9,
The pseudo movable body display includes a performance display section (for example, performance display section Z100A, Z200A) and a mechanism display section (for example, mechanism display section Z100B, Z200B),
In the moving display of the pseudo movable body display, the mechanism display section reaches the second display position before the effect display section (see FIGS. 14-36 (B1) and (B2));
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the pseudo movable object display can be displayed moving in a more realistic manner.

The gaming machine of Form 11 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 10,
The movement display of the pseudo movable body display from the first display position to the second display position is faster than the movement display from the second display position to the first display position (for example, the movement display of the pseudo movable object display from the first display position to the first display position is faster) The movement amount L2 of the body display Z100 per unit time TL2 is larger than the movement amount L1A of the mounted movable body 32 per unit time TL2 (see FIG. 14-37),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the pseudo movable object display can be displayed moving in a more realistic manner.

The gaming machine of Form 12 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 11,
The movement period of the movable body between the first position and the second position includes a first period in which the speed increases and a second period in which the speed decreases (Fig. 14-39 (A )reference),
The moving display period of the pseudo movable object display does not include the first period and the second period (see FIG. 14-39(B));
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the moving display of the pseudo movable object display can be performed more smoothly than the movement of the movable object.

The gaming machine of Form 13 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 12,
The pseudo movable object display includes a light emitting display section (for example, light emitting display sections Z108A, Z208A to Z208E),
The display means is capable of displaying the light-emitting display section by emitting light when the pseudo-movable object display is moved to the second display position (the effect control CPU 120 moves the first pseudo-movable object display Z100 to the first display position). After moving to the production position and displaying it, the part that executes the light emission of the mounted movable body LED 208 and the light emission display of the light emission display part Z108A at almost the same cycle (see Fig. 14-31 (D)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the pseudo movable object display moved to the second display position.

The gaming machine of Form 14 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 13,
The pseudo movable object display includes a light emitting display section (for example, light emitting display sections Z108A, Z208A to Z208E),
The display means does not display the light emitting display section when moving and displaying the pseudo movable body display (see FIG. 14-31);
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by not highlighting the (incomplete) pseudo-movable object display during the moving display, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the presentation effect.

The gaming machine of Form 15 is the gaming machine described in Form 13 or Form 14,
The movable body includes a light emitting section capable of emitting light (for example, light emitting display sections Z108A, Z208A to Z208E),
When the pseudo movable object display is moved to the second display position, the display means performs a light emission display of the light emission display section in a manner common to the light emission of the light emission section (the effect control CPU 120 After moving and displaying the first pseudo movable body display Z100 to the first effect position, the part where the light emission of the mounted movable body LED 208 and the light emission display of the light emission display section Z108A are executed at almost the same cycle.See Figure 14-31 (D). ),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the pseudo movable object display can be displayed moving in a more realistic manner.

The gaming machine of Form 16 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 17,
The display means can move and display the pseudo movable body display from a first special display position to a second special display position different from the first special display position (for example, the performance control CPU 120 (portion where the body display Z200 can be moved and displayed from the second specific initial display position to the second intermediate effect display position or the second specific effect display position),
a direction in which the pseudo movable body display moves and displays from the first display position to the second display position; a direction in which the pseudo movable body display moves and displays from the first special display position to the second special display position; are different directions (for example, the downward direction in which the performance control CPU 120 moves and displays the second pseudo movable body display Z200 from the first specific initial display position to the first specific performance display position in the preview performance A, and the downward direction in which the performance control CPU 120 moves and displays the second pseudo movable object display Z200 in the preview performance A), and This is different from the right direction in which the second pseudo movable object display Z200 is moved and displayed from the second specific initial display position to the second specific effect display position (see FIG. 14-33),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since one pseudo movable body display can be moved and displayed from a plurality of display positions, it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected performance that is difficult to realize with a movable body.

The gaming machine of Form 17 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 16,
The display means moves and displays the pseudo movable body display from the first display position to the second display position, and then moves the pseudo movable body display from the first display position to the second display position in a direction different from the direction in which it is moved and displayed. Can be displayed movingly (see Figure 14-43),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide players with unexpected performances that are difficult to achieve with movable objects.

FIG. 11 shows an example of the configuration of the display result determination table. FIG. 11(A) shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the first special symbol used when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, and FIG. 11(B) shows a configuration example of the first special symbol display result determination table used when the variable special symbol is the second A configuration example of a second special figure display result determination table used in the case of a figure is shown. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101. In the display result determination table, the hit determination value compared with the random value MR1 is assigned to the special symbol display result, which is a variable display result of the special symbol, according to the set value. The random number value MR1 is a random number value for determining the display result, and the value is randomly updated in the range of 0 to 65535. As the display result determination table, a common display result determination table may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

As shown in FIG. 11(A), when the variable special figure is the first special figure, if the setting value is 1 and the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, it is in the range of 0 to 65535. It is a numerical value that can take a value, and among the hit judgment values that are compared with the random number MR1 for judging the special figure display result, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "jackpot", and 65317 to 65535 are assigned to "time saving". Other numerical ranges are assigned as "outliers". In addition, if the setting value is 1 and the gaming state is variable probability, of the hit determination values mentioned above, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "jackpot", and the other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". Assigned. In addition, the case where the setting value of the first variable special figure is 2 to 6 and the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state is as shown in FIG. 11(A).

As shown in FIG. 11(B), when the variable special figure is the second special figure, if the setting value is 1 and the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, it is in the range of 0 to 65535. It is a numerical value that can take a value, and among the hit judgment values that are compared with the random number MR1 for judging the special figure display result, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "jackpot", and 65317 to 65425 are assigned to "time saving". Other numerical ranges are assigned as "outliers". In addition, if the setting value is 1 and the gaming state is variable probability, of the hit determination values mentioned above, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "jackpot", and the other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". Assigned. Incidentally, the case where the set value of the second variable special figure is 2 to 6 and the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state is as shown in FIG. 11(B).

Here, if we pay attention to the numerical range of the hit judgment value assigned to "Jackpot" and "Time-saving loss" in each display result judgment table, as shown in Fig. 12, when the gaming state is normal state or time-saving state In the first special figure display result determination table, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit determination values is set as a common numerical range of jackpot determination values for determining a jackpot regardless of the set value.

In addition, when the setting value is 1, only the common numerical range of jackpot determination values for determining jackpots is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to "jackpot"), while setting value 2 ~ In the case of the setting value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each setting value from 1238 is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot judgment value is the range of 1238 to 1253 for setting value 2, the range of 1238 to 1272 for setting value 3, the range of 1238 to 1292 for setting value 4, and the range of 1238 to 1317 for setting value 5. , the setting value 6 is set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively.

In other words, in the first special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, if the setting value is 1, the common hit determination value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535 is selected. Only numbers within the numerical range (1020-1237) are assigned to the "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, the non-common numerical range is added to the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment values. Numbers within the range are assigned a "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical value range increases from 1238 as the set value increases.

For this reason, the jackpot probability is set at 1020 as the standard value for the jackpot determination value (jackpot standard value), and as the set value increases, the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases, so the jackpot probability increases. go.

Furthermore, in the display result determination table for the first special figure when the gaming state is the normal state or the time-saving state, the range from 65317 to 65535 among the winning determination values determines whether the time-saving win or loss occurs regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the time saving judgment value. If we pay attention to the case where the setting value is 6, as mentioned above, 1020 to 1346 of the hit judgment values are set in the numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, and there is also a time saving function. The loss judgment value is in the range of 65317 to 65535, with 65317 as the reference value for loss with time saver (loss reference value with time saver), in a numerical range different from the jackpot judgment value range (1020 to 1346) of the setting value 6. This setting prevents the numerical range of the time saving loss judgment value from overlapping with the range of the jackpot judgment value which changes according to each set value.

In addition, in the first special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is in a variable probability state, the range from 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination values is the jackpot determination value for determining a jackpot regardless of the setting value. It is set to a common numerical range.

When the setting value is 1, only the common numerical range of jackpot judgment values for determining jackpots is set (1020 to 1346 are assigned to "jackpot"), while setting value 2 to setting In the case of the value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1347 is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot judgment value is the range of 1347 to 1383 for setting value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for setting value 3, the range of 1347 to 1487 for setting value 4, and the range of 1347 to 1556 for setting value 5. , and the setting value 6 is set in the range of 1347 to 1674.

In other words, in the first special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is variable probability state, when the set value is 1, among the hit determination values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535, the common numerical range ( 1020 to 1346) are assigned to the "jackpot", but if the set value is 2 or more, the jackpot judgment value within the range of the common numerical value range plus the non-common numerical range A numerical value is assigned to a “jackpot.” Furthermore, the non-common numerical value range increases from 1347 as the set value increases.

For this reason, the jackpot probability is set at 1020 as the standard value for the jackpot determination value (jackpot standard value), and as the set value increases, the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases, so the jackpot probability increases. go.

In the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 1020 to 1237 among the hit determination values is the jackpot determination value for determining a jackpot regardless of the set value. is set to a common numerical range.

In addition, when the setting value is 1, only the common numerical range of jackpot determination values for determining jackpots is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to "jackpot"), while setting value 2 ~ In the case of the setting value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each setting value from 1238 is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot judgment value is the range of 1238 to 1253 for setting value 2, the range of 1238 to 1272 for setting value 3, the range of 1238 to 1292 for setting value 4, and the range of 1238 to 1317 for setting value 5. , the setting value 6 is set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively.

In other words, in this pachinko game machine 1, when the setting value is 1 in the second special symbol display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the value can be taken in the range of 0 to 65535. Among the hit judgment values, only the numbers within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to the "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment values is assigned. Numerical values within the range plus the non-common numerical value range are assigned to the "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical value range increases from 1238 as the set value increases.

For this reason, the jackpot probability is set at 1020 as the standard value for the jackpot determination value (jackpot standard value), and as the set value increases, the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases, so the jackpot probability increases. go.

Furthermore, in the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time-saving state, the range from 65317 to 65425 among the winning determination values determines whether the time-saving win or loss occurs regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the time saving judgment value. If we pay attention to the case where the setting value is 6, as mentioned above, 1020 to 1346 of the hit judgment values are set in the numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, and there is also a time saving function. The loss judgment value is in the range of 65317 to 65425, with 65317 as the reference value for loss with time saver (loss reference value with time saver), in a numerical range different from the jackpot judgment value range (1020 to 1346) of the setting value 6. This setting prevents the numerical range of the time saving loss judgment value from overlapping with the range of the jackpot judgment value which changes according to each set value.

In the display result determination table for the second special figure when the gaming state is in a variable probability state, the range from 1020 to 1346 among the hit determination values is the common numerical value of the jackpot determination value for determining a jackpot regardless of the set value. The range is set. The characteristics of the other second special figure display result determination table are the same as the first special figure display result determination table.

As mentioned above, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, regardless of the setting value, 65317 to When the range of 65535 is set to the common numerical range with and without time saving, and the variable special symbol is the second special symbol, the setting value will be changed in both the normal state and the time saving state. Regardless, the range of 65317 to 65425 is set as a common numerical range with and without time saving. In other words, when the gaming state is normal and when the time-saving state is set, the rate at which the variable display result is a loss with time-saving is the same for all setting values, so depending on the setting value, the gambling can be prevented from becoming excessively high. Furthermore, regarding the time saving error, which is assigned a common judgment value number for each setting value, all setting values are set in a continuous numerical range from 65317, which is the reference value for the time saving error, so the display is variable. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load on the CPU 103 related to determining whether the result is a time saving or not.

In addition, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, the settable setting values are six from 1 to 6, but the setting values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be 5 or less or 7 or more. . Furthermore, the smaller the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the more advantageous it may be to the player.

The jackpot type may be determined at different ratios depending on the setting value based on the allocation of judgment values in the jackpot type judgment table. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined by a common ratio regardless of the setting value. The variation pattern may be determined at different rates depending on the set value, based on the allocation of determination values in the variation pattern determination table. Alternatively, the variation pattern may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The setting value may be suggested by the frequency with which normal reach and super reach are performed by varying the execution rate of normal reach and super reach depending on the setting value. Alternatively, the execution rate of normal reach and super reach may be the same regardless of the setting value. In addition, it may be possible to perform arbitrary setting suggestion effects at different rates depending on the setting value.

FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 9 as the production control process process. In the performance control process shown in FIG. 13, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a pre-read notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-read preview setting process, for example, based on the performance control command at the time of start-up winning that is transmitted from the main board 11, determination, determination, setting, etc. for executing the pre-read preview performance are performed. Further, processing for displaying a pending display is executed based on the number of pending memories specified from the production control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the production control CPU 120 selects and executes any of the following processes of steps S170 to S90175, depending on the value of the production process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command specifying the start of variable display has been received from the main board 11. Contains such as. When it is determined to start variable display of decorative symbols on the image display device 5, the value of the production process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is ended.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and fluctuation pattern specified by the production control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern, the reach effect, etc. It determines whether or not various performances such as preview performances are to be executed, their mode, execution start timing, and the like. Then, a performance control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the performance) that reflects the determination result etc. is set. Thereafter, based on the set performance control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start executing the variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is ended. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of decorative symbols in response to an instruction to start variable display of decorative symbols.

The variable display effect processing in step S172 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display performance process, the performance control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display a performance image based on the performance control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , driving the mounted movable body 32 , outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the audio control board 13 to output audio and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R, and commands to the lamp control board 14 (illumination signal) Various performance controls are executed during variable display of decorative patterns, such as lighting/extinguishing/flashing the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs by the output. After performing such performance control, for example, a termination code indicating the end of the variable display of decorative patterns has been read from the performance control pattern, or a command has been received from the main board 11 specifying that fixed decorative patterns should be stopped and displayed. In response to what has been done, etc., the determined decorative pattern that becomes the display result of the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, the value of the production process flag is updated to "3", and the variable display production process is completed.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "3". In this special figure winning waiting process, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not a performance control command has been received from the main board 11 that designates starting a jackpot game state. Then, when receiving a production control command specifying to start a jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is updated to "4". In addition, if the waiting time for receiving the command elapses without receiving a command specifying the start of the jackpot game state, the display result in the special figure game is determined to be a "loss", and the presentation process flag is flagged. The value of is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the production process flag is updated, the waiting process for each special figure ends.

The jackpot performance process in step S90174 is a process that is executed when the value of the performance process flag is "6". In this jackpot performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the jackpot game state, and executes various performance controls in the jackpot game state based on the set content. In addition, in the jackpot production process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify ending the jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "5", which is a value corresponding to the ending production process. ” and ends the jackpot performance process.

The ending effect processing in step S90175 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending performance processing, the performance control CPU 120 sets a performance control pattern corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, for example, and performs various performance controls of the ending performance at the end of the jackpot game state based on the setting contents. Execute. Thereafter, the value of the production process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending production process is ended.

(Variation of basic explanation)
This invention is not limited to the pachinko game machine 1 explained in the basic explanation above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described above is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as prizes based on the occurrence of a winning, but the game media is enclosed and points are awarded based on the occurrence of a winning. It may also be an enclosed game machine.

Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") may be displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeatedly displaying and extinguishing the symbol. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol does not need to be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" does not need to be displayed as a display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 was shown as a gaming machine, but medals are inserted and a predetermined number of bets are set, and multiple types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operating lever by the player. A slot machine that can execute a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player when the combination of stopped symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols when the symbols are stopped in response to the operation of the stop button (for example, a big bonus , regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter referred to as bonus, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form in which they are distributed and provided to a computer device included in the pachinko game machine 1 on a removable recording medium, but are provided in advance in a form such as a computer device etc. The software may be distributed by being installed on the storage device of the user. Furthermore, by providing a communication processing section, the program and data for realizing the present invention can be distributed by being downloaded from other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. I don't mind.

The game can be executed not only by attaching a removable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via a communication line in internal memory, etc. It may also be executed directly using hardware resources of other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with other computer devices via a network.

In addition, in this specification, expressions that compare various proportions such as the execution rate of production (expressions such as "higher", "lower", "different", etc.) do not mean that one is a proportion of "0%". May include. For example, one of the ratios is "0%" and the other is "100%" or a ratio of less than "100%".

(Explanation regarding characteristic part 241SG)
Next, the pachinko gaming machine 1 as the characteristic part 241SG in this embodiment will be explained based on FIGS. 14-1 to 14-40. In addition, in the following, detailed explanations will be omitted by assigning the same reference numerals to the configurations that are similar to the pachinko gaming machine 1 explained in the basic explanation, or have different shapes, arrangement positions, etc., but have similar functions. Mainly the points that are different from the pachinko gaming machine 1 explained in the basic explanation will be explained.

As shown in FIG. 14-1, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 as the characteristic part 241SG, the mounted movable body 32 is formed to be slightly larger than the mounted movable body 32 shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 14-2, a vibration motor 61 built in the stick controller 31A is connected to the effect control board 12, and the effect control CPU 120 vibrates the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B. is considered possible. Further, a button LED 62 built in the push button 31B is connected to the lamp control board 14, and the production control CPU 120 can turn on/off the button LED 62.

FIG. 14-3 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the performance control command used in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The production control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, with the first byte indicating MODE (command classification) and the second byte indicating EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of MODE data is always set to "1", and the first bit of EXT data is set to "0". Note that the command format shown in FIG. 14-3(A) is an example, and other command formats may be used. Further, in this example, the control command is made up of two control signals, but the number of control signals making up the control command may be one, or may be three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 14-3(A), command 8001H is a first variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in a special pattern game using the first special pattern on the first special pattern display device 4A. . Command 8002H is a second variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in the special pattern game using the second special pattern on the second special pattern display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of special symbols in the special symbol game. This is a variation pattern specification command that specifies a variation pattern (variation time (variable display time)) of a symbol (also referred to as a performance symbol). Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be any value that can be arbitrarily set according to the content of the instruction by the production control command. Note that in the variation pattern designation command, different EXT data is set depending on the variation pattern to be specified.

Command 8CXXH is a variable display result designation command, and is an effect control command that designates variable display results such as special symbols and decorative symbols. The variable display result specification command determines whether the variable display result (also referred to as variable display result) is a "miss", "big hit", or "small hit", as shown in Figure 14-3 (B), for example. Different EXT data is set depending on the result (predetermined result) and the result of determining which of a plurality of types of jackpot is to be selected when the variable display result is "jackpot" (jackpot type determination result).

Among the variable display result designation commands, for example, as shown in FIG. 14-3 (B), command 8C00H is the first variable display result designation command that indicates a predetermined result that the variable display result is "miss". . Command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot A" and the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot B" and the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot C" and the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result designation command that notifies the predetermined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "uncertain variable jackpot" and the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C05H is a sixth variable display result designation command that notifies a predetermined result that the variable display result is a "small win."

Command 8F00H is a symbol confirmation command that specifies stopping (determination) of variation of decorative symbols in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5. The command 95XXH is a gaming state designation command that designates the current gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the gaming state designation command, different EXT data is set depending on the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. As a specific example, command 9500H is a first gaming state designation command corresponding to a gaming state in which neither time saving control nor probability variable control is performed (low probability low base state, normal state), and command 9501H is a command in which time saving control is performed. This is a second gaming state designation command corresponding to a gaming state (low probability high base state, time saving state) in which probability change control is not performed. In addition, command 9502H is a third gaming state designation command corresponding to a gaming state in which probability variable control is performed but time saving control is not performed (high probability low base state, probability variable state without time saving), and command 9503H is a command 9503H for time saving control and probability variable. This command is a fourth gaming state designation command corresponding to the gaming states (high probability high base state, time saving variable probability state) which are both controlled.

Command 9000 (H) is an effect control command (initialization designation command: power-on designation command) that is transmitted when power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started. The command 9200 (H) is an effect control command (power failure recovery designation command) that is transmitted when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is restarted after being temporarily stopped. When power supply to the game machine is started, the game control microcomputer 100 sends a power failure recovery designation command if data is stored in the backup RAM, and if not, sends an initialization designation command. Send commands.

The command A0XXH is a win start designation command (also referred to as a "fanfare command") that designates the display of an effect image indicating the start of a jackpot game or a small win game. Command A1XXH is a big winning hole opening notification command that notifies that the big winning hole is in an open state in the jackpot gaming state. Command A2XXH is a post-opening notification command for the jackpot that notifies that the jackpot has changed from the open state to the closed state during the jackpot gaming state. Command A3XXH is a winning end designation command that designates the display of an effect image at the end of a jackpot game or a small winning.

In the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, for example, the same EXT data as the variable display result designation command may be set, so that different EXT data may be set depending on the predetermined result or the jackpot type determination result. . Alternatively, in the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, the correspondence relationship between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be made different from the correspondence relationship in the variable display result designation command. . In the notification command while the big winning hole is open and the notification command after the big winning hole is opened, for example, in response to the number of rounds (for example, "1" to "10") in the normal open jackpot state and the high speed open jackpot state, which will be described later, Different EXT data is set.

The command B100H is based on the fact that the game ball that passed through (entered) the first starting prize opening formed by the winning ball device 6A was detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and a starting prize (first starting winning) occurred. This is a first starting opening winning designation command that notifies that the first starting condition for executing the special symbol game using the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the second starting prize opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and a starting prize (second starting prize) has occurred. , is a second starting opening winning designation command that notifies that the second starting condition for executing the special symbol game using the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B is satisfied.

The command C1XXH is a first pending memory number notification command that notifies the first special figure pending memory number in order to make it possible to specify the special figure pending memory number. Command C2XXH is a second pending memory number notification command that notifies the second special figure pending memory number in order to make it possible to specify the special figure pending memory number. The first pending storage number notification command is, for example, when the first starting opening winning designation command is sent based on the game ball passing (entering) the first starting winning opening and the first starting condition being satisfied. , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. The second pending memory number notification command is, for example, when the second starting opening winning designation command is sent based on the game ball passing (entering) the second starting winning opening and the second starting condition being satisfied. , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. In addition, the first pending memory number notification command and the second pending memory number notification command are used when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the number of pending memories decreases), the special figure game It may also be transmitted in response to the start of execution.

Instead of the first pending memory number notification command and the second pending memory number notification command, a total pending memory number notification command that notifies the total number of pending memories may be transmitted. That is, a total number of pending memories notification command may be used to notify an increase (or decrease) in the total number of pending memories.

Command D100 is a customer waiting demonstration designation command for specifying execution of a customer waiting demonstration performance, and as described later, is executed when neither the first pending memory nor the second pending memory exists in the special symbol normal processing. This command is sent based on the demo display settings, and the customer waiting demonstration performance is executed when a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the customer waiting demonstration designation command was sent.

Note that the commands shown in Figure 14-3 (A) are just examples; some of these commands may be omitted, different commands may be used in place of these commands, or these commands may not be included. You may add a command different from the one in . For example, a prize ball number notification command that allows you to specify the number of prize balls that will be paid out based on the game balls entering each winning slot, and a gate notification command that allows you to notify that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41. A passage notification command, a notification command for notifying the remaining number of times the probability change control or time saving control will be executed, etc. may be provided.

FIG. 14-4 is an explanatory diagram illustrating random numbers counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 14-4, on the side of the main board 11, a random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result, a random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type, a random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, and a random number MR3 for determining the regular figure display result. Numerical data representing each of the random numbers MR4 is controlled to be countable. Note that random numbers other than these may be used to enhance the gaming effect. The random numbers used to control the progress of the game are also referred to as gaming random numbers.

The random number circuit 104 may be one that counts numerical data indicating some or all of these random numbers MR1 to MR4. As described later, the CPU 103 uses a random counter different from the random number circuit 104, such as a random counter provided in a game control counter setting section set in the RAM 102, to update various numerical data by software. Numerical data representing part of the random numbers MR1 to MR4 may be counted.

The random number value MR1 for determining the special pattern display result is a random number value used to determine whether or not to control a variable display result such as a special pattern in a special pattern game as a "jackpot" into a jackpot game state. For example, It takes a value in the range of "1" to "65536". The random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type determines whether the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot A", "probable variable jackpot B", "probable variable jackpot C", or "non-probable variable jackpot" when the variable display result is "jackpot". This is a random number value used to determine the value, and takes, for example, a value in the range of "1" to "100".

The random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is a random number value used to determine the variation pattern in the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols to one of multiple types prepared in advance, and is, for example, "1" to " Takes a value in the range of ``997''.

The random number MR4 for determining the general pattern display result is used to determine whether the variable display result in the general pattern game by the normal pattern display 20 is to be "normal pattern hit" or "normal pattern hit". This is a random number value, for example, in the range of "3" to "13".

FIG. 14-5(A) shows a configuration example of the special figure display result determination table 1 stored in the ROM 101. In this embodiment, a common special figure display result determination table is used for the first special figure and the second special figure as the special figure display result determination table, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, separate special figure display result determination tables may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

The special figure display result determination table 1 is a variable display result in a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special figure display device 4A and a special figure game using the second special figure by the second special figure display device 4B. Before the finalized special symbol is derived and displayed, in order to determine whether or not to control the variable display result into a jackpot game state as a "jackpot" based on the random value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result. This is the referenced table.

In the special figure display result determination table 1 in this embodiment, depending on whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, a time saving state (low probability state), or a variable probability state (high probability state), A numerical value (judgment value) that is compared with the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result is assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit" or "miss".

In the special figure display result determination table 1, the table data indicating the determination value to be compared with the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result determines whether or not the special figure display result is treated as a "jackpot" and controlled to a jackpot gaming state. This is judgment data assigned to the decision result. In the special figure display result determination table 1 in this embodiment, when the gaming state is in a variable probability state (high probability state), there are more decision values than when the gaming state is in the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state). It is assigned to the special figure display result of "Jackpot". As a result, in a variable probability state (high probability state) in which probability variable control is performed in the pachinko game machine 1, when the pachinko game machine 1 is in a normal state or a time saving state (low probability state), the special figure display result is set as a "jackpot" and the jackpot game state is controlled. Then, compared to the probability determined (approximately 1/300 in this embodiment), the probability that the special figure display result is determined to be a "jackpot" and the jackpot gaming state is controlled becomes higher (approximately 1/300 in this embodiment). /30). That is, in the special figure display result determination table 1, when the gaming state in the pachinko game machine 1 is a variable probability state (high probability state), it is determined that the control is to be made into a jackpot gaming state compared to when it is in a normal state or a time saving state. In order to increase the probability of winning, the determination data is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state.

Further, FIG. 14-5(B) shows a configuration example of the special figure display result determination table 2 stored in the ROM 101. The special figure display result determination table 2 is a variable display result in a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special figure display device 4A and a special figure game using the second special figure by the second special figure display device 4B. Before the finalized special symbol is derived and displayed, it is determined based on the random number MR1 for determining the special symbol display result whether or not to control the variable display result to a "small win" game state as a "small win". This is the table referenced for this purpose. In the special figure display result determination table 2 in this embodiment, regardless of whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, a time saving state (low probability state), or a variable probability state (high probability state), A numerical value (judgment value) that is compared with the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result is assigned to the special figure display result of "small hit".

In the special figure display result determination table 2, the table data indicating the determination value to be compared with the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result determines whether to control the special figure display result to a "small hit" game state as a "small hit". This is the judgment data assigned to the decision result. In the special figure display result judgment table 2 in this embodiment, the number of judgment values assigned to the "small hit" is different depending on the case of the first special figure special figure game and the case of the second special figure game. There is. Specifically, if it is a special game of the first special figure, a judgment value is assigned to the "small hit", but if it is a special figure game of the second special figure, the judgment value is assigned to the "small hit". No judgment value has been assigned. Therefore, as will be described later, the variable display of the second special figure is executed with priority over the variable display of the first special figure, and the time saving control is executed to generate the second starting winning prize formed by the variable winning ball device 6B. In the high base state where winnings occur and the variable display of the second special figure is often executed, "small hits" almost never occur, and the second start formed by the variable winning ball device 6B In a high base state in which game balls are likely to enter a prize opening, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a small hit in which many game balls cannot be obtained, thereby preventing the game interest from decreasing.

FIG. 14-6(A) shows a configuration example of the jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. The jackpot type determination table in this embodiment is configured to select one of a plurality of jackpot types based on a random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination when it is determined that the special figure display result is a "jackpot" and the jackpot gaming state is controlled. This is a table that is referenced to determine the In the jackpot type determination table, the special symbol for which a variable display (fluctuating display) was performed in the special symbol game is the first special symbol (special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A) or the second special symbol (the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A). 2 special pattern display device 4B), the numerical value (judgment value) compared with the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type may be "non-probable variable jackpot", "probable variable jackpot A", or " They are assigned to a plurality of jackpot types such as "probable variable jackpot B" and "probable variable jackpot C."

Here, the jackpot types in this embodiment will be explained using FIG. 14-6(B). In this embodiment, the jackpot types include high-accuracy control and time-saving control after the end of the jackpot gaming state. "Probability variable jackpot A" and "Probability variable jackpot B" which are executed and move to a high-precision high base state, and a high-probability low base state in which high-precision control is executed but time-saving control is not executed after the jackpot gaming state ends. A "probable variable jackpot C" that transitions, and a "non-probable variable jackpot" that transitions to a low-probability-high base state after the end of the jackpot gaming state where only the time saving control is executed are set.

The jackpot game state by the "probable variable jackpot A" is a normal open jackpot in which rounds of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeatedly executed 10 times (so-called 10 rounds). On the other hand, the jackpot game state of "Probable Variable Jackpot B" is a normal open jackpot in which rounds of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeatedly executed five times (so-called 5 rounds). . In addition, the jackpot game state due to the "non-probable variable jackpot" is a normal open jackpot in which rounds in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the first state advantageous to the player are repeatedly executed 10 times (so-called 10 rounds). . Therefore, the "probable variable jackpot A" may be referred to as a 10 round (10R) variable probability jackpot, and the "probable variable jackpot B" may be referred to as a 5 round (5R) variable variable jackpot. Furthermore, in the jackpot game based on "Probable Variable Jackpot C", a round in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the first state advantageous to the player is repeated twice (so-called 2 rounds), and a special This is a high-speed opening jackpot in which the opening period of the variable winning ball device 7 is shorter (for example, 0.1 seconds) than other jackpot games. Furthermore, during the jackpot game of any jackpot type, probability change control and time saving control are not executed.

Also, although not particularly shown, the small winning game state in this embodiment changes the special variable winning ball device 7 twice to the first state advantageous to the player, and the opening time is the same as that of the variable jackpot C. This is the open period (0.1 seconds in this embodiment). Furthermore, after the small winning game ends, the gaming state immediately before the small winning game is carried over.

In other words, in this embodiment, if it is determined to be a "probable variable jackpot C" or "small win", a variable display is executed with the same variation pattern (PC1-1 shown in Figure 14-7). At the same time, as a variable display result, the chance number is displayed in a stopped state, and furthermore, the opening patterns of the special variable winning ball device 7 are the same, so from these variable displays and the opening pattern of the special variable winning ball device 7, , since it is not possible to distinguish whether it is a "probable variable jackpot C" in which the variable probability control is executed or a "small hit" in which the previous gaming state is continued without the variable probability control being executed, After the end of a jackpot game or a small win game, it is possible to allow the player to continue playing the game while making him/her expect that probability change control is being executed.

The high probability control and time saving control that are executed after the end of the jackpot game state of the probability variable jackpot A and the probability variable jackpot B are continuously executed until the jackpot occurs again after the end of the jackpot game state. Therefore, if the jackpot that occurs again is a variable probability jackpot A or variable probability jackpot B, the high probability control and time saving control are executed again after the jackpot gaming state ends, so the jackpot gaming state does not go through the normal state. This occurs continuously, resulting in a so-called consecutive home situation.

On the other hand, the time saving control that is executed after the end of the jackpot game state due to the "non-probable variable jackpot" is such that the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in this embodiment), or the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in this embodiment). The game ends by entering a jackpot game state before the game is executed.

In the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 14-6(A), depending on whether the variably displayed special symbol is the first special symbol or the second special symbol, "probable variable jackpot A", " The assignment of determination values to the jackpot types of "probable variable jackpot B", "probable variable jackpot C", and "non-probable variable jackpot" is different. In other words, when the variably displayed special figure is the first special figure, the judgment value in the predetermined range (value in the range of "81" to "100") is "Probable Variable Jackpot B" or "Probable Variable Jacket B" with a small number of rounds. If the variablely displayed special figure is the second special figure, a judgment value is assigned to the jackpot type of "probable variable jackpot B" or "probable variable jackpot C". It has not been done. With such settings, the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the first starting condition for starting the special pattern game using the first special pattern displayed by the first special pattern display device 4A. and when the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the fulfillment of the second start condition for starting the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. Therefore, the ratio at which the jackpot type is determined to be "probable variable jackpot B" or "probable variable jackpot C" with a small number of rounds can be varied. In particular, in the special pattern game using the second special pattern, the jackpot type is not determined to be controlled to a normal open jackpot state or a high speed open jackpot state with a small number of rounds, such as "probable variable jackpot B" or "probable variable jackpot C". Therefore, for example, by high opening control accompanying time saving control, in a gaming state where game balls are likely to enter the second starting prize opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, frequent occurrence of a jackpot state where few prize balls are obtained can be avoided. This makes it possible to prevent the player's interest in the game from decreasing.

In addition, in the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in Figure 14-6 (A), the assignment of the judgment value to the jackpot type of "non-probable variation" is determined by whether it is the first special figure game or the second special figure game. Since it is the same regardless of whether it is the same, the probability of a non-probable jackpot and the probability of a fixed jackpot are the same regardless of whether it is the first special game or the second special game. It is said that

Therefore, as mentioned above, depending on the fact that the allocation of judgment values for "Probable Variable Jackpot B" and "Probable Variable Jackpot C" differs depending on whether it is a special game of the first special figure or the second special figure. Therefore, the allocation of the judgment value for "Probable Variable Jackpot A" also differs depending on whether it is the first or second special map game, and for "Probable Variable Jackpot A" with a large number of rounds, It is set so that it is easier to decide if it is a special figure game of a special figure than if it is a special figure game of the first special figure.

In addition, even in the case of the special game of the second special figure, the judgment value in a predetermined range that is different from the case of the special figure game of the first special figure is the jackpot of "probable strange jackpot B" or "probable strange jackpot C". It may be possible to assign it to a type. For example, in the case of a special pattern game with the second special pattern, the judgment value is smaller than in the case of a special pattern game with the first special pattern, for the jackpot types of "probable variable jackpot B" and "probable variable jackpot C". May be assigned. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined by referring to common table data regardless of whether it is a first special figure game or a second special figure game.

FIG. 14-6 shows the variation pattern in this embodiment. In this embodiment, among the cases where the variable display result is "miss", the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is "non-reach" and "reach", respectively. A plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance in response to cases where the display result is a "big hit" or a "small win." In addition, the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "miss" and the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach variation pattern"), A variation pattern corresponding to a case where the variable display result is "miss" and the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is "reach" is referred to as a reach variation pattern (also referred to as "reach variation pattern"). Further, the non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the off-reach variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "off". A variation pattern corresponding to a case where the variable display result is a "jackpot" is referred to as a jackpot variation pattern.

The jackpot fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern include a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which a normal reach reach effect is executed, and a super reach fluctuation pattern in which a super reach reach effect is executed. In this embodiment, only one type of normal reach variation pattern is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and similarly to the super reach variation pattern, normal reach variation patterns such as normal reach α, normal reach β, etc. are provided. A plurality of normal reach variation patterns may be provided, and in this case, the jackpot expectation level (jackpot reliability) of each normal reach variation pattern of normal reach α, normal reach β, . . . may be different. Further, although super reach α and super reach β are provided as super reach variation patterns, the present invention is not limited to this, and the super reach variation pattern may be of only one type, similar to the normal reach variation putter.

Incidentally, the fluctuation patterns in this embodiment include a special winning fluctuation pattern (corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "small hit" or the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot C"). PC1-1) is also included.

As shown in FIG. 14-7, the special figure variable display time of the normal reach variation pattern in which the normal reach effect in this embodiment is executed is set shorter than that of the super reach variation pattern. Also, among the super reach variation patterns, for the super reach β and super reach γ variation patterns, the variable display period is longer (60 seconds) than the variable display period (50 seconds) of the super reach α variation pattern. has been done.

In addition, in this embodiment, as will be described later, the types of these fluctuation patterns are determined first, such as non-reach types, normal reach types, super reach types, etc. After that, instead of determining the fluctuation pattern to be executed from among the fluctuation patterns belonging to the determined type, the fluctuation pattern is determined using only the random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern without determining these types. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern, a random number for determining the type of variation pattern may be provided, and from these random numbers for determining the type of variation pattern. The type of variation pattern may be determined first, and then the variation pattern to be executed may be determined from the variation patterns belonging to the determined type.

FIG. 14-8 is an explanatory diagram of a method for determining a variation pattern in this embodiment. In this embodiment, the variable pattern determination table to be selected differs depending on the gaming state, the display result of the variable display to be executed, and the number of pending memories.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 14-8 (A), when the variable display result is a non-probable variable jackpot in the normal gaming state (low base state), the jackpot variation pattern determination table A is selected and the corresponding Using fluctuation pattern determination table A for jackpot, change the fluctuation patterns into PB1-1 (normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-2 (super reach α jackpot fluctuation pattern), and PB1-3 (super reach β jackpot fluctuation pattern). Determine from. In addition, if the variable display result is a probability variable jackpot A or a probability variable jackpot B in the normal gaming state (low base state), select the jackpot variation pattern determination table B, and use the jackpot variation pattern determination table B to change the variable display result. The pattern is determined from PB1-1 (normal reach jackpot variation pattern), PB1-2 (super reach α jackpot variation pattern), and PB1-3 (super reach β jackpot variation pattern).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 14-8 (A), in the jackpot variation pattern determination table A and the jackpot variation pattern determination table B, the number of determination values assigned to PB1-1, PB1-2, and PB1-3 is It's different. Specifically, in the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A, 497 determination values are assigned to PB1-1, 300 determination values are assigned to PB1-2, and 200 determination values are assigned to PB1-3. Assigned. On the other hand, in the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B, 250 determination values are assigned to PB1-1, 347 determination values are assigned to PB1-2, and 400 determination values are assigned to PB1-3. ing. In other words, in this embodiment, when the variable display result is a probability variable jackpot A or a probability variable jackpot B, the variation pattern is determined to be a super reach at a higher rate than when the variable display result is a non-probability variable jackpot. In addition, since super reach β is easier to determine than super reach α, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the fluctuation pattern in the variable display.

In addition, if the variable display result is a definite variable jackpot C or a small hit, select the special winning variation pattern judgment table, and use the special winning variation pattern judgment table to change the variation pattern to PC1-1 (special winning variation pattern). In other words, in this embodiment, the variable display is executed with the same variation pattern depending on whether the variable display result is a probability variable jackpot C or a small win. It is difficult to specify whether the result is a variable jackpot C or a small hit.

In addition, if the variable display result is "Loss" in the normal gaming state (low base state) and the number of pending memory of variable special symbols is 2 or less, select the variation pattern determination table A for losses, and select the corresponding variation pattern judgment table A. Using variation pattern determination table A for misses, change the variation patterns to PA1-1 (non-reach variation pattern), PA2-1 (normal reach variation pattern), PA2-2 (super reach α variation pattern), and PA2 -3 (variation pattern of super reach β deviation).

Specifically, in the error variation pattern determination table A, 600 determination values are assigned to PA1-1, 300 determination values are assigned to PA2-1, and 90 determination values are assigned to PA2-2. Seven determination values are assigned to PA2-3.

In addition, if the variable display result is "Low" in the normal gaming state (low base state) and the number of pending memory of variable special symbols is 3, select the fluctuation pattern judgment table B for the loss, and Using variation pattern determination table B, change the variation patterns to PA1-2 (shortened variation pattern with non-reach deviance), PA2-1 (variation pattern with normal reach deviance), PA2-2 (variation pattern with super reach α deviation), and PA2 -3 (fluctuation pattern of super reach β deviation).

Specifically, in the variation pattern determination table B for failure, 700 determination values are assigned to PA1-2, 200 determination values are assigned to PA2-1, and 90 determination values are assigned to PA2-2. Seven determination values are assigned to PA2-3.

In addition, if the variable display result is "Low" in the normal gaming state (low base state) and the number of pending memory of variable special symbols is 4, select the fluctuation pattern judgment table C for the loss, and select the fluctuation pattern judgment table C for the loss. Using the variation pattern determination table C, change the variation patterns to PA1-3 (shortened variation pattern with non-reach deviance), PA2-1 (variation pattern with normal reach deviance), PA2-2 (variation pattern with super reach α deviation), and PA2 -3 (fluctuation pattern of super reach β deviation).

Specifically, in the error variation pattern determination table C, 800 determination values are assigned to PA1-3, 100 determination values are assigned to PA2-1, and 90 determination values are assigned to PA2-2. Seven determination values are assigned to PA2-3.

In this way, in this embodiment, when the variable display result is "off", the special figure variable display time is changed from the normal one based on the number of reserved memory of the variable special figure being 3, 4, etc. The rate at which variable display is executed is higher with shortening variation patterns (PA1-2, PA1-3) that are shorter than non-reach variation patterns (PA1-1), thus preventing games from becoming too long. At the same time, it is possible to shorten the period until the next variable display result becomes a jackpot.

Next, as shown in FIG. 14-8(B), if the variable display result is a non-probable variable jackpot in the high base state, select the jackpot variation pattern determination table A, and select the jackpot variation pattern determination table A. PB1-1 (Normal Reach Jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-2 (Super Reach α Jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-3 (Super Reach β Jackpot fluctuation pattern), and PB1-4 (Super Reach γ Jackpot fluctuation pattern). Jackpot fluctuation pattern). In addition, if the variable display result is a probability variable jackpot A or probability variable jackpot B in the low base state, select the jackpot variation pattern determination table B, and change the variation pattern to PB1-1 using the jackpot variation pattern determination table B. Determined from (variation pattern of normal reach jackpot), PB1-2 (variation pattern of super reach α jackpot), PB1-3 (variation pattern of super reach β jackpot), and PB1-4 (variation pattern of super reach γ jackpot) .

In addition, as shown in FIG. 14-8(B), in the jackpot variation pattern judgment table A and the jackpot variation pattern judgment table B, the judgment values for PB1-1, PB1-2, PB1-3, and PB1-4 are The number of allocations is different. Specifically, in the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A, 97 determination values are assigned to PB1-1, 350 determination values are assigned to PB1-2, and 300 determination values are assigned to PB1-3. 250 judgment values are allocated to PB1-4. On the other hand, in the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B, 50 determination values are assigned to PB1-1, 200 determination values are assigned to PB1-2, and 347 determination values are assigned to PB1-3. , 400 judgment values are assigned to PB1-4. In other words, in this embodiment, when the variable display result is a variable probability jackpot A or a variable probability jackpot B, the variation pattern is higher than that of super reach β or super reach γ at a higher rate than when the variable display result is a non-probable variable jackpot. Since the variation pattern is easier to determine, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the variation pattern in the variable display.

In addition, if the variable display result is a definite variable jackpot C or a small hit, select the special winning variation pattern judgment table, and use the special winning variation pattern judgment table to change the variation pattern to PC1-1 (special winning variation pattern). In other words, in this embodiment, the variable display is executed with the same variation pattern depending on whether the variable display result is a probability variable jackpot C or a small win. It is difficult to specify whether the result is a variable jackpot C or a small hit.

In addition, if the variable display result is "miss" in the time saving state (high base state), select the variation pattern determination table D for failure, and change the fluctuation pattern to PA1-4 using the fluctuation pattern determination table D for failure. (Non-reach deviation pattern for time saving), PA2-1 (Normal reach deviation pattern), PA2-2 (Super reach α deviation pattern), PA2-3 (Super reach β deviation pattern), and PA2 -4 (super reach γ deviation variation pattern).

Specifically, in the variation pattern determination table D for failure, 800 determination values are assigned to PA1-4, 100 determination values are assigned to PA2-1, and 80 determination values are assigned to PA2-2. Ten determination values are assigned to PA2-3, and seven determination values are assigned to PA2-4.

In other words, in this embodiment, if the variable display result is "off" in the high base state (time saving state), based on the time saving state, the special figure variable display time will change compared to the normal non-reach Since the variable display is executed more frequently with the shorter variable pattern (PA1-4) than the pattern (PA1-1), the variable display results are It is possible to shorten the time it takes to hit the jackpot. Note that the fluctuation patterns PA2-4 and PB1-4 (super reach γ) are fluctuation patterns that can only be executed in the high base state (time saving state).

The RAM 102 in this embodiment is provided with, for example, a game control data holding area as an area for holding various data used to control the progress of games in the pachinko game machine 1. The game control data holding area includes, for example, a first special figure reservation storage section, a second special figure reservation storage section, a regular figure reservation storage section, a game control flag setting section, a game control timer setting section, and a game control timer setting section. It includes a control counter setting section and a game control buffer setting section.

The first special figure holding storage unit stores special figures that have not yet been started, although a game ball has passed (entered) the first starting prize opening formed by the winning ball device 6A and a starting prize (first starting prize) has occurred. Stores pending data of the game (special symbol game using the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A). As an example, the first special figure holding storage unit associates the winning order (game ball detection order) to the first starting prize opening with the holding number, and the first starting condition is satisfied when the game ball passes (enters). The CPU 103 extracts from the random number circuit 104 etc. based on the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, the random number MR2 for jackpot type determination, and the numerical data indicating the random number MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination as pending data. , are stored until the storage number reaches a predetermined upper limit (eg, "4"). In this way, the suspension data stored in the first special figure suspension storage section indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is on hold, and the variable display result (special figure display result) in this special figure game is suspended. ) is the pending information that makes it possible to determine whether or not it will be a jackpot.

The second special figure holding storage unit stores special figures that have not yet been started, although the game ball has passed (entered) the second starting prize opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B and a starting prize (second starting prize) has occurred. Stores pending data of a figure game (a special figure game using the second special figure on the second special figure display device 4B). As an example, the second special figure holding storage unit associates the winning order (game ball detection order) to the second starting prize opening with the holding number, and the second starting condition is satisfied when the game ball passes (enters). The CPU 103 extracts from the random number circuit 104 etc. based on the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, the random number MR2 for jackpot type determination, and the numerical data indicating the random number MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination as pending data. , are stored until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (eg, "4"). In this way, the suspension data stored in the second special figure suspension storage section indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is on hold, and the variable display result (special figure display result) in this special figure game is suspended. ) is the pending information that makes it possible to determine whether or not it will be a jackpot.

In addition, there is hold information (first hold information) based on the establishment of the first starting condition due to the game ball passing (entering) the first starting prize opening, and holding information (first holding information) based on the establishment of the first starting condition due to the gaming ball passing (entering) the second starting winning opening. The reservation information (second reservation information) based on the establishment of the second starting winning may be stored in a common reservation storage unit in association with the reservation number. In this case, starting hole data indicating whether the game ball passed through (entered) the first starting winning hole or the second starting winning hole may be included in the hold information and stored in association with the holding number. .

The standard figure holding storage section stores the hold information of the standard figure game which has not yet been started by the normal symbol display 20 even though the game ball passing through the passage gate 41 has been detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the normal figure holding storage unit associates the game balls with the holding numbers in the order in which they pass through the passage gate 41, and stores the normal figure display result judgment data extracted from the random number circuit 104 by the CPU 103 based on the passing of the game balls. The numerical data indicating the random number MR4 of is stored as pending data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4").

The game control flag setting section is provided with a plurality of types of flags whose states can be updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 and the like. For example, the game control flag setting section stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on state or off state for each of the plurality of types of flags.

The game control timer setting section is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting section stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The game control counter setting section is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting count values used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting section stores data indicating count values for each of a plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting section may be provided with a random counter for counting part or all of the gaming random numbers so that the CPU 103 can update them by software.

In the random counter of the game control counter setting section, random numbers not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data indicating random numbers MR2 to MR4, are stored as random count values, and are periodically counted according to the execution of software by the CPU 103. Numerical data indicating each random value is updated periodically or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the numerical data updating operation in the random number circuit 104, or may be for updating the random count value separately from the numerical data updating operation in the random number circuit 104, or may be for updating the random count value separately from the numerical data updating operation in the random number circuit 104. The random count value may be updated by performing predetermined processing such as scrambling processing or arithmetic processing on all or part of the numerical data obtained.

The game control buffer setting section is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting section stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

The RAM 122 mounted on the performance control board 12 shown in FIG. 14-2 is provided with a performance control data holding area as an area for holding various data used to control performance operations. This performance control data holding area includes a performance control flag setting section, a performance control timer setting section, a performance control counter setting section, and a performance control buffer setting section.

The effect control flag setting section includes a plurality of types of flags whose states can be updated according to the effect operation state such as the display state of the effect image on the screen of the image display device 5, the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11, etc. A flag is set. For example, the production control flag setting section stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on state or off state for each of the plurality of types of flags.

The effect control timer setting section is provided with a plurality of types of timers used to control the progress of various effect operations, such as display operations of effect images on the screen of the image display device 5, for example. For example, the production control timer setting section stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The performance control counter setting section is provided with a plurality of types of counters used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the production control counter setting section stores data indicating count values for each of a plurality of types of counters.

The performance control buffer setting section is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the performance control buffer setting section stores data indicating buffer values for each of a plurality of types of buffers.

In this embodiment, the buffer number 1-0 corresponds to the variable display being executed by the pending storage of the first special figure, and the buffer number 1-1 to buffer number 1 corresponds to the pending memory 1 to 4 of the first special figure. -4, Buffer number 2-0 corresponding to the variable display being executed due to the pending memory of the second special figure, Buffer number 2-1 to buffer number 2-4 corresponding to the pending memory 1 to 4 of the second special figure The data constituting the starting winning reception command buffer is set up with entries that can store data such as starting opening winning designation command, symbol designation command, variable category command, pending storage number notification command, etc. in association with each of them. It is stored in a predetermined area of the production control buffer setting section. When there is a starting prize in the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening, the starting opening winning designation command (first starting opening winning designation command or second starting opening winning designation command), symbol designation command, variable category designation A set of four commands, a command and a pending storage number notification command (a first pending storage number notification command or a second pending storage number notification command), is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. The four commands that make up one set, the starting opening prize designation command, the symbol specification command, the fluctuation category specification command, and the pending storage number notification command, are the buffer numbers corresponding to the starting opening winning prize specification command and the pending storage number notification command. is stored in the entry.

The storage contents of the storage areas (entries) corresponding to buffer numbers 1-0 to 1-4 corresponding to the first special figure will be stored in the highest pending storage (buffer number "1-1") when the start condition is satisfied. ), the contents of the buffer number ``1-0'' that stores the contents of the suspended memory for which the start condition is met are shifted upward one by one as described later. , is cleared in the special figure waiting process executed when the variable display ends. Similarly, the storage contents of the storage areas (entries) corresponding to buffer numbers 2-0 to 1-4 corresponding to the second special figure will be stored in the highest pending storage (buffer number "2") when the start condition is met. -1"), the buffer number "2-0" is shifted upward one by one as will be described later, and the buffer number "2-0" is shifted upward one by one as will be described later. The stored contents are cleared in a special figure waiting process executed when the variable display ends.

At the time of starting winning into the first starting winning opening, the performance control CPU 120 sends a command to the beginning of an empty entry among buffer numbers 1-1 to 1-4 of the receiving command buffer (the lowest buffer number). When a starting prize is entered into the second starting winning slot, the starting winnings are stored starting from the beginning of the empty entry among buffer numbers 2-1 to 2-4 (the entry with the lowest buffer number). . At the time of starting winning, the starting opening winning specifying command to the pending storage number notification command are sequentially transmitted. Therefore, when the command is received, the starting opening winning prize designation command is stored in the storage areas corresponding to the suffixes "1" to "4" of the buffer numbers corresponding to the first special figure pending memory or the second special figure pending memory. , symbol designation command, fluctuation category designation command, and pending storage number notification command are stored in this order.

The command stored in the command buffer received at the time of starting winning is an entry (buffer number "1-0" or "2- The data stored in the buffer number "1-1" or "2-1" is deleted and stored in the entry corresponding to the pending storage of the variable display to be started (the entry corresponding to the buffer number "1-1" or "2-1"). The stored contents of the entries subsequent to the pending storage of the variable display to be started are shifted. For example, when the variable display of the decorative symbols in the first special symbol pending memory is finished, each command stored in buffer number "1-0" is deleted and stored in buffer number "1-1". Each command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number "1-2" is shifted to the area corresponding to the buffer number "1-1". The commands stored in the areas corresponding to buffer numbers "1-3" and "1-4" are shifted to the areas corresponding to buffer numbers "1-2" and "1-3". be done. Therefore, buffer number "0" becomes an area (entry) for storing each command related to pending storage that is variably displayed at that time.

(Production during super reach)
Here, the performance during super reach will be explained based on FIG. 14-9. FIG. 14-9 is a diagram showing execution periods of various effects in normal reach and super reach.

As shown in FIG. 14-9, in the variable display of decorative symbols based on the normal reach variation pattern or the super reach variation pattern, after starting the variable display, the performance control CPU 120 changes the variable display mode to the normal reach display mode. Based on this, a normal reach effect is performed as a variable display effect. In addition, in the super reach variation pattern, after executing the normal reach effect, a super reach effect (weak super reach effect or strong super reach effect) is performed as a variable display effect based on the variable display mode being set to the super reach effect. After finishing the reach effect, the variable display of the decorative pattern is finished.

In addition, in the normal reach performance in the normal reach variation pattern or super reach variation pattern (super reach α, β, γ), the performance control CPU 120 determines the possibility (expected) that the variable display result will be a jackpot as a performance different from the variable display performance. It is possible to execute a preview performance A or a preview performance B that foretells the event (degree). Further, in the normal reach performance in the super reach variation pattern, it is possible to execute a development performance A that notifies the player that the normal reach performance will develop into a weak super reach performance (content that is advantageous to the player).

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 controls a development performance B that notifies that a weak super reach performance in the super reach variation pattern (super reach α, β, γ) will develop into a strong super reach performance (content that is advantageous to the player). It is possible to execute a development-suggesting performance that suggests the possibility that It is possible to execute development effect B that notifies the user of the content).

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 can execute a determined performance that notifies that the variable display result will be a jackpot or a miss in a strong super reach performance in a super reach variation pattern (super reach β, γ). .

In this way, in the variation pattern where the normal reach is off, the normal reach effect will not develop into a weak super reach effect and result in a jackpot or miss, and in the super reach variation pattern (super reach α, β, γ), the weak super reach effect will occur in the normal reach effect. In the super reach variation pattern (super reach β, γ), a weak super reach performance develops into a strong super reach performance.

In other words, super reach α is a weak super reach with higher expectations than normal reach, and super reach β and γ are strong super reaches with higher expectations than weak super reach (jackpot expectation; normal reach < super reach). α<super reach β<super reach γ).

In addition, for normal reach and super reach α, β, and γ, different types of normal reach effects and super reach effects may be executed, or super reach effects of common or at least partially similar types may be executed. It may be executed. Further, the types of super reach are not limited to the above three types, and may be one or two types, or four or more types.

In the characteristic part 241SG, in the above-mentioned preview performance A, preview performance B, development performance A, B, development suggestion performance, and final performance, the mounted movable body 32, which is a structure, may be moved, and the first pseudo movable body display described later. It is possible to move and display the second pseudo movable body display. Therefore, before explaining the specific contents of each effect, the mounted movable body 32, the first pseudo movable body display, and the second pseudo movable body display will be explained.

(Flow of development of pachinko machines)
First, in order to understand how the pachinko gaming machine 1 was equipped with the above-mentioned mounted movable body 32, first pseudo movable body display, second pseudo movable body display, etc., we will discuss the development of the pachinko gaming machine 1. An outline of the flow will be explained based on FIG. 14-12. FIG. 14-12 is an explanatory diagram showing an outline of the development flow of a pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in Figure 14-12, when the development of a given pachinko machine (for example, pachinko machine 1) begins, we first clarify what we want to convey to the game parlor and the players, and what we want them to feel. A proposal is created based on the specifications (step 241SGS001). Specifically, consideration will be given to the game content, highlights, specs, game flow, presentation structure such as reach, board structure, movable objects (structures), etc. for the relevant machine.

Next, based on the proposal, prototypes (primary prototypes, design mocks) of the board (gaming board), videos and materials that can be visualized with variable displays, spec confirmation tables, etc. are created (step 241SGS002). At the stage of creating this prototype, for example, it was planned to mount multiple movable bodies, but there were reasons why it was not possible to mount multiple movable bodies (for example, lack of space such as interference with other movable bodies, cost, etc.) Problems such as durability may occur.

Next, images such as variable display and effects are created (step 241SGS003). Here, regarding the production video, based on the design and motion of the movable body that could not be mounted due to a problem in step 241SGS002, a pseudo movable body display video that imitates the movable body that could not be mounted is created. . Furthermore, since the movement display using the pseudo-movable object display has a lower impact than when moving a movable object that is not mounted, for example, the reaction display operation when the moving object is displayed and stopped, or the speed of the movement display is lower. It is often displayed in a deformed manner (exaggerated or highlighted).

Then, create a prototype (secondary prototype) of the board (gaming board) that includes images of variable displays and effects, and check the variable displays, core effects, movement of movable objects, etc. (step 241SGS004), If there is no problem, molds and the like for the board (game board) are created (step 241SGS005).

In this way, by installing multiple movable bodies that can provide players with an impactful performance, it is possible to further enhance the performance effect and diversify the performance, but due to the various problems mentioned above, it is not possible to actually It is often difficult to install multiple devices. Therefore, based on the design and operation of the movable body that could not be mounted, a moving display of a pseudo movable body display that imitates the movable body that could not be mounted is increasingly used.

In the following, the pachinko game machine 1 as the feature part 241SG was planned to be equipped with a plurality of movable bodies at the development stage, but due to the various problems mentioned above, one movable body ( For example, it has been decided to mount the movable body 32), and the other movable bodies (for example, the first movable body M100 and the second movable body M200) have not been determined to be mounted, so they are not mounted. In place of the first non-mounted movable body M100 and the second non-mounted movable body M200, a first pseudo movable body display imitating the first non-mounted movable body M100 and a movement display imitating the second non-mounted movable body M200 are used. A description will be given assuming that the moving display of the second pseudo movable body display is adopted.

In the above, the pseudo movable body display was adopted as a substitute for the first non-mounted movable body M100 and the second non-mounted movable body M200, which were ultimately not mounted, but the present invention applies to this. Although it is possible to mount a movable body, there are cases where a pseudo movable body display is intentionally used in order to diversify the presentation. It is also possible to use a pseudo movable body display that imitates a movable body that is not scheduled to be installed at the development stage (for example, a virtual movable body, a movable body that is installed or scheduled to be installed in another model, etc.).

(Mounted movable body 32)
The mounting movable body 32 will be explained below based on FIGS. 14-13. In FIGS. 14-13, (A) is a diagram showing a movement mode of the movable mounting body, and (B) is a diagram illustrating a situation in which the movable mounting body is lifted.

As shown in FIG. 14-13(A), the mounted movable body 32 is formed into a substantially trapezoidal shape when viewed from the front, and is composed of a production section 32A and a mechanism section 32B, each having a decoration etc. on the front surface. By supporting the left and right sides of the mechanism section 32B extending in the left and right sides, respectively, by the drive mechanisms 201L and 201R arranged on the left and right sides of the image display device 5, the upper origin position (FIG. 14-13 (A) ) and a production position below the origin position (the position indicated by a two-dot chain line in FIG. 14-13(A)). Note that the mechanism section 32B is a transmission member that transmits the power of the drive mechanisms 201L and 201R to the performance section 32A.

The drive mechanisms 201L, 201R include mounted movable body motors 202L, 202R, drive gears 203L, 203R fixed to the drive shafts of the mounted movable body motors 202L, 202R, and driven gears 204L, 204R that mesh with the drive gears 203L, 203R. , rotation shafts 205L, 205R that face in the vertical direction and have driven gears 204L, 204R fixed to their lower ends, movable bodies 206L, 206R inserted into the rotation shafts 205L, 205R, and mounted movable body 32 are held at the origin position. It mainly includes mounted movable body solenoids 207L and 207R that can be mounted, and a mounted movable body LED 208 (see FIG. 14-2) that is built in the production section 32A and can emit a light emitting part 208A consisting of the letter "X".

In the mounted movable body 32, the left and right ends (guided parts) of the mechanism section 32B are inserted (guided) into the rotation shafts 205L, 205R so as to be movable in the vertical direction, and are locked by the mounted movable body solenoids 207L, 207R. This allows it to be held at the origin position. When the mounted movable body solenoids 207L and 207R are turned on and released from the locked state while being held at the home position, the mounted movable body 32 is dropped by its own weight from the home position, and the left and right ends of the mechanism section 32B are comes into contact with the movable bodies 206L, 206R and is restricted from moving downward, thereby stopping at the performance position.

Further, a spiral groove 205A is formed on the outer periphery of the rotating shafts 205L, 205R, while a locking portion (not shown) that can be locked in the groove 205A is formed on the inner peripheral surface of the movable bodies 206L, 206R. Since the rotary shafts 205L and 205R are formed and rotation around the rotary shafts 205L and 205R is restricted, it is possible to move vertically by rotating the rotary shafts 205L and 205R in forward and reverse directions using the mounted movable body motors 202L and 202R. It is said that Therefore, the mounted movable body 32 can fall from the origin position to the production position by its own weight, and after falling, the mounted movable body motors 202L and 202R rotate the rotating shaft 205L as shown in FIG. , 205R to raise the movable bodies 206L and 206R, they rise from the production position to the origin position, and are held at the origin position by the mounted movable body solenoids 207L and 207R.

(First pseudo movable display and first non-mounted movable object)
Next, the first pseudo movable display and the first non-mounted movable body will be explained based on FIGS. 14-14. In FIGS. 14-14, (A) is a diagram showing a movement display mode of the first pseudo movable object display, and (B) is a diagram showing a movement mode of the first non-mounted movable body.

The first pseudo movable object display Z100 shown in FIG. 14-14(A) was planned to be installed in the pachinko gaming machine 1, as shown in FIG. 14-14(B), but due to various circumstances, it was not installed. The image is said to be a model of the first non-mounted movable body M100.

The first non-mounted movable body M100, which is not mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1, is composed of a production section M100A and a mechanism section M100B, which are formed into a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front and decorated with decorations etc. The left side of the mechanism section M100B extending leftward is supported by the drive mechanism M101 disposed on the left side of the image display device 5, so that the upper first origin position (2 in FIG. 14-14(B)) It is possible to move in the vertical direction between the origin position (indicated by a dotted chain line) and a first presentation position (indicated by a solid line in FIG. 14-14(B)) below the first origin position.

The drive mechanism M101 includes a movable motor M102, a drive gear M103 fixed to a drive shaft of the movable motor M102, a driven gear M104 that meshes with the drive gear M103, and a driven gear M104 fixed to a lower end thereof and facing in the vertical direction. A rotation axis M105, a movable body solenoid M107 capable of holding the first non-mounted movable body M100 at the first origin position, a movable body M106 inserted into the rotation axis M105, and built in the production part M100A, when viewed from the front. It mainly includes a circular light emitting portion M108A and a non-mounted movable body LED (not shown) capable of emitting light.

In addition, the effect part M100A has a striped decoration on the front side and has four effect movable parts M110A to M110D arranged around the light emitting part M108A, and the effect movable parts M110A to M110D are arranged in the first part adjacent to each other. It is possible to change between a presentation state (the state shown by the two-dot chain line in FIG. 14-14(B)) and a second presentation state in which the presentation movable parts M110A to M110D are radially separated from the light emitting part M108A.

The first non-mounted movable body M100 is configured such that the left end part (guided part) of the mechanism part M100B is inserted (guided) into the rotation shaft M105 so as to be movable in the vertical direction, and is locked by the movable body solenoid M107. 1 It is held at the origin position. When the movable body solenoid M107 is turned on and released from the locked state while being held at the first origin position, the first non-mounted movable body M100 is dropped by its own weight from the first origin position, and the mechanism part M100B The left and right end portions of the movable body M106 come into contact with the movable body M106, and downward movement is restricted, so that the movable body M106 is stopped at the first performance position.

Further, a spiral groove M105A is formed on the outer periphery of the rotation shaft M105, while a locking portion (not shown) capable of locking in the groove M105A is formed on the inner peripheral surface of the movable body M106, and Since the rotation around the rotation axis M105 is restricted, the rotation axis M105 can be moved in the vertical direction by rotating the rotation axis M105 in forward and reverse directions using the movable body motor M102. Therefore, the first non-mounted movable body M100 can fall from the first origin position to the first performance position by its own weight, and after falling, the movable body motor M102 rotates the rotation axis M105 to move the movable body M106. By raising it, it rises from the first performance position to the first specific origin position, and is held at the first origin position by the movable body solenoid M107.

As shown in FIG. 14-14(A), the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is an image imitating the first non-mounted movable body M100, and includes a production display section Z100A corresponding to the production section M100A, and a mechanism section. It has a mechanism display section Z100B corresponding to M100B and a light emitting display section Z108A corresponding to light emitting section M108A. The display can be moved in the vertical direction between the first initial display position corresponding to the first origin position and the first effect display position corresponding to the first effect position (see FIG. 14-16(B)). ), the display can be moved in the vertical direction between a first initial display position corresponding to a position different from the first origin position and a first effect display position corresponding to a position different from the first effect position (Fig. 14-17(A)). Furthermore, the production section M100A has production movable display parts Z110A to Z110D corresponding to the production movable parts M110A to M110D, and a first production display state corresponding to the first production state and a second production display state corresponding to the second production state. It is possible to change the performance display state.

(Second pseudo movable display and second non-mounted movable object)
Next, the second pseudo movable display and the second non-mounted movable body will be explained based on FIGS. 14-15. In FIGS. 14-15, (A) is a diagram showing a movement display mode of the second pseudo movable body display, and (B) is a diagram showing a movement mode of the second non-mounted movable body.

The second pseudo movable object display Z200 shown in FIG. 14-15(A) was planned to be installed in the pachinko gaming machine 1, as shown in FIGS. 14-15(B) and (C), but due to various circumstances, it was not installed. The image is said to be a model of the second non-mounted movable body M200 that has been mounted.

Regarding the second non-mountable movable body M200, at the beginning of development there were two mounting plans with different operating modes (for example, mounting plan 1 shown in Figure 14-15 (B) and mounting plan 1 shown in Figure 14-15 (C)). Mounting plan 2) was devised, but due to development reasons, the second non-mountable movable object itself could not be mounted, so as the second pseudo movable object display Z200, a movement corresponding to mounting plan 1 explained below was used. display and a moving display corresponding to installation plan 2 can be executed.

As shown in FIGS. 14-15 (B) and (C), the second non-mounted movable body M200 that is not mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a production part M200A that is circular in shape when viewed from the front and decorated on the front surface. The lower end of the mechanism part M100B is supported by the first drive mechanism M201A disposed on the lower side of the image display device 5 (Installation plan 1: B)), and a second presentation device (installation plan 2: see FIG. 14-15(C)) supported by a second drive mechanism M201B in which the upper end of the mechanism part M100B is disposed above the image display device 5. are incorporated into each of the.

As shown in FIG. 14-15(B), the first drive mechanism M201A includes a movable body motor (not shown) provided on the back side of the base member M202, and a rotating body rotated by the movable body motor (not shown). M203, and a guide rail M204 that guides the production section M200A in a vertically movable manner. The mechanism part M200B has one end supported so as to be rotatable about a rotation axis pointing in the front-rear direction with respect to the base member M202, and a connecting shaft M205 protruding from the peripheral edge of the front surface of the rotary body M203 that slides. A long hole M206 is formed into which it can be inserted.

Therefore, the second non-mounted movable body M200 driven by the first drive mechanism M201A rotates the rotating body M203 by the movable body motor (not shown) and rotates the mechanism part M200B around the rotation axis. The first specific origin position below (the origin position indicated by the two-dot chain line in Fig. 14-15 (B)) and the first specific production position above the first specific origin position (indicated by the solid line in Fig. 14-15 (B)) It is possible to move vertically between the two positions.

In addition, the production section M200A includes a rotating section M207 that is circular in front view, and a plurality of (for example, 5) light emitting sections M208A to M208E provided on the rotating section M207 with non-mounted movable LEDs (not shown) that can emit light. , the non-mounted movable LED (not shown) lights up while the rotating part M207 rotates, and the light emitting parts M208A to M208E can emit light in multiple colors (for example, 7 colors). There is.

Further, as shown in FIG. 14-15(C), the second drive mechanism M201B includes a movable body motor M212, a drive gear M213 fixed to the drive shaft of the movable body motor M212, and a driven gear that meshes with the drive gear M213. M214, and a rotation shaft M215 that faces in the left-right direction and has a driven gear M214 fixed to the left end thereof. Further, a spiral groove M215A is formed on the outer periphery of the rotation shaft M215, and a mechanism section M200B extending upward from the production section M200A has a locking mechanism on the inner circumferential surface that can be locked in the groove M215A. (not shown), and rotation about the rotation axis M215 is regulated.

Therefore, the second non-mounted movable body M200 driven by the second drive mechanism M201B moves the second specific origin position on the left side (Fig. 14-15 (C ), the second specific production position on the right side (the position indicated by the solid line in FIG. 14-15(C)) is movable in the left-right direction, and the second specific origin It is possible to stop at a second intermediate performance position between the position and the second specific performance position.

As shown in FIG. 14-15(A), the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is an image imitating the second non-mounted movable body M200, and includes a production display section Z200A corresponding to the production section M200A, and a mechanism section. It has a mechanism display section Z200B corresponding to M200B, a rotating display section Z207 corresponding to rotating section M207, and light emitting display sections Z208A to Z208E corresponding to light emitting sections M208A to M208E.

In addition, at the beginning of development, it was planned to install a full-color LED as a non-mounted movable object LED (not shown), but due to cost reasons, it may be necessary to install a single-color LED, but the second pseudo-movable object display Z200 By doing so, the light emitting display sections Z208A to Z208E can be displayed in a plurality of colors (for example, seven colors) without considering cost.

The display is movable in the vertical direction between the first specific initial display position corresponding to the first specific origin position and the first specific effect display position corresponding to the first specific effect position (Fig. 14-16 (C)), the display can be moved in the left-right direction between a second specific initial display position corresponding to the second specific origin position and a second specific effect display position corresponding to the second specific effect position (see FIG. (See 14-17(B)).

Next, the movement mode of the mounted movable body 32 and the movement display mode of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo movable body display Z200 will be described based on FIGS. 14-16 and 14-17. 14-16, (A) shows the movable range of the non-mounted movable body, (B) shows the movable display area of the first pseudo movable body display, and (C) shows the movable display area of the second pseudo movable body display. It is a diagram. FIGS. 14-17 are diagrams in which (A) shows a specific movement display area of the first pseudo-movable object display, and (B) shows a specific movement display area of the second pseudo-movable object display.

As shown in FIG. 14-16(A), the mounted movable body 32 has an origin position where the lower part of the presentation part 32A overlaps the upper part of the display area of the image display apparatus 5, and an abbreviation of the display area of the image display apparatus 5. It is possible to move vertically between a production position where the production section 32A and the mechanism section 32B overlap in the center, and the moving distance from the origin position to the production position is L1.

As shown in FIG. 14-16(B), the first pseudo movable object display Z100 has a first initial display position where the lower part of the effect display section Z100A is displayed at the upper position of the display area of the image display device 5; The first initial display is movable in the vertical direction between a first effect display position where the effect display part Z100A and the mechanism display part Z100B are displayed at a position approximately below the center of the display area of the image display device 5, and a first initial display. The moving display distance from the position to the first effect display position is L2.

As shown in FIG. 14-17(A), the first pseudo-movable object display Z100 has a first specific initial display position where the upper part of the effect display part Z100A is displayed at the lower position of the display area of the image display device 5. , a first specific effect display position where the effect display part Z100A and the mechanism display part Z100B are displayed at a position substantially above the center of the display area of the image display device 5, and the first specific effect display position can be moved in the vertical direction. The specific movement display distance from the specific initial display position to the first specific effect display position is set to L2A.

In this way, the first pseudo movable body display Z100, like the first non-mounted movable body M100, has a first initial display position corresponding to the first origin position and a first effect display position corresponding to the first effect position. Not only can the movable range between them be moved up and down, but also specific movement is possible between a second initial display position that does not correspond to the first origin position and a second effect display position that does not correspond to the first effect position. The range can be displayed by moving up and down.

Next, as shown in FIG. 14-16(C), the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is displayed at the first specific initial stage in which the lower part of the effect display section Z200A is displayed at the upper position of the display area of the image display device 5. The display is movable in the vertical direction between the display position and a first specific effect display position where the effect display part Z200A and the mechanism display part Z200B are displayed at approximately the center position of the display area of the image display device 5, The moving display distance from the first specific initial display position to the first specific effect display position is set to L3.

Further, as shown in FIG. 14-17(B), the second pseudo movable object display Z200 is a second specific display in which the right part of the effect display part Z200A is displayed at the left position of the display area of the image display device 5. The display can be moved in the left-right direction between the initial display position and a second specific effect display position where the effect display part Z200A and the mechanism display part Z200B are displayed at approximately the center position of the display area of the image display device 5. , the moving display distance from the second specific initial display position to the second specific effect display position is L3A.

In this way, the second pseudo movable body display Z200, like the second non-mounted movable body M200, displays the first specific initial display position corresponding to the first specific origin position and the first specific performance corresponding to the first specific performance position. Not only can the movable range between the display position and the display position be moved in the vertical direction, but also a second specific initial display position that does not correspond to the first specific origin position and a second specific effect display that does not correspond to the first specific effect position It is possible to move and display a specific movable range between the positions in the left and right directions.

Further, the movement display distance L2 of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is longer than the movement distance L1 of the mounted movable body 32, and the movement display distance L3 of the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is longer than the movement distance L1 of the mounted movable body 32. (L2>L1>L3). Further, the movement display distance L2A of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is longer than the movement distance L1 of the mounted movable body 32, and the movement display distance L3A of the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is the movement distance L1 of the mounted movable body 32. and movement display distance L2A (L3A>L2A>L1).

In this way, the first pseudo movable object display Z100 and the second pseudo movable object display Z200 can move and display a movement display distance (L2, L2A, L3A) that is longer than the movement distance L1 of the mounted movable object 32. Therefore, it is possible to realize a more impactful performance than the mounted movable body 32.

As shown in FIG. 14-16, the first pseudo movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo movable body display Z200 are composed of effect display parts Z100A, Z200A and mechanism display parts Z100B, Z200B. is extended to the edge of the display area of the image display device 5, so that the display is performed as if by the drive mechanism M101, first drive mechanism M201A, and second drive mechanism M201B arranged on the side of the image display device 5. Since the display sections Z100A and Z200A appear to be supported, it is possible to more realistically express a moving display.

In other words, a pseudo-movable object display (pseudo-movable object image) refers to a movable object as a structure that can be operated by a drive mechanism, such as a movable object mounted on the pachinko game machine 1, a movable object not mounted on the pachinko game machine 1, a virtual movable object, etc. This is a simulated display, and is different from an image that does not have a mechanism display section, such as the development notification image Z300 (see FIG. 14-25 (H)).

In addition, some display modes may be different from those of the modeled movable body, displays that cannot be realized with the modeled movable body (for example, deformed display, deformed display, etc.), or movement displays (for example, high-speed movement display, etc.) ) is possible as long as it is possible.

In addition, the pseudo-movable object display (pseudo-movable object image) may be an image or moving image created by a computer or the like, or may be an image or moving image of an actually created movable object as a structure. There may be. Furthermore, when these pseudo-movable object displays move, sound effects that are the same as or similar to the sound effects that are output when moving the movable object or the impact sounds that occur when the movable object stops are output, and the pseudo-movable object displays are displayed in a dramatic manner. When the position is reached, the vibration motor 61 vibrates the push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc., and the speakers 8L and 8R output deep bass to generate a pseudo shock, making it more realistic. It becomes possible to provide performances to players.

Next, details of various effects using the above-mentioned mounted movable body 32, first pseudo movable body display Z100, and second pseudo movable body display Z200 will be explained using FIG. 14-10. FIG. 14-10 is a diagram for explaining the content and structure of various effects in Super Reach.

(Preview performance A)
As shown in FIG. 14-10, the preview effect A is executable when the base state is low, and the first specific effect is executed after the second pseudo movable object display Z200 is displayed at the first specific initial display position. After being moved to the display position, the light emitting display sections Z208A to Z208E display light in a color corresponding to the determined performance pattern, thereby suggesting the possibility (expectation level) of a jackpot.

In addition, the second pseudo movable body display Z200 that was moved and displayed from the first specific initial display position to the first specific effect display position is erased after being moved and displayed from the first specific effect display position to the first specific initial display position. (See Figures 14-25 (C) to (F)).

In detail, when pattern PYA-1 is determined in the preview performance A type determination process of step 241SGS278A, which will be described later, the light emitting display parts Z208A to Z208E are displayed in white, and when pattern PYA-2 is determined, the light emitting display parts are displayed in white. The display parts Z208A to Z208E are displayed in blue. When pattern PYA-3 is determined, the light emitting display parts Z208A to Z208E are displayed in green. When pattern PYA-4 is determined, the light emitting display parts Z208A to Z208E are displayed in green. Displayed in red. Therefore, the light emitting display color of the light emitting display sections Z208A to Z208E with the highest expectation of jackpot is red. Note that the emitted light color can be changed in various ways, and if a jackpot is confirmed, the emitted light may be made to emit gold or rainbow colors.

(Preview performance B)
Preview effect B is executable when in the high base state, and the first pseudo movable body display Z100 moves from the first initial display position to the first effect display position or from the second initial display position to the second effect display position. The variable display result is a jackpot depending on whether the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is moved and displayed from the second specific initial display position to the second intermediate effect display position or the second specific effect display position. This suggests the possibility (expectation level) of

In addition, the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 that has been moved and displayed at the first effect display position is erased without being moved and displayed from the first effect display position to the first initial display position (Figure 14-34 (A) (See ~(C)). Furthermore, the first pseudo movable body display Z100 that has been moved and displayed at the second effect display position is erased without being moved and displayed from the second effect display position to the second initial display position (Figure 14-34 (D) (See ~(F)).

Further, the second pseudo movable body display Z200 that has been moved and displayed at the second intermediate effect display position is erased without being moved and displayed from the second intermediate effect display position to the second specific initial display position (Figure 14-33 (See (A) to (C)). Further, the second pseudo movable body display Z200 that has been moved and displayed at the second specific effect display position is erased without being moved and displayed from the second specific effect display position to the second specific initial display position (Figure 14-33 (See (D) to (F)).

More specifically, when pattern PYB-1 is determined in the preview performance B type determination process of step 241SGS278A, which will be described later, the second pseudo movable body display Z200 moves from the second specific initial display position to the second intermediate performance display position. is displayed, and when pattern PYB-2 is determined, the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is moved and displayed from the second specific initial display position to the second specific effect display position, and when pattern PYB-3 is determined, the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is displayed. The first pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed from the first initial display position to the first effect display position, and when pattern PYB-4 is determined, the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved from the second initial display position to the second effect display position. The image is moved to the display position and displayed. Therefore, when the first pseudo-movable object display Z100 is moved and displayed, the jackpot expectation is higher than when the second pseudo-movable object display Z200 is moved and displayed, and the moving display pattern with the highest jackpot expectation is the first This is a pattern in which the pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed from the second initial display position to the second effect display position.

In addition, it is better for the first pseudo movable body display Z100 to move and display from the first initial display position to the first effect display position or from the second initial display position to the second effect display position, and for the second pseudo movable body display Z200 to move from the second effect display position to the second effect display position. This is faster than moving and displaying from the specific initial display position to the second intermediate effect display position or the second specific effect display position.

(Development production A)
In the development effect A, the development to a weak super reach is notified by the mounted movable body 32 moving (falling) from the origin position to the effect position (see FIG. 14-25 (H)). The mounted movable body 32, which has been moved from the origin position to the production position, rises from the production position to the origin position and returns after a predetermined time has elapsed.

In detail, if execution is determined in the development performance A type determination process of step 241SGS278B, which will be described later, the mounted movable body 32 falls from the origin position to the performance position at the performance start timing, and the development to weak super reach occurs. will be notified (see Figure 14-25 (H)). On the other hand, if non-execution is determined, the mounted movable body 32 does not fall from the origin position at the production start timing, and the development to weak super reach is notified by displaying the development notification image Z300 on the image display device 5. (See Figure 14-25 (G)). In other words, non-execution is determined in the development performance A type determination process, which means that a performance pattern is determined that notifies the development to weak super reach by displaying the development notification image Z300 without causing the mounted movable body 32 to fall. It is.

Incidentally, the development notification image Z300 is an image (display) imitating the mounted movable body 32, but like the first pseudo movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo movable body display Z200, it is similar to the movable body. Unlike the pseudo movable object display that is displayed moving, it is an image (display) that only imitates the effect section 32A, and is displayed in a display mode different from the movement of the mounted movable object 32. For example, at the performance start timing, the display is displayed from the beginning at the performance display position corresponding to the performance position of the mounted movable body 32 without any moving display.

(Development suggestion performance)
The development suggestion performance can be executed before development performance B is executed, and the second pseudo movable object display Z200 is displayed at the first specific initial display position and then moved and displayed to the first specific performance display position. After that, based on the fact that the repeated tapping operation of the push button 31B by the player (operation in which the detection signal of the push sensor 35B is detected multiple times within a predetermined period) is detected during the valid operation period, the light is emitted. By changing the display parts Z208A to Z208E to the light emitting display color corresponding to the determined effect pattern, it is suggested that the display color of the character image Z310, which will be described later, may be executed, that is, the possibility that the advanced effect B will be executed.

In addition, in the feature section 241SG, an operation promotion image (for example, an image imitating the push button 31B) that promotes the repeated pressing operation of the push button 31B during the valid operation period in which the repeated pressing operation of the push button 31B in the development suggestion performance is valid. Although the embodiment has been exemplified in which the button LED 62 (see FIG. 14-2) built into the push button 31B is lit without displaying it on the image display device 5, the repeated pressing operation of the push button 31B is promoted. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the image display device 5 may display an operation promotion display that promotes repeated pressing of the push button 31B during the valid operation period.

In addition, the second pseudo movable body display Z200 moved and displayed from the first specific initial display position to the first specific effect display position is such that the character image Z310 related to the model is in the first specific display area of the image display device 5. After being displayed so as to overlap (act) with the second pseudo movable object display Z200 in the area including the effect display position, it is erased without being moved and displayed from the first specific effect display position to the first specific initial display position. (See Figures 14-26 (A) to (J) and Figure 14-27 (A)).

More specifically, when pattern PS-1 is determined in the development suggestion production type determination process of step 241SGS278B, which will be described later, the light emitting display parts Z208A to Z208E remain white even if the push button 31B is repeatedly pressed, and do not change. When pattern PS-2 is determined, the light-emitting display sections Z208A to Z208E change from white to blue in response to repeated presses of the push button 31B, and when pattern PS-3 is determined, the light-emitting display sections Z208A to Z208E changes in the order of white → blue → green according to the repeated pressing of the push button 31B, and when pattern PS-4 is determined, the light emitting display parts Z208A to Z208E change from white → blue → according to the repeated pressing of the push button 31B. Changes from green to red. Therefore, the final light-emitting display color of the light-emitting display sections Z208A to Z208E with the highest degree of expectation for execution of the advanced effect B is red.

Note that the emitted light color and the change pattern of the emitted light color can be changed in various ways. For example, the emitted light color may change from white to red without changing to blue or green, or the emitted light display color may be set as a color other than white from the beginning. . In addition, the number of lights on the plurality of light emitting display sections Z208A to Z208E is increased in response to repeated presses of the push button 31B, so that the degree of expectation for the execution of the development effect B is higher when the number of lights on is larger than when the number of lights is small. It's okay. Furthermore, the degree of expectation may vary depending on the color of the emitted light and the number of emitted light.

In addition, in the feature section 241SG, if the repeated press operation of the push button 31B is not detected during the valid operation period, or if the amount of repeated press operation is small, even if any of patterns PS-2 to PS-4 is determined, the exemplifies a mode in which the luminescent display color does not change according to each pattern PS-2 to PS-4, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the continuous press operation of the push button 31B is not detected during the valid operation period. Alternatively, even if the amount of repeated tapping operations is small, the light emitting display color may be changed to correspond to the determined patterns PS-2 to PS-4 at the timing when the valid operation period ends.

Furthermore, the character image Z310 displayed after the valid operation period ends is a character image Z310 of a color corresponding to the light emitting display color of the light emitting display sections Z208A to Z208E when the valid operation period ends. There is.

Note that character images Z310 of different types may be displayed depending on the luminescent display colors of the luminescent display sections Z208A to Z208E when the valid operation period ends. Furthermore, even if the light emitting display colors of the light emitting display sections Z208A to Z208E do not change even though one of the patterns PS-2 to PS-4 is determined as described above, the determined pattern PS-2 to PS-4 The character image Z310 may be displayed in a color corresponding to the color (different color from the light emitting display color of the light emitting display sections Z208A to Z208E). Further, the light emitting display color of the light emitting display sections Z208A to Z208E may be changed to the same color as the character image Z310 at the timing when the character image Z310 is displayed.

(Development performance B)
The developed effect B is that the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 moves from the first specific initial display position to the first specific effect display position, thereby developing into a strong super reach effect and executing the decisive effect (game content that is advantageous to the person) is announced (see Figure 14-27 (D)). In addition, the second pseudo movable body display Z200 that has been moved and displayed at the first specific effect display position is erased without being moved and displayed from the first specific effect display position to the first specific initial display position (Figure 14-27 ( (See D) to (F)).

In addition, when the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is erased without moving and displaying from the first specific effect display position to the first specific initial display position, a reach title is displayed in the display area including the first specific effect display position. By displaying the image Z51 so as to overlap the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 in a manner that indicates that it is the time to start displaying the image, the variable display result becomes a jackpot (it is controlled to a jackpot gaming state). ) is suggested.

In detail, if execution is determined in the advanced performance B type determination process of step 241SGS280, which will be described later, the second pseudo movable object display Z200 is moved from the first specific initial display position to the first specific performance display position at the performance start timing. By moving and displaying, the development to a strong super reach is announced (see Figure 14-27 (D)). On the other hand, if non-execution is determined, the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is not moved and displayed from the first specific initial display position to the first specific effect display position at the effect start timing, and the reach title image Z51 is displayed on the image display device 5. The development to a strong super reach is notified by displaying it in a ready state (see FIG. 14-27(C)). In other words, when non-execution is determined in the development effect B type determination process, the reach title image Z51 is displayed in a prepared state without moving and displaying the second pseudo movable object display Z200, thereby leading to a strong super reach. The effect is to determine a performance pattern that informs the development of.

(Decision performance)
The deciding performance is a performance that concludes the battle between the friendly character and the enemy character that was being executed in the super reach performance, and notifies whether or not the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state. Specifically, for example, after a display is performed in which the friendly character deals the final blow to the enemy character, a display is performed to encourage the player to operate the push button 31B or the stick controller 31A, and the push button 31B or the stick controller 31A is The enemy character is moved by moving the mounted movable body 32 from the origin position to the production position at the timing when the operation of the push button 31B or the stick controller 31A is detected and the operation valid period ends. Either a confirmed jackpot notification in which the character is defeated and wins the battle, or a confirmed loss notification in which the mounted movable body 32 is not moved from the origin position to the performance position and is defeated by the enemy character and loses the battle is performed.

Patterns KB-1 and KV-1 are selected when the variable display result is a failure, and are patterns in which an ally character is defeated by an enemy character and loses the battle, and a failure confirmation notification is performed.Patterns KB-2 and KV-2 is a pattern that is selected when the variable display result is a jackpot, and a jackpot confirmed notification is performed in which the ally character defeats the enemy character and wins the battle.

In addition, in patterns KB-2 and KV-2, the timing when the operation of the push button 31B or stick controller 31A is detected, or the timing when the operation valid period ends without detecting the operation of the push button 31B or stick controller 31A. Then, a vibration effect is performed in which the vibration motor 61 is driven for a predetermined period (for example, about 10 seconds) to vibrate the push button 31B or the stick controller 31A.

In addition, if execution of pattern KB-2 or KV-2 is determined in the decision performance type determination process of step 241SGS282, which will be described later, the mounted movable body 32 moves from the origin position to the performance position at the falling timing of the mounted movable body 32. After moving to , a jackpot confirmed notification is performed, and after returning from the production position to the origin position, the first pseudo movable body display Z100 moves from the first initial display position to the first production display position and displays the variable decorative pattern. The display will resume. Then, the first pseudo movable body display Z100 moves from the first effect display position to the first initial display position, and the variable display of the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, so that the variable display result becomes a jackpot (Fig. 14 -29 (E) to (G), see Figures 14-30 (A) to (F)).

On the other hand, when it is decided to execute pattern KB-1 or KV-1, the movable mounted body 32 does not move from the origin position at the timing of the fall of the movable mounted body 32, and the effect image Z57 in which the glass is cracked is displayed. A failure confirmation notification is performed, and the variable display result becomes a failure (see FIGS. 14-29 (H) to (J)).

Next, regarding the jackpot expectation level according to the execution status of the advanced performance A using the mounted movable body 32 and the advanced performance B using the second pseudo movable body display Z200 in super reach β and γ (strong super reach) , will be explained based on FIG. 14-11. FIG. 14-11 is a diagram showing the jackpot expectation level according to the execution status of the advanced performance A and the advanced performance B.

As shown in Figure 14-11, pattern A is a pattern in which both development effect A and development effect B are not executed during the variable display period of the symbol based on the variation pattern of super reach β and γ (strong super reach). Yes, pattern B is a pattern in which the development effect A is not executed and the development effect B is executed, pattern C is a pattern in which the development effect A is executed and the development effect B is not executed, and pattern D is a pattern in which the development effect A is executed and the development effect B is not executed. This is a pattern in which both the development effect A and the development effect B are executed.

In the above, the jackpot expectation is set to increase in the order of pattern A<pattern B<pattern C<pattern D. That is, in the variable display period of the symbol based on the variation pattern of super reach β or super reach γ, development effect A using the mounted movable body 32 and development effect B using the second pseudo movable body display Z200 are executed. In this case, the ratio of being controlled to a jackpot game state (jackpot expectation level) is higher than when the development performance B is executed without the development performance A being executed. Also, the ratio of control to a jackpot game state when development performance A and development performance B are executed is higher than when development performance A is executed without execution of development performance B (jackpot expectation level) is high. Furthermore, when the advanced performance A and the advanced performance B are executed, the ratio of being controlled to the jackpot game state (the jackpot expectation degree) is higher than when the advanced performance A and the developed performance B are not executed.

FIG. 14-18 is a flowchart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the production control process shown in FIG. In the variable display start setting process, the production control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the first variable display start command reception flag is on (step 241SGS271). If the first variable display start command reception flag is in the ON state (step 241SGS271; Y), the buffer numbers "1-0" to "1-4" of the first special figure pending memory in the reception command buffer at the time of start winning are set. Various command data and various flags stored in correspondence are shifted upward by one buffer number (step 241SGS272). Note that the contents of buffer number "1-0" cannot be shifted because there is no destination to shift them to, so they are erased.

Specifically, various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with buffer number "1-1" in the first special figure reservation memory are shifted to be stored in correspondence with buffer number "1-0". Then, the various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-2" of the first special figure reservation memory are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-1", and the The various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-3" of the 1st special figure pending memory are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-2", and the 1st special figure Various command data and various flags stored in association with buffer numbers "1-4" in the pending storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with buffer numbers "1-3".

If the first variable display start command reception flag is off in step 241SGS271 (step 241SGS271; N), it is determined whether the second variable display start command reception flag is on (step 241SGS273). If the second variable display start command reception flag is off (step 241SGS273; N), the variable display start setting process is ended, and if the second variable display start command reception flag is on (step 241SGS273; Y ), the various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer numbers "2-0" to "2-4" of the second special figure pending memory in the start winning reception command buffer 109SG194A are stored in one buffer number. It is shifted upward by minutes (step 241SGS274). Note that the contents of buffer number "2-0" cannot be shifted because there is no destination to shift them to, so they are erased.

Specifically, various command data and various flags stored in association with buffer number "2-1" in the second special figure reservation memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "2-0". Then, the various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "2-2" in the second special figure reservation memory are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "2-1", and the The various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "2-3" of the 2nd special figure pending memory are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "2-2", and the 2nd special figure Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-4" in the pending storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-3".

After executing step 241SGS272 or step 241SGS274, the production control CPU 120 reads the fluctuation pattern designation command from the fluctuation pattern designation command storage area (step 241SGS275).

Next, the display result (stop symbol) of the decorative pattern is determined according to the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (that is, the received display result designation command) (step 241SGS276). In this case, the performance control CPU 120 determines the stop symbols of the decorative symbols according to the display result specified by the display result designation command, and stores data indicating the determined stop symbols of the decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display result storage area. do.

In addition, in this characteristic part 241SG, when the received variable display result designation command is the second variable display result designation command corresponding to probability variable jackpot A, the performance control CPU 120, for example, displays 3 symbols as "7" as the stop symbols. ” to determine the combination of decorative patterns (jackpot pattern). In addition, if the received variable display result designation command is the third variable display result designation command corresponding to probability variable jackpot B, multiple combinations of odd symbols other than "7" (for example, "111", Decorative pattern combinations such as "333", "555", "999", etc.) are selected. In addition, when the received variable display result designation command is the 4th variable display result designation command that corresponds to probability variable jackpot C, the stop symbols are "334" and "778", which are the same chances as the small hit. Decide from among them. In addition, when the received variable display result designation command is the fifth variable display result designation command corresponding to a non-probable variable jackpot, the performance control CPU 120, for example, selects a decorative pattern in which three symbols are arranged in an even number as a stop symbol. Determine the combination (jackpot symbol). In addition, if the received variable display result designation command is the 6th variable display result designation command that corresponds to a small hit, the stop symbols are "334" and "778", which are the same chances as the probability variable jackpot C. Decide from among them. In addition, if the received variable display result designation command is the first variable display result designation command that corresponds to a loss, a decorative pattern in which three symbols are irregular as a stop symbol, and a combination other than the above-mentioned chance. (missing pattern) is determined.

In determining these stop symbols, the production control CPU 120 extracts random numbers for determining the stop symbols, and uses a stop symbol determination table in which numerical values are associated with data indicating combinations of decorative symbols. Then, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol can be determined. That is, the stop symbols may be determined by selecting data indicating a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to numerical values that match the extracted random numbers.

Next, the production control CPU 120 checks whether the variation pattern in the variable display is a normal reach variation pattern or a super reach variation pattern (step 241SGS277), and if it is a normal reach variation pattern or a super reach variation pattern (step 241SGS277). ;Y), executes the preview effect type determination process shown in FIG. 21(A) is executed to determine the performance pattern (performance type) of the advanced performance A in the variable display (step 241SGS278B). When the pattern is not a normal reach variation pattern or a super reach variation pattern (step 241SGS277; N), the process proceeds to step 241SGS283.

As shown in FIG. 14-19, in the preview performance type determination process, the performance control CPU 120 first specifies the variable display result and the fluctuation pattern (step 241SGS301). The variable display result is a variable display for specifying the variable display result (loss, probability variable jackpot A, probability variable jackpot B, probability variable jackpot C, non-probable variable jackpot, small hit) transmitted from the main board 11 at the start of the variable display. It can be specified by the variable display result designation command stored in the variable display result designation command storage area for storing the result designation command. Furthermore, as described above, the variation pattern can be specified using the variation pattern specification command stored in the variation pattern specification command storage area. In addition, in this feature section 241SG, the targets of the preview performance are normal reach and super reach, so specifically, the variable display results are jackpot (probable variable jackpot A, probability variable jackpot B, probability variable jackpot C, non-probable variable jackpot) or miss. The variable display result designation command may be used to specify whether the variation pattern is normal reach or super reach, and the variation pattern specification command may be used to specify whether the variation pattern is normal reach or super reach. Incidentally, the case of probability variable jackpot C may be excluded from the preview performance.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the gaming state is a low base state (time saving state) (step 241SGS302), and if it is a low base state (step 241SGS302; Y), the random number for determining the preview performance is determined. At the same time, the performance pattern of the preview performance A is determined using the preview performance type determination table A shown in FIG. 14-20(A) (step 241SGS303). On the other hand, if it is not in the low base state, that is, if it is in the high base state (step 241SGS302; N), a random number for determining the preview performance is extracted, and a table B for determining the preview performance type shown in FIG. 14-20 (B) is extracted. The performance pattern of preview performance B is determined using (step 241SGS304).

As shown in Figure 14-20(A), in the table for determining the type of preview effect A, "Pattern PYA-1", "Pattern PYA-2", "Pattern PYA-3", and "Pattern PYA-4" are selected. For each, if the variable display result is a variable probability jackpot (any of variable probability jackpot A, variable probability jackpot B, variable probability jackpot C), if it is a non-probable variable jackpot, if the super reach is off, if the normal reach is off. A different determination value is assigned to each of them so that the number of determination values shown in FIG. 14-20(A) is obtained.

Specifically, in the case where the variable display result is a variable jackpot, 5 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYA-1" and 15 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYA-2". 30 determination values are assigned to "pattern PYA-3" and 50 determination values are assigned to "pattern PYA-4". In addition, in the case where the variable display result is a non-probable variable jackpot, 5 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYA-1" and 15 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYA-2". , 50 determination values are assigned to "pattern PYA-3", and 30 determination values are assigned to "pattern PYA-4". In addition, when the variable display result is out of super reach, 50 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYA-1" and 30 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYA-2". , 15 determination values are assigned to "pattern PYA-3", and 30 determination values are assigned to "pattern PYA-4". In addition, in the case where the variable display result is out of the normal reach, 80 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYA-1", 10 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYA-2", Eight determination values are assigned to "pattern PYA-3" and two determination values are assigned to "pattern PYA-4."

By assigning judgment values in this way, if a variable display results in a variable jackpot, "Pattern PYA-4" will be determined at the highest rate, and in the case of a non-probable variable jackpot, "Pattern PYA-4" PYA-3" is determined at the highest rate, and when the super reach is off or the normal reach is off, the pattern PYA-1 is determined at the highest rate. In other words, "Pattern PYA-4" has the highest jackpot expectation, and "Pattern PYA-4" > "Pattern PYA-3" > "Pattern PYA-2" > "Pattern PYA-1" has the lowest jackpot expectation. Become. Note that the above determined ratio can be changed in various ways.

As shown in Figure 14-20(B), in the table for determining the type of preview effect B, "Pattern PYB-1", "Pattern PYB-2", "Pattern PYB-3", and "Pattern PYB-4" are selected. For each, if the variable display result is a variable probability jackpot (any of variable probability jackpot A, variable probability jackpot B, variable probability jackpot C), if it is a non-probable variable jackpot, if the super reach is off, if the normal reach is off. A different judgment value is assigned to each of them so that the number of judgment values shown in FIG. 14-20(B) is obtained.

Specifically, in the case where the variable display result is a variable jackpot, 5 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYB-1" and 15 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYB-2". 30 determination values are assigned to "pattern PYB-3" and 50 determination values are assigned to "pattern PYB-4". In addition, in the case where the variable display result is a non-probable variable jackpot, 5 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYB-1" and 15 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYB-2". , 50 determination values are assigned to "pattern PYB-3", and 30 determination values are assigned to "pattern PYB-4". In addition, when the variable display result is out of super reach, 50 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYB-1" and 30 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYB-2". , 15 determination values are assigned to "pattern PYB-3", and 30 determination values are assigned to "pattern PYB-4". In addition, in the case where the variable display result is out of the normal reach, 80 judgment values are assigned to "pattern PYB-1", 10 judgment values are assigned to "pattern PYB-2", Eight determination values are assigned to "pattern PYB-3" and two determination values are assigned to "pattern PYB-4."

By assigning judgment values in this way, in the case of a probability variable jackpot in the variable display, "Pattern PYB-4" is determined at the highest rate, and in the case of a non-probability variable jackpot, "Pattern PYB-4" is determined at the highest rate. PYB-3'' is determined at the highest rate, and when the super reach is off or the normal reach is off, the pattern PYB-1 is determined at the highest rate. In other words, "Pattern PYB-4" has the highest jackpot expectation, and "Pattern PYB-3" > "Pattern PYB-3" > "Pattern PYB-2" > "Pattern PYB-1" has the lowest jackpot expectation. Become. Note that the above determined ratio can be changed in various ways.

In addition, in the feature section 241SG, an example is given in which the determination ratio of each pattern is the same in the table for determining the type of preview performance A for the low base state and the table for determining the type of preview performance B for the high base state, The present invention is not limited to this, and the determination ratio of each pattern may be made different between the table for determining the type of preview performance A and the table for determining the type of preview performance B.

Returning to FIG. 14-19, in step 241SGS305, the preview performance type determined in step 241SGS303 or step 241SGS304 is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 (step 241SGS305). Then, the process proceeds to step 241SGS306, and a period until the start of the performance is set in the preview performance start wait timer (step 241SGS306), and the process is ended.

Next, as shown in FIG. 14-21, in the advanced performance A type determination process, the performance control CPU 120 first specifies the variable display result and the fluctuation pattern (step 241SGS311). The variable display result is a variable display for specifying the variable display result (loss, probability variable jackpot A, probability variable jackpot B, probability variable jackpot C, non-probable variable jackpot, small hit) transmitted from the main board 11 at the start of the variable display. It can be specified by the variable display result designation command stored in the variable display result designation command storage area for storing the result designation command. Furthermore, as described above, the variation pattern can be specified using the variation pattern specification command stored in the variation pattern specification command storage area. In addition, in this feature section 241SG, since the target of development effect A is normal reach and super reach, specifically, the variable display result is a jackpot (probable variable jackpot A, probability variable jackpot B, probability variable jackpot C, non-probable variable jackpot) or It is sufficient to specify whether the variation pattern is normal reach or super reach using the variable display result specification command, and to specify whether the variation pattern is normal reach or super reach using the variation pattern specification command. Incidentally, the case of probability variable jackpot C may be excluded as a target of development performance A.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 extracts a random number for determining the type of advanced performance, and determines the performance pattern of the advanced performance A using the table for determining the type of advanced performance A shown in FIG. 14-21(B) (step 241SGS312 ).

As shown in Figure 14-21 (B), in the table for determining the type of advanced performance A, the variable display results are variable display results for each pattern of "non-execution" and "execution". B, Probable Variable Jackpot C), Non-probable Variable Jackpot, Super Reach Miss, and Normal Reach Miss, the judgment values are shown in Figure 14-21 (B). It is assigned as a value number.

Specifically, in the case where the variable display result is a variable jackpot, 10 determination values are assigned to "non-execution" and 90 determination values are assigned to "execution". Furthermore, in the case where the variable display result is a non-probable variable jackpot, 20 determination values are assigned to "non-execution" and 80 determination values are assigned to "execution". Furthermore, in the case where the variable display result is outside the super reach, 80 determination values are assigned to "non-execution" and 20 determination values are assigned to "execution". Furthermore, in the case where the variable display result is outside the normal reach, 100 determination values are assigned to "non-execution". In other words, when the normal reach is off, the development effect A is not executed because it does not develop into a weak super reach effect.

By assigning judgment values in this way, in the case of a definite variable jackpot or non-probable variable jackpot in the variable display, "Execution" is determined at the highest rate, and if the super reach is off or the normal reach is off, “Not executed” is determined at the highest rate. In other words, when the development effect A is executed, the expectation level of a jackpot is higher than when it is not executed. Note that the above determined ratio can be changed in various ways.

Returning to FIG. 14-21(A), in step 241SGS313, the advanced effect A type determined in step 241SGS312 is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 (step 241SGS313). Then, the process proceeds to step 241SGS314, and a period until the start of the performance is set in the advanced performance A start wait timer (step 241SGS314), and the process is ended.

Returning to FIG. 14-18, after executing the process of step 241SGS278B, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the fluctuation pattern in the variable display is a super reach fluctuation pattern (step 241SGS279), and If it is a pattern (step 241SGS279; Y), execute the development suggestion performance type determination process shown in FIG. 14-22(A) to determine the performance pattern (performance type) of the development suggestion performance in the variable display (step 241SGS280), executes the advanced effect B type determination process shown in FIG. The decision production B type determination process shown in A) is executed to determine the performance pattern (performance type) of the decision production in the variable display (step 241SGS282). When it is not a super reach variation pattern, that is, when it is a normal reach variation pattern (step 241SGS279; N), the process advances to step 241SGS283.

As shown in FIG. 14-22(A), in the development suggestion performance type determination process, the performance control CPU 120 first specifies the variable display result and the fluctuation pattern (step 241SGS321). The variable display result is a variable display for specifying the variable display result (loss, probability variable jackpot A, probability variable jackpot B, probability variable jackpot C, non-probable variable jackpot, small hit) transmitted from the main board 11 at the start of the variable display. It can be specified by the variable display result designation command stored in the variable display result designation command storage area for storing the result designation command. Furthermore, as described above, the variation pattern can be specified using the variation pattern specification command stored in the variation pattern specification command storage area. In addition, in this feature section 241SG, the targets of the preview performance are normal reach and super reach, so specifically, the variable display results are jackpot (probable variable jackpot A, probability variable jackpot B, probability variable jackpot C, non-probable variable jackpot) or miss. The variable display result designation command may be used to specify whether the variation pattern is normal reach or super reach, and the variation pattern specification command may be used to specify whether the variation pattern is normal reach or super reach. Incidentally, the case of probability variable jackpot C may be excluded from the preview performance.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 extracts a random number for determining a development suggestion performance, and determines a performance pattern for the development suggestion performance using the table for determining the type of development suggestion performance shown in FIG. 14-22(B) (step 241SGS322 ).

As shown in Figure 14-22 (B), in the table for determining the type of advanced suggestion effect, "Pattern PS-1", "Pattern PS-2", "Pattern PS-3", and "Pattern PS-4" are For each, if the variable display result is a variable probability jackpot (any of variable probability jackpot A, variable probability jackpot B, variable probability jackpot C), if it is a non-probable variable jackpot, if the super reach is off, if the normal reach is off. A different determination value is assigned to each of them so that the number of determination values shown in FIG. 14-20(A) is obtained.

Specifically, in the case where the variable display result is a variable jackpot, 5 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PS-1" and 15 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PS-2". 30 determination values are assigned to "pattern PS-3" and 50 determination values are assigned to "pattern PS-4". In addition, in the case where the variable display result is a non-probable variable jackpot, 5 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PS-1" and 15 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PS-2". , 50 determination values are assigned to "pattern PS-3", and 30 determination values are assigned to "pattern PS-4". In addition, when the variable display result is out of super reach, 50 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PS-1" and 30 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PS-2". , 15 determination values are assigned to "pattern PS-3", and 5 determination values are assigned to "pattern PS-4".

By assigning judgment values in this way, in the case of a probability variable jackpot in the variable display, "Pattern PS-4" is determined at the highest rate, and in the case of a non-probability variable jackpot, "Pattern PS-4" is determined at the highest rate. "PS-3" is determined at the highest rate, and if the super reach is off, "Pattern PS-1" is determined at the highest rate. In other words, "Pattern PS-4" has the highest jackpot expectation, and "Pattern PS-4" > "Pattern PS-3" > "Pattern PS-2" > "Pattern PS-1" has the lowest jackpot expectation. Become. Note that the above determined ratio can be changed in various ways.

Returning to FIG. 14-22(A), in step 241SGS323, the development suggestion production type determined in step 241SGS322 is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 (step 241SGS323). Then, the process proceeds to step 241SGS324, where a period until the start of the performance is set in the development suggestion performance start wait timer (step 241SGS324), and the process ends.

Next, as shown in FIG. 14-23(A), in the advanced performance B type determination process, the performance control CPU 120 first specifies the variable display result and the fluctuation pattern (step 241SGS331). The variable display result is a variable display for specifying the variable display result (loss, probability variable jackpot A, probability variable jackpot B, probability variable jackpot C, non-probable variable jackpot, small hit) transmitted from the main board 11 at the start of the variable display. It can be specified by the variable display result designation command stored in the variable display result designation command storage area for storing the result designation command. Furthermore, as described above, the variation pattern can be specified using the variation pattern specification command stored in the variation pattern specification command storage area. In addition, in this feature section 241SG, the targets of the preview performance are normal reach and super reach, so specifically, the variable display results are jackpot (probable variable jackpot A, probability variable jackpot B, probability variable jackpot C, non-probable variable jackpot) or miss. The variable display result designation command may be used to specify whether the variation pattern is normal reach or super reach, and the variation pattern specification command may be used to specify whether the variation pattern is normal reach or super reach. Incidentally, the case of probability variable jackpot C may be excluded from the preview performance.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 extracts the random number for determining the advanced performance, and determines the performance pattern of the advanced performance B using the advanced performance B type determination table shown in FIG. 14-23(B) (step 241SGS332). .

As shown in Figure 14-23 (B), in the table for determining the type of advanced performance B, the variable display results are variable display results for each of the "non-execution" and "execution" patterns (probable variable jackpot A, probability variable jackpot B, Probable Variable Jackpot C), non-probable variable jackpot, Super Reach is off, and Normal Reach is off, each with different judgment values as shown in Figure 14-23 (B). It is assigned as a value number.

Specifically, in the case where the variable display result is a probability variable jackpot, 20 determination values are assigned to "non-execution" and 80 determination values are assigned to "execution". Further, in the case where the variable display result is a non-probable variable jackpot, 30 determination values are assigned to "non-execution" and 70 determination values are assigned to "execution". In addition, when the variable display result is out of super reach β/γ, 30 judgment values are assigned to “non-execution” and 70 judgment values are assigned to “execution”. . Furthermore, in the case where the variable display result is outside the super reach α, 100 determination values are assigned to “non-execution”. In other words, if the super reach α is off, the development effect B is not executed because it will not develop into a strong super reach effect.

By assigning judgment values in this way, in the case of a definite variable jackpot or non-probable variable jackpot in the variable display, "Execution" is determined at the highest rate, and if the super reach is off or the normal reach is off, “Not executed” is determined at the highest rate. In other words, the expectation of a jackpot is higher when the advanced performance B is executed than when it is not executed. Note that the above determined ratio can be changed in various ways.

Returning to FIG. 14-23(A), in step 241SGS333, the advanced effect B type determined in step 241SGS332 is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 (step 241SGS333). Then, the process proceeds to step 241SGS334, and a period until the start of the performance is set in the development performance B start waiting timer (step 241SGS334), and the process is ended.

As shown in FIG. 14-24(A), in the final performance type determination process, the performance control CPU 120 determines the final performance type shown in FIG. 14-24(B) based on the variable display result specified in step 241SGS301. The performance pattern of the final performance is determined using the table for determining the performance (step 241SGS341). Next, the determined performance type is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 (step 241SGS342), a period until the performance starts is set in the performance start wait timer (step 241SGS343), and the process is ended.

As shown in FIG. 14-24(B), in the table for determining the type of performance, there is a "pattern" that displays an operation promotion display that enables the operation of the push button 31B and encourages the player to perform a single press operation of the push button 31B. KB-1'', ``Pattern KB-2'', ``Pattern KV-1'', ``Pattern KV-'' which displays an operation promotion display that enables the operation of the stick controller 31A and encourages the player to pull the stick controller 31A. 2), if the variable display result is a guaranteed variable jackpot (any of variable variable jackpot A, variable variable jackpot B, variable variable jackpot C), if it is a non-probable variable jackpot, or if the super reach is off. Different determination values are assigned so that the number of determination values is shown in FIG. 14-24(B).

Specifically, in the case where the variable display result is a variable jackpot, 30 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern KB-2" and 70 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern KV-2". Assigned. In addition, in the case where the variable display result is a non-probable variable jackpot, 70 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern KB-2" and 30 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern KV-2". ing. In addition, when the variable display result is out of super reach β/γ, 70 judgment values are assigned to “pattern KB-1” and 30 judgment values are assigned to “pattern KV-1”. is assigned.

By assigning judgment values in this way, in the case of a probability variable jackpot in the variable display, "pattern KV-1" in which the operation target is the stick controller 31A is determined at the highest rate, and a non-probability variable jackpot is determined. In this case, "Pattern KB-2" in which the operation target is the push button 31B is determined at the highest rate, and when the super reach is off, "Pattern KB-1" in which the operation target is the push button 31B is determined. ” is determined with the highest percentage. In other words, when the stick controller 31A is the operation target, the expectation of a variable jackpot is higher than when the push button 31B is the operation target. Note that the above determined ratio can be changed in various ways.

In this feature section 241SG, the random number for determining the preview performance, the random number for determining the development performance A, the random number for determining the development suggestion performance, the random number for determining the development performance B, and the random number for determining the final performance are each random numbers in the range of 1 to 100. Any value in the range of 1 to 100 is extracted. In other words, the number of judgment values of these various production-determining random numbers is 100 in the range of 1 to 100, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the range of these various production-determining random numbers can be changed as appropriate. All you have to do is decide. Further, a performance determining random number counter for generating these various performance determining random numbers is set in the RAM 122, and the performance determining random number counter is updated every timer interrupt by random number updating processing. Further, a common random number may be used as the random numbers for determining these various effects.

In addition, although this feature section 241SG has exemplified a form in which production patterns of various productions are determined in various production type determination processing, the present invention is not limited to this, and in addition to the above productions, for example, a character appears. It may also be possible to decide to execute a preview effect such as a character preview effect in which the preview image changes in stages, a step-up preview in which the preview image changes step by step, or a group preview in which a group of predetermined characters cross the display area. When determining, since the timing to start the preview performance differs depending on the format of the preview performance, different periods depending on the format of the preview performance may be set in the preview performance start wait timer, which will be described later.

Returning to FIG. 14-18, in step 241SGS283, the performance control CPU 120 selects the performance control pattern (process table) according to the variation pattern designation command. Then, the process timer for process data 1 of the selected process table is started (step 241SGS284).

The process table includes display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, and data for controlling the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Sound control execution data, operation part control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and stick controller 31A, etc. are arranged in chronological order in correspondence with each process data n (numbers 1 to N). There is.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 controls the performance device (image display as a performance component) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1). The device 5, various lamps as performance parts, speakers 8L and 8R as performance parts, and operation units (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.) are controlled (step 241SGS285). For example, a command is output to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image according to the variation pattern on the image display device 5. Further, in order to control the lighting/extinguishing of various lamps, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp control board 14. Furthermore, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the audio control board 13 in order to output audio from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In addition, in this feature section 241SG, the performance control CPU 120 controls so that the decorative symbols are displayed variably according to the variation pattern that corresponds one-to-one to the variation pattern designation command, but the production control CPU 120 The variation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to the specified command.

Then, a value corresponding to the variable display time specified by the variable pattern designation command is set in the variable display time timer (step 241SGS286). Also, a predetermined time is set in the variable display control timer (step 241SGS287). Note that the predetermined time is, for example, 33 ms, and each time the predetermined time elapses, the performance control CPU 120 writes image data that is being displayed in a variable manner, including image data that indicates the display state of the decorative symbol on the left center right, into the VRAM. The display control unit 123 outputs a signal according to the image data written in the VRAM to the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 displays an image according to the signal. As a result, variable display of decorative patterns and display of moving images of other effects are realized.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 sets the value of the performance control process flag to a value corresponding to the variable display performance process (step S172), and ends the variable display start setting process (step 241SGS288).

(Example of Super Reach β production operation)
Next, an example of the performance operation of super reach β will be explained based on FIGS. 14-25 to 14-31. FIGS. 14-25 (A) to (H) are diagrams showing examples of production operations mainly in normal reach of super reach β. In FIGS. 14-26, (A) to (J) are diagrams mainly showing examples of production operations in weak super reach. FIGS. 14-27 (A) to (F) are diagrams similarly showing examples of performance operations in weak super reach. FIGS. 14-28 (A) to (D) are diagrams mainly showing examples of production operations in strong super reach. In FIGS. 14-29, (E) to (J) are diagrams showing examples of performance operations of strong super reach performance. 14-30, (A) to (F) are diagrams showing examples of performance operations after notification of jackpot confirmation. 14-31, (A) to (D) are diagrams showing details of the movement display of the first pseudo movable object display. FIG. 14-32 is a diagram showing the relationship between the light emitting display section and the mounted movable body LED.

Below, examples of various performance operations in the variable display period based on the variation pattern of super reach β will be explained.

As shown in FIG. 14-25 (A), the production control CPU 120 variably displays decorative symbols in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R based on the variation pattern of super reach β based on the occurrence of a starting prize. Start. In addition, in the upper left of the display area of the image display device 5, there are small numbers corresponding to the first pending memory number (for example, the number "2"), the second pending memory number (for example, the number "0"), and the decorative pattern. A display area 5SL for displaying symbols (for example, arrows "↓↓↓") is provided, and small symbols are variably displayed in synchronization with the variable display of decorative symbols.

In addition, regarding the first suspended memory number, the second suspended memory number, small symbols, and an error display (not shown) indicating an error state that has occurred in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the first pseudo movable object display Z100 and the second pseudo movable body display Z100 Since it is displayed on the front side (upper layer) than the movable body display Z200, the first pseudo movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo movable body display Z200 overlap, and the first pending memory number, second pending memory number, and small While the visibility of the symbols and error displays is prevented from decreasing, the decorative symbols are displayed further back (lower layer) than the first pseudo-movable object display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable object display Z200. Therefore, the visibility of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is prevented from being reduced due to overlapping of decorative patterns.

After starting the variable display, as shown in FIG. 14-25(B), when the variable display mode is set to the normal reach display mode, the normal reach effect as the variable display effect of the decorative symbol is started.

As shown in FIG. 14-25(C), the performance control CPU 120 moves the second pseudo movable body display Z200 to the first specific initial display position at the start timing of the preview performance A when a predetermined time has elapsed since the normal reach display mode. After being displayed in the first specific effect display position (see FIG. 14-25 (D)), as shown in FIG. By displaying the light emitting display parts Z208A to Z208E in a display color corresponding to the pattern (any of PYA-1 to PYA-4), a notice effect A indicating that the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state is executed. Further, an effect image Z60 for emphasizing the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is displayed around the second pseudo movable body display Z200 that has been moved and displayed at the first specific effect display position.

Note that the effect image Z60 is displayed in a manner corresponding to the luminescent display colors of the luminescent display sections Z208A to Z208E. For example, when the light emitting display parts Z208A to Z208E are displayed in white based on the pattern PYA-1, the effect image Z60 is white and the display size is small, and the light emitting display parts Z208A to Z208E are displayed in white based on the pattern PYA-4. When the light emitting display color of Z208E is red, it is preferable that the effect image Z60 is red and the display size becomes large according to the expectation level.

Next, as shown in FIG. 14-25(F), the effect image Z60 is erased, the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is moved from the first specific effect display position to the first specific initial display position, and then the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is moved and displayed. By erasing the pseudo movable body display Z200, the preview performance A is ended. Thereafter, the decorative pattern is reduced and displayed in a display area 5SR provided at the upper right of the display area of the image display device 5 in a manner that is slightly larger than the small pattern.

If non-execution of development performance A is determined in the development performance A type determination processing of step 241SGS278B, as shown in FIG. 14-25 (G), at the start timing of development performance A, the mounted movable body 32 is held at the origin position without falling, a development notification image Z300 is displayed, and an effect image Z61A is displayed around it, to notify that a weak super reach performance will develop. In addition, if it is decided to execute the development effect A, as shown in FIG. 14-25 (H), at the start timing of the development effect A, the mounted movable body solenoids 207L and 207R are turned on and the mounted movable body 32 is dropped from the origin position to the performance position, and an effect image Z61B different from the effect image Z61A for emphasizing the mounted movable body 32 is displayed around it to notify that a weak super reach performance will develop.

In addition, in the characteristic part 241SG, when the mounted movable body 32 is executed as the development effect A, the ratio of control to the jackpot game state is higher than when it is not executed. Even if it has been decided not to perform (the fall of the player), by displaying the development notification image Z300, it is possible to notify that the performance will develop into a weak super reach performance.

As shown in FIG. 14-26(A), after the execution period of the developed effect A ends, the effect control CPU 120 starts the weak super reach effect by displaying the character image Z310, and also starts the weak super reach effect by displaying the character image Z310. After displaying the movable body display Z200 at the first specific initial display position, it is moved and displayed at the first specific performance display position to start the development suggestion performance (see FIG. 14-26(B)). At this time, the second pseudo movable object display Z200 is displayed so as to partially overlap the character image Z310 on the near side.

Furthermore, when the second pseudo movable object display Z200 is moved and displayed to the first specific effect display position as a development suggestion effect, the light emitting display parts Z208A to Z208E are displayed as white light and the button LED 62 of the push button 31B is lit. , prompts the operation of the push button 31B.

Next, as shown in FIG. 14-26(C), an effect image Z62 for emphasizing the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is displayed around the second pseudo movable body display Z200. Then, if any of the patterns (PS-2 to PS-4) is determined in the development suggestion production type determination process of step 241SGS280, as shown in FIG. 14-26(D), the push button 31B during the operation validity period The effect image Z62 is enlarged in accordance with the repeated tapping operation (the number of detected operations), and the color of the light emitting display parts Z208A to Z208E is changed every time a predetermined period of time elapses. Suggests that B is executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 14-26(E), a blackout display is performed in which the background image is darkened while maintaining the luminescent display colors of the luminescent display sections Z208A to Z208E even after the valid operation period ends. Thereafter, a small-sized character image Z310 having the same color as the luminescent display color of the luminescent display sections Z208A to Z208E when the operation validity period ends is displayed at the upper position of the second pseudo movable body display Z200, and the character image Z310 is also displayed. After displaying the effect image Z63 for emphasis (see Figure 14-26 (F)), temporarily erase the character image Z310 while displaying the effect image Z63 (see Figure 14-26 (G)), and then After displaying the large size character image Z310 (see Figure 14-26 (H)), erase the character image Z310 while displaying the effect image Z63 (see Figure 14-26 (I)), and then Character image Z310 is displayed (see FIG. 14-26 (J)).

Note that in FIGS. 14-26(E) to (J), in consideration of the appearance of the effect, it is preferable that the light emitting display parts Z208A to Z208E continue to display light, but the effect image Z62 is not displayed.

In this way, the character image Z310 of the same color as the light-emitting display parts Z208A to Z208E is displayed in a manner that gradually becomes larger from the back side of the screen toward the front side of the screen, and the character image Z310 of small size, medium size, and large size is displayed. As shown in the enlarged view of FIG. 14-26(J) in FIG. 14-27, the second pseudo-movable object display is displayed in the area including the first specific effect display position of the second pseudo-movable object display Z200. By overlapping at least a portion of Z200 on the near side and making it possible to see the second pseudo movable object display Z200 through the overlapping area, expectations for the execution of the development performance B are more preferably created. can be stimulated.

Furthermore, since the character image Z310 is displayed preferentially in front of the second pseudo-movable object display Z200, the second pseudo-movable object display Z200 is erased without being moved to the first specific initial display position. While distracting the player's consciousness, it is possible to suitably suggest that the development effect B will be executed by displaying the character image Z310.

Furthermore, although the character image Z310 is displayed in a manner that increases its size in stages, at least the second pseudo-movable object display Z200 is enlarged in the area including the first specific effect display position of the second pseudo-movable object display Z200 from the start of display. It may be displayed so as to partially overlap on the near side. Furthermore, the effect image Z63 may also be displayed as a suggestion image so as to overlap at least a portion of the second pseudo movable body display Z200.

Next, as shown in FIG. 14-27(A), while displaying the large-sized character image Z310, the effect control CPU 120 moves the second pseudo movable object display Z200 from the first specific effect display position to the first position. 1. Erase (hide) without moving to a specific initial display position. Specifically, the second pseudo-movable object display Z200 is hidden in a manner of gradually fading out as an erased display to emphasize that it has been erased. Thereafter, the large-sized character image Z310 is erased by being hidden from display in a manner of gradually fading out.

In the feature section 241SG, as shown in FIG. 14-27(A), the effect control CPU 120 controls the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 to perform the first specific effect while displaying the large-sized character image Z310. Although a mode in which the display position is moved from the display position to the first specific initial display position and is erased (hidden) without being displayed is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIG. 14-26 (F) When the display of the character image Z310 is started, or when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the display, the second pseudo movable object display Z200 is displayed as the first specific effect while the character image Z310 is being displayed. It may also be erased (hidden) without being moved from the position to the first specific initial display position.

Further, the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is not limited to the one where the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is erased (hidden) without being moved from the first specific effect display position to the first specific initial display position, and the second pseudo movable body display Z200 While Z200 is faded out, it may be moved from the first specific effect display position to the first specific initial display position and erased (hidden).

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 14-27(B), at the start timing of the development effect B, the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is displayed at the first specific initial display position. Here, if non-execution of the development effect B is determined in the development effect B type determination process of step 241SGS281, as shown in FIG. 14-27(C), the second pseudo movable object display Z200 is Moves from the initial display position to the first specific effect display position and erases it without displaying it, and displays the reach title image Z51, which will be described later, in a predetermined manner (for example, the manner at the start of display with high transmittance and low visibility). By doing so, it will be announced that it will develop into a strong super reach.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 14-27(D), when the execution of the advanced effect B is determined, the second pseudo movable object display Z200 is moved and displayed from the first specific initial display position to the first specific effect display position. By doing so, it will be announced that it will develop into a strong super reach. At this time, as shown in the enlarged view, the light emitting display parts Z208A to Z208E are displayed in a predetermined color (for example, white) during the moving display, and the rotating display part Z207 including the light emitting display parts Z208A to Z208E is displayed. Displayed in a clockwise manner when viewed from the front. Furthermore, an effect image Z65 for emphasizing the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is displayed around the second pseudo movable body display Z200 that has been moved and displayed at the first specific effect display position.

Note that the light-emitting display colors of the light-emitting display parts Z208A to Z208E in FIG. 14-27(D) are different from the development suggestion effect and do not indicate the expectation level of a jackpot, but are displayed on the image display device 5 as images of a weak reach effect. The light emitting display color corresponds to the color of the effect image Z65 etc. displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 14-27(E), after displaying the reach title image Z51, which will be described later, in a predetermined manner (for example, the manner at the start of display with high transmittance and low visibility), As shown in 27(F), the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is moved from the first specific effect display position to the first specific initial display position and is erased (hidden) without being displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 14-28(A), when the variable display mode is set to the super reach display mode, the performance control CPU 120 displays a reach title indicating the type of super reach effect and a reach title indicating the jackpot expectation level. The title image Z51 is displayed to notify that the super reach effect has developed. Next, a super reach performance (for example, a performance that displays an image Z52 of a battle between an ally character and an enemy character) is started (see FIG. 14-28(B)). Then, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the super reach display mode has been set, if patterns KB-1 and KB-2 have been determined in the decision performance type determination process of step 241SGS282, that is, if the operation target is a push button 31B, as shown in FIG. 14-28(C), an operation promotion image Z53 is displayed to encourage the player to press the push button 31B. On the other hand, if patterns KV-1 and KV-2 are determined in the final effect type determination process in step 241SGS282, that is, if the operation target is the stick controller 31A, as shown in FIG. 14-28 (D). An operation promotion image Z54 is displayed to encourage the player to pull the stick controller 31A.

The timing when a push operation of the push button 31B (detection signal from the push sensor 35B) or a pull operation of the stick controller 31A (detection signal from the stick controller 31A) is detected during the operation validity period during which the operation promotion display is displayed, or a push If the variable display result is a jackpot at the timing when the valid operation period ends without detecting the push operation of the button 31B or the pull operation of the stick controller 31A, as shown in FIG. 14-29(E), the mounted movable body 32 A movable body performance is executed in which the object is dropped from the origin position to a performance position on the front side of the display area, and an effect image Z55 is displayed. In addition, in accordance with the movement of the mounted movable body 32 from the origin position to the production position, a predetermined sound effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the mounted movable body LED 208 is colored in a predetermined color (for example, rainbow color, etc.). Make it emit light.

Note that the effect image Z55 is an effect image that includes a plurality of glass shard images that are displayed in the manner of glass cracking and scattering, and is exemplified in a form similar to the effect image Z71 described later. The present invention is not limited to this, and the effect image may have a different form from the effect image Z71. For example, by displaying a display in which only a portion of the glass is cracked and scattered as fragments, leaving the remaining portion, the mounted movable body 32 may be displayed overlappingly with the effect image Z55 displayed on the image display device 5. Even in situations where it is difficult to visually recognize, it may be possible to make it easier for the player to understand what has happened by taking some time.

Further, in the effect image Z55, as well as the effect image Z71 described later, at least one of the plurality of glass fragment images displayed in a scattering manner includes the mounting movable body 32 disposed on the front side of the image display device 5. By displaying a part of the glass fragments in a reflective manner, the positional relationship between the mounted movable body 32 and the glass fragment image becomes clearer, so that a display with a more three-dimensional effect can be realized.

After that, after moving the mounted movable body 32 from the production position to the origin position, as shown in FIG. 14-29 (F), after displaying the image Z56 indicating that the ally character has won the battle with the enemy character. , as shown in FIG. 14-29(G), the combination of jackpot symbols is temporarily stopped and the jackpot confirmed notification is performed. Incidentally, even if the combination of jackpot symbols is temporarily stopped and displayed, the small symbols remain variably displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 14-30(A), the effect control CPU 120 displays an effect image Z71 in which glass is cracked and glass fragments are scattered in the display area of the image display device 5, and the first pseudo movable The body display Z100 is displayed at the first initial display position. Then, as shown in FIG. 14-30(B), the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed from the first initial display position to the first effect display position, and the effect movable display parts Z110A to Z110D are displayed as the first effect. The display state is changed to the second effect display state. In addition, in response to the movement display of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first effect display position, the mounted movable body 32 is dropped in the same manner as in FIG. 14-29 (E). Then, a predetermined sound effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the light emitting display section Z108A is caused to emit light in a predetermined color (for example, rainbow color).

Here, details of the movement display of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first effect display position explained in FIGS. 14-30(A) and (B) are shown in FIG. 14-31. explain.

As shown in FIG. 14-31(A), the production control CPU 120 displays an effect image Z71 in the display area of the image display device 5, including an image Z71A showing a state in which glass is cracked and a plurality of glass fragments are scattered. At the same time, the first pseudo movable object display Z100 is displayed at the first initial display position. Note that the performance control CPU 120 displays the first pseudo movable body display Z100 so that a portion thereof is visible below the mounted movable body 32 held at the origin position. Then, as shown in FIG. 14-31(B), when displaying the first pseudo movable object display Z100 at the first intermediate display position between the first initial display position and the first effect display position, -31(A), the amount and moving display speed of the image Z71A showing glass fragments are increased, and the first pseudo movable object display Z100 is displayed on the near side of these images Z71A.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 14-31(C) and (D), when displaying the first pseudo movable object display Z100 at the first effect display position, the glass fragments are smaller than in the state shown in FIG. 14-31(B). The amount and movement display speed of the images Z71A showing the image Z71A are further increased, and these images Z71A are displayed on the near side of the first pseudo movable object display Z100.

In this way, in response to the movement display of the first pseudo movable body display Z100, the effect image Z71 for emphasizing the movement display of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is added to the first initial display of the first pseudo movable body display Z100. position, the first intermediate display position, and the first effect display position, and move only the image Z71A showing the glass fragments in the effect image Z71 from the back side to the front side of the first pseudo movable object display Z100. By displaying it, not only can a three-dimensional effect be created by the image Z71A in a manner of scattering around it, but also it is possible to make the first pseudo movable object display Z100 look like a real structure.

Further, as shown in the enlarged view of FIG. 14-31(C), the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is viewed through any one of the plurality of images Z71A displayed on the front side of the first pseudo movable body display Z100. The first pseudo-movable body display may be displayed in a visible manner, or may be displayed on any one of the plurality of images Z71A displayed on the front side of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100, as shown in the enlarged view of FIG. 14-31(D). By displaying a part of Z100 in a reflective manner, the positional relationship between the first pseudo-movable object display Z100 and the image Z71A becomes clearer, so that a display with a more three-dimensional effect can be realized.

Further, as shown in FIG. 14-31(D), the performance control CPU 120 moves and displays the first pseudo movable body display Z100 to the first performance position, and then moves the performance movable display parts Z110A to Z110D to the first performance display. At the same time, the light emission of the mounted movable body LED 208 and the light emission display of the light emission display section Z108A are executed at approximately the same cycle.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 14-32, after the first pseudo-movable object display Z100 moves to the first effect display position, the effect control CPU 120 controls the light-emitting display part Z108A during the first period ta1 to ta2 ( For example, during the production period in which the first pseudo-movable object display Z100 is displayed at the first production display position, a flashing display pattern in which the first pseudo-movable object display Z100 is displayed in the first production display position is a flashing display pattern in which the display is emitted for a period of 33ms) and then is not displayed for a second period ta2 to ta3 (for example, 33ms). While repeating ta1 to ta4 multiple times, the mounted movable body LED 208 is turned on for a first corresponding period (for example, 30 ms) corresponding to the first period, and then a second corresponding period corresponding to the second period (for example, A blinking pattern in which the lights go out for 40 ms) is repeated multiple times over the presentation period ta1 to ta4.

In this way, by executing (synchronizing) the light emission of the mounted movable body LED 208 and the light emission display of the light emission display section Z108A at substantially the same period (synchronization), it is possible to more suitably enhance the performance. It should be noted that it is difficult to accurately match (synchronize) the time (for example, 33 ms) in which the light emitting display section Z108A emits light and the time (for example, 30 ms) to light up the mounted movable body LED 208 in the first period ta1 to ta2. Even in such a case, for example, by making the off period of the mounted movable body LED 208 longer than the lighting period, the discrepancy between the light emission display of the light emitting display section Z108A and the lighting of the mounted movable body LED 208 will increase over time. This can be prevented.

Further, during the performance period ta1 to ta4, a vibration performance may be performed in which the vibration motor 61 is driven to vibrate the push button 31B and the stick controller 31A. By doing so, the performance can be made more exciting. Note that the driving of the vibration motor 61 may be synchronized with the light emission display of the light emission display section Z108A and the lighting of the mounted movable body LED 208.

Returning to FIG. 14-30(C), the performance control CPU 120 returns the first pseudo movable body display Z100 from the second performance display state to the first performance display state, and ends the reduced display of the decorative pattern. , after temporary stop display in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved upward and displayed as shown in FIG. 14-30 (D). As shown in E), the display is moved to the first effect display position and then erased. Then, the combination of determined decorative symbols is stopped and displayed, and the small symbols are also stopped and displayed in the combination of jackpot symbols.

In this way, after performing the effect of dropping the mounted movable body 32 and notifying the jackpot confirmation, by executing the effect of moving and displaying the first pseudo movable body display Z100, the jackpot game state is controlled. It is possible to make the player feel it more suitably.

Returning to FIG. 14-29, during the operation validity period during which the operation promotion display is displayed, a single press operation of the push button 31B (detection signal from the push sensor 35B) or a single pull operation of the stick controller 31A (a single pull operation from the stick controller 31A) If the variable display result is incorrect at the timing when the detection signal) is detected, or at the timing when the valid operation period ends without detecting a single push operation of the push button 31B or a single pull operation of the stick controller 31A, the variable display result is off, as shown in Figure 14-29. As shown in (H), the effect image Z57 is displayed without performing the movable body effect of dropping the mounted movable body 32 from the origin position above the display area of the image display device 5 to the effect position on the front side of the display area, As shown in Figure 14-29 (I), after displaying the image Z58 indicating that the friendly character has lost the battle with the enemy character, the combination of losing symbols is displayed as shown in Figure 14-29 (J). A stop display is performed to notify the failure confirmation. Further, in synchronization with the stop display of the combination of missed symbols, the small symbols are stopped and displayed as the combination of missed symbols.

Note that, for example, when the push button 31B is operated at the start of the valid operation period, and when the push button 31B is not operated during the valid operation period, there will be a difference in the subsequent length, so the operation timing of the push button 31B will be different. The difference in scale caused by 1. The period of fluctuation of the decorative pattern until the pattern is confirmed; 2. Display period of images Z55 to Z58, 3. This may be absorbed by extending or shortening one of the presentation periods of the movable body presentation.

(Example of Super Reach γ production operation)
Next, an example of the performance operation of super reach γ will be explained based on FIGS. 14-33 to 14-34. FIGS. 14-33 (A) to (F) are diagrams showing an example of the performance operation of preview performance B in super reach γ. FIGS. 14-34 (A) to (F) are diagrams showing an example of the performance operation of the preview performance B in the super reach γ.

Below, we will explain an example of the performance operation of preview performance B executed in the normal reach performance in the variation pattern of super reach γ, and the flow from the start of the variable display to the start of the normal reach performance is the same as that of super reach β. Therefore, the explanation will be omitted. Note that the super reach γ is a variation pattern that is selected only when the gaming state is a high base state.

As shown in FIG. 14-33(A), if the pattern PYB-1 is determined in the preview performance type determination process at step 241SGS278B, the performance control CPU 120 controls the performance control CPU 120 to display a preview after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the normal reach display mode. At the start timing of effect B, after displaying the second pseudo movable object display Z200 at the second specific initial display position, by moving and displaying it to the second intermediate effect display position (see Figure 14-33 (B)), a jackpot can be achieved. A preview performance B indicating that the game state will be controlled is executed. Further, an effect image Z81 for emphasizing the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is displayed around the second pseudo movable body display Z200 moved and displayed at the second intermediate effect display position.

The second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is displayed overlappingly in front of the decorative pattern that is variably displayed in the decorative pattern display area 5L at the second intermediate effect display position, so that the second pseudo movable body display Z200 can be displayed in a variable manner in the decorative pattern display area 5L. It becomes difficult to visually recognize the displayed decorative pattern.

After that, as shown in FIG. 14-33(C), the effect control CPU 120 erases (deactivates) the second pseudo movable object display Z200 without moving it from the second intermediate effect display position to the second specific initial display position. indicate.

As shown in FIG. 14-33 (D), if the pattern PYB-2 is determined in the preview performance type determination process at step 241SGS278B, the performance control CPU 120 controls the performance control CPU 120 when the pattern PYB-2 is determined in the preview performance type determination process at step 241SGS278B. At the start timing of effect B, after displaying the second pseudo movable object display Z200 at the second specific initial display position, by moving and displaying it to the second specific effect display position (see Figure 14-33 (E)), a jackpot is achieved. A preview performance B indicating that the game state will be controlled is executed. Furthermore, an effect image Z81 for emphasizing the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is displayed around the second pseudo movable body display Z200 moved and displayed at the second specific effect display position.

The second pseudo-movable object display Z200 is displayed overlappingly in front of the decorative pattern that is variably displayed in the decorative pattern display area 5C at the second specific effect display position, so that the second pseudo movable body display Z200 can be displayed in the decorative pattern display area 5C. It becomes difficult to visually recognize the displayed decorative pattern.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 14-33(F), the effect control CPU 120 erases (deactivates) the second pseudo movable object display Z200 without moving it from the second specific effect display position to the second specific initial display position. indicate.

As shown in FIG. 14-34(A), if the pattern PYB-3 is determined in the preview performance type determination process at step 241SGS278B, the performance control CPU 120 controls the performance control CPU 120 to display a preview after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the normal reach display mode. At the start timing of performance B, after displaying the first pseudo movable body display Z100 at the first initial display position, by moving and displaying it to the first performance display position (see FIG. 14-34 (B)), a jackpot game state is created. Preview performance B is executed, which suggests that the system will be controlled by Furthermore, an effect image Z82 for emphasizing the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is displayed around the first pseudo movable body display Z100 that has been moved and displayed at the first effect display position.

The first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is displayed overlappingly in front of the decorative patterns that are variably displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R at the first effect display position. , 5C, and 5R are partially difficult to visually recognize.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 14-34(C), the effect control CPU 120 moves the first pseudo movable body display Z100 from the first effect display position to the first initial display position and erases (hides) the display without displaying it. do.

As shown in FIG. 14-34(D), if the pattern PYB-4 is determined in the preview performance type determination process at step 241SGS278B, the performance control CPU 120 controls the performance control CPU 120 to display a preview after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the normal reach display mode. At the start timing of performance B, after displaying the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 at the second initial display position, by moving and displaying it to the second performance display position (see FIG. 14-34 (E)), a jackpot game state is established. Preview performance B is executed, which suggests that the system will be controlled by Furthermore, an effect image Z82 for emphasizing the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is displayed around the first pseudo movable body display Z100 that has been moved and displayed at the second effect display position.

The first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is overlapped and displayed in front of the decorative patterns variably displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R at the second effect display position, so that the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is displayed in the decorative pattern display area 5L. , 5C, and 5R are partially difficult to visually recognize.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 14-34(F), the effect control CPU 120 moves the first pseudo-movable object display Z100 from the second effect display position to the second initial display position and erases (hides) it without displaying it. do.

(Pseudo moving object display and moving object)
Next, pseudo movable object display and movable objects will be explained based on FIGS. 14-35 to 14-40. FIG. 14-35 is an explanatory diagram for comparing the pseudo movable body display and the non-mounted movable body. FIG. 14-36 is an explanatory diagram for comparing the pseudo movable body display and the non-mounted movable body. FIG. 14-37 is an explanatory diagram for comparing the pseudo movable body display and the non-mounted movable body. FIG. 14-38 is an explanatory diagram for comparing the pseudo movable body display and the non-mounted movable body. FIG. 14-39 is an explanatory diagram for comparing the pseudo movable body display and the non-mounted movable body. FIG. 14-40 is an explanatory diagram for comparing the first pseudo movable object display and the second pseudo movable object display.

As shown in FIG. 14-35, the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is a first non-movable body display Z100 that is different in shape, weight, drive mechanism, etc. from the mounted movable body 32, as explained in FIG. 14-14(B). Although this is a pseudo movable body display imitating the mounted movable body M100, the first initial display position and the origin position of the mounted movable body 32 are both approximately at the same position at the top of the display area of the image display device 5, and the first effect display position Since both the effect position of the mounted movable body 32 are lower than the first initial display position and the origin position, the direction of movement from the first initial display position to the first effect display position and the direction in which the mounted movable body 32 is the origin The direction of movement from the position to the production position is a common downward direction. That is, both the first pseudo movable body display Z100 and the mounted movable body 32 are movable downward from the first initial display position or origin position above the display area of the image display device 5.

As explained in FIGS. 14-16, the moving display distance L2 from the first initial display position of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 to the first effect display position is the distance from the origin position of the mounted movable body 32 to the effect position. It is longer than the moving distance L1 (L2>L1).

Here, as shown in FIGS. 14-35 (A') to (C'), the mounted movable body 32 falls (moves) under its own weight from the upper origin position to the lower production position via the intermediate position. While it takes about 300 ms, as shown in FIGS. 14-35 (A) to (C), the first pseudo movable object display Z100 is displayed from the first initial display position to the first intermediate display position and then to the first effect display. It takes about 100ms to move and display the position. In other words, the moving display of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first effect display position is longer than the movement of the mounted movable body 32 from the origin position to the effect position, in addition to the longer moving display distance. It's also fast.

In this way, the first pseudo movable body display Z100 imitating the first non-mounted movable body M100 is displayed as a movable mounted structure movable in the same direction (for example, downward) as the first non-mounted movable body M100. In the case where the movable display can be performed from approximately the same position as the mounted movable body 32 in the same direction, the movable display of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first effect display position is better than that of the mounted movable body 32. By making the movement faster than the movement from the origin position to the performance position, it is possible to perform an impactful performance that is faster than the movement of the mounted movable body 32 that is actually mounted, thereby surprising the player. be able to.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 14-36 (A') and (B'), the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved from the first origin position to the first presentation position below the first origin position. At times, the mechanical part M100B comes into contact with the upper part of the movable body M106 and its downward movement is restricted, causing it to stop, and the vibration generated when the movement is restricted causes a reaction motion (bounce) of a predetermined amount of movement. The display is designed to imitate the first non-mounted movable body M100 where the process is performed.

Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 14-36(A) and (B), the effect control CPU 120 moves and displays the first pseudo movable object display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first effect display position and displays the first pseudo movable body display Z100. When stopping and displaying at the effect display position, a reaction movement display (bounce display) of a specific amount of movement is performed.

More specifically, the first non-mounted movable body M100 has a cantilevered structure in which only the left side of the production section M100A is supported by the drive mechanism M101, and when it moves to the first production position, the mechanism section M100B moves to the moving body M106. Since the mechanism part M100B comes into contact with the upper part of the production part M100A and is restricted from moving downward, a reaction motion due to vibration occurs in the mechanism part M100B before the production part M100A, and then the vibration is transmitted to the production part M100A and a reaction action occurs.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 14-36 (B1), when the effect control CPU 120 moves and displays the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 to the first effect display position, after displaying the reaction movement of the mechanism part M100B. , as shown in FIG. 14-36 (B2), displays the reaction motion of the production section M100A. By doing so, the first pseudo movable body display Z100 imitating the first non-mounted movable body M100, which is different from the mounted movable body 32, is displayed in a more realistic manner (for example, the display imitating the mounted movable body 32 is can be moved and displayed in different modes).

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 14-36 (C') and (D'), the mounted movable body 32 has a structure in which the left and right sides of the production section 32A are supported by drive mechanisms 101L and 101R, and is moved to the production position. At this time, the mechanism portion 32B comes into contact with the upper portions of the left and right movable bodies 206 and their downward movement is restricted, so that a reaction movement of a predetermined amount of movement is performed due to vibrations generated when the movement is restricted.

Next, the operation mode of the mounted movable body 32 and the first pseudo movable body in the deciding performance will be explained.

As explained in FIGS. 14-28 to 14-30, the performance control CPU 120 performs a movable body performance that causes the mounted movable body 32 to fall from the origin position to the performance position during the execution period (ta0 to ta10) of the final performance. After executing and notifying the jackpot confirmation, it is possible to execute a pseudo movable object display in which the first pseudo movable object display Z100 is moved and displayed from the first initial display position to the first effect display position.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 14-37(A), after starting the determined performance at timing ta0, the performance control CPU 120 controls whether the player operates the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B within the valid operation period. At the detected timing ta1, the mounted movable body 32 is dropped from the origin position to the production position. The mounted movable body 32 moves from the origin position to the presentation position during a period TL1 (for example, about 300 ms) between timings ta1 and ta2, and then performs a reaction motion during a period between timings ta2 and ta3 (for example, about 700 ms).

Thereafter, at timing ta4, the mounted movable body 32 is moved (raised) from the performance position to the origin position, and a jackpot confirmation notification is performed. Here, the period TL3 (for example, about 1000 ms) from timing ta4 to ta5 when the mounted movable body 32 moves from the production position to the origin position is the period from timing ta1 to ta2 when the mounted movable body 32 moves from the origin position to the production position. It is longer than TL1 (for example, about 300 ms). In other words, the speed at which the mounted movable body 32 moves from the production position to the origin position is slower than the speed at which the mounted movable body 32 moves (falls) from the origin position to the production position.

In this way, in a performance using the mounted movable body 32, which is a structure, when the mounted movable body 32 is moved from the origin position to the performance position in response to the detection of the player's operation, the game is performed by making it fall faster due to its own weight. On the other hand, when moving the mounted movable body 32 from the performance position to the origin position, it is possible to suppress damage to the mounted movable body 32 due to impact by moving it slowly.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 displays the first pseudo movable object display Z100 at the first initial display position at timing ta6 when a predetermined time has elapsed since the notification of jackpot confirmation, and displays the first pseudo movable object display Z100 at the first initial display position, and displays the first pseudo movable object display Z100 at the first initial display position during the period TL2 from timing ta6 to ta7 (for example, , about 100 ms), and then a reaction movement display is performed during a period from timing ta7 to ta8 (for example, about 900 ms).

Thereafter, at timing ta9, the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved (raised) from the first effect display position to the first initial display position, and then the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is erased. Here, during the period TL4 (for example, about 1000 ms) from timing ta9 to ta10 during which the first pseudo movable body display Z100 moves from the first effect display position to the first initial display position, the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved to the first It is longer than the period TL2 (for example, about 100 ms) from timing ta6 to ta7 of moving and displaying from the initial display position to the first effect display position. In other words, the speed at which the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed from the first effect display position to the first initial display position is such that the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 moves from the first initial display position to the first effect display It is slower than the speed when moving to the position and displaying it.

In this way, in the moving display of the first pseudo-movable object display Z100, the moving display from the first initial display position to the first effect display position is made faster than the moving display from the first effect display position to the first initial display position. By doing the same as the mounted movable body 32, such as increasing the speed, the first pseudo movable body display Z100 can be displayed moving in a more realistic manner.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 14-37(B), the amount of movement per unit time (for example, TL2) when moving and displaying the first pseudo movable object display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first effect display position Comparing L2 (movement display distance L2) with the movement amount L1A per unit time (for example, TL2) when moving the mounted movable body 32 from the origin position to the production position, it is found that the first pseudo movable body display Z100 The movement amount L2 per unit time TL2 is larger than the movement amount L1A of the mounted movable body 32 per unit time TL2. In other words, the movement display of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first effect display position is faster than the movement of the mounted movable body 32 from the origin position to the effect position. By doing so, the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 can perform an impactful performance that is faster than the movement of the mounted movable body 32, which can surprise the player.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 14-37(C), the amount of movement of the first reaction action display performed when the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed from the first initial display position to the first effect display position. L12 is larger than the movement amount L11 of the first reaction motion display performed when the mounted movable body 32 moves from the origin position to the production position. Further, the number of times the reaction motion of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is displayed (for example, six times) is greater than the number of times of reaction motion of the mounted movable body 32 (for example, four times). In this way, the first pseudo movable body display Z100 can simulate the same effect as the first non-mounted movable body M100 without mounting the first non-mounted movable body M100. By displaying the reaction motion that occurs when the first non-mounted movable body M100 moves to the first performance position in an exaggerated manner, it is possible to provide a performance that leaves a lasting impression on the player.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 14-38(A) and (B), the movement display distance L2 of the first pseudo movable object display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first effect display position, and the movement display distance L2 of the first pseudo movable object display Z100 The moving display distance L2 of M100 from the first origin position to the first effect display position is the same, and the period TL2 during which the first pseudo movable object display Z100 is moved and displayed from the first initial display position to the first effect display position is: It is shorter than the period TL10 during which the first non-mounted movable body M100 is moved from the first origin position to the first production position (TL2<TL10). Therefore, the amount of movement L2 per unit time (for example, TL2) when moving and displaying the first pseudo movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first effect display position is as follows: It is larger than the amount of movement per unit time (for example, TL2) when moving from the first origin position to the first presentation position. In other words, the movement display of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first effect display position is better than the movement display of the first non-mounted movable body M100 from the first origin position to the first effect display position. It's also fast. By doing so, the first pseudo movable body display Z100 can perform an impactful performance that is faster than the movement of the first non-mounted movable body M100, which can surprise the player.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 14-38(C), the amount of movement of the first reaction action display performed when the first pseudo movable object display Z100 is moved and displayed from the first initial display position to the first effect display position. L12 is the movement amount L11 of the first reaction action display performed when the mounted movable body 32 moves from the origin position to the production position, and the first non-mounted movable body M100 moves from the first origin position to the first It is larger than the movement amount L13 of the first reaction movement display performed when moving and displaying to the production position. Further, the number of times the reaction motion of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is displayed (for example, six times) is greater than the number of times of reaction motion of the mounted movable body 32 and the first non-mounted movable body M100 (for example, four times). By doing so, the first pseudo movable body display Z100 can simulate the same effect as the first non-mounted movable body M100 and the mounted movable body 32 without mounting the first non-mounted movable body M100. In addition, by displaying in an exaggerated manner the reaction motion that occurs when the first non-mounted movable body M100 moves to the first performance position or when the mounted movable body 32 moves to the performance position, the game It is possible to provide a performance that leaves a lasting impression on the audience.

In addition, in the characteristic part 241SG, the comparison between the predetermined movement amount in the reaction motion of the mounted movable body 32 and the first non-mounted movable body M100 and the specific movement amount in the reaction motion display of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is as follows. Although the first reaction movement and the reaction movement display were compared, it is also possible to compare any reaction movement from the second time onward with the reaction movement display, or the total or average movement amount of multiple reaction movements and the reaction movement. It may also be compared with the displayed total or average movement amount.

In addition, the reaction motion is an example in which the movable body jumps upward due to the reaction when it stops at the second position, but it also includes deformation or vibration of a predetermined part of the movable body due to the reaction. .

Next, as shown in FIG. 14-39(A), when moving the mounted movable body 32 from the production position to the origin position, or when moving the first non-mounted movable body M100 from the first production position to the first origin position. In this case, since drive sources such as the mounted movable body motors 202L, 202R and M101 are used, the performance control CPU 120 changes the control speed of the mounted movable body 32 and the first non-mounted movable body M100 from the timing tb1 when movement is started. The first period up to tb2 is increased, the period from timing tb2 to timing tb3 is constant, and the second period from timing tb3 to timing tb4 is decreased. In other words, the mounted movable body 32 and the first non-mounted movable body M100 accelerate until a first period elapses after starting movement, then move at a constant speed, and decelerate in a second period before the stop position. Stop.

On the other hand, the speed at which the first pseudo-movable object display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable object display Z200 are moved and displayed is from timing tb1 when they start moving to timing tb4 when they stop, as shown in FIG. 14-39(B). Since the first period for accelerating the movement display and the second period for decelerating the movement display are not necessary, the movement display of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is changed to the first non-mounted movable body M100. This can be performed more smoothly than the movement of the mounting movable body 32.

Next, the movement display of the first pseudo movable object display Z100 and the second pseudo movable object display Z200 will be explained using FIG. 14-40.

As shown in FIGS. 14-40 (A) to (C), when creating a video in which the first pseudo movable object display Z100 is moved and displayed from the first initial display position to the first effect display position, at least the first A first frame that is an input image for displaying the movable body display Z100 at the first initial display position, and a second frame that is an input image for displaying the first pseudo movable body display Z100 at the first effect display position. , is required.

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 14-40 (A') to (B'), when creating a video in which the second pseudo movable object display Z200 is moved and displayed from the first specific initial display position to the first specific effect display position. , at least a first frame that is an input image for displaying the second pseudo movable body display Z200 at the first specific initial display position, and a first frame that is an input image for displaying the second pseudo movable body display Z200 at the first specific effect display position. A second frame, which is an input image, is required.

As explained in FIG. 14-16, the moving display distance L2 from the first initial display position of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 to the first effect display position is the first specified movement distance of the second pseudo movable body display Z200. The moving display distance L3 is from the initial display position to the first specific effect display position, and although the moving display distance L2 is longer than the moving display distance L3, the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved from the first initial display position to the first effect. The time required to move and display the second pseudo movable body display Z200 from the first specific initial display position to the first specific effect display position is approximately 100 ms, while the time required to move and display the display to the display position is approximately 100 ms. Since the difference is 800 ms, the moving display from the first initial display position of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 to the first effect display position is better than the movement display from the first specific initial display position of the second pseudo movable body display Z200. 1 Faster than the moving display to the specific effect display position.

Here, when the effect control CPU 120 moves and displays the first pseudo movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first effect display position, the first frame shown in FIG. Although it is possible to display the images in the order of the second frame shown in 40(C), the frame rate would be lower and the movement would be choppy and unnatural.

Therefore, one interpolation frame shown in FIG. 14-40(B) is inserted between the first frame and the second frame as an input image for displaying the first pseudo movable object display Z100 at the first intermediate display position. The number of frames of the video is increased to increase the frame rate, and the moving display of the first pseudo-movable object display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first effect display position is performed for each display frame at the first initial display position, By performing this in the order of the first intermediate display position and the first effect display position, a natural and smooth moving display can be performed.

In this way, even when moving and displaying the first pseudo movable object display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first effect display position at high speed, at least one interpolation frame is inserted between the first frame and the second frame. By realizing a natural and smooth moving display, the first pseudo movable object display Z100 can be quickly moved and displayed without reducing visibility.

On the other hand, when the performance control CPU 120 moves and displays the second pseudo movable object display Z200 from the first specific initial display position to the first specific performance display position, the first frame shown in FIG. 14-40 (A'), Although displaying the frames in the order of the second frame shown in FIG. 14-40 (B') may be considered, the frame rate would be lower and the movement would be jerky and unnatural.

Therefore, between the first frame and the second frame, the second pseudo movable object display Z200 is displayed at a plurality of first intermediate display positions between the first specific initial display position and the first specific effect display position. A plurality of interpolation frames (not shown) are inserted as input images to increase the number of frames of the video and increase the frame rate to achieve a natural and smooth moving display, and the first identification of the second pseudo movable object display Z200 By performing a moving display from the initial display position to the first specific effect display position in the order of the first specific initial display position, each first intermediate display position, and the first specific effect display position for each display frame, the second The pseudo movable body display Z200 can be displayed moving at a speed slower than the first pseudo movable body display Z100 without reducing visibility.

Also, for example, in the preview performance B, the first pseudo movable object display Z100 is moved and displayed from the first initial display position to the first performance display position, or from the second initial display position to the second performance display position. When the moving display PBY-4 is executed, the second pseudo movable object display Z200 moves and is displayed from the second specific initial display position to the second specific effect display position or the second intermediate effect display position. 1. When PBY-2 is executed, the ratio of being controlled to the jackpot state (jackpot expectation level) is different, so the first pseudo movable object display Z100 and the second pseudo movable object display have different ratios of being controlled to the jackpot gaming state. The player can recognize the pseudo movable object display Z200 by the difference in speed of the moving display.

In addition, a pattern PBY-3 in which the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed from the first initial display position to the first effect display position, and PBY-4 in which the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed from the second initial display position to the second effect display position. When is executed, patterns PBY-1 and PBY-2 in which the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is moved and displayed from the second specific initial display position to the second specific effect display position or the second intermediate effect display position are executed. Since the ratio of being controlled to the jackpot state (jackpot expectation level) is higher than when the first pseudo movable object display Z100 is executed, attention can be drawn to the moving display of the first pseudo movable object display Z100.

In addition, in the characteristic section 241SG, when the first pseudo movable object display Z100 is moved and displayed from the first initial display position to the first effect display position on the image display device 5 and is stopped and displayed at the first effect display position, Although a form in which a reaction movement display (rebound display) of a predetermined amount of movement is displayed is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIGS. 14-34 (D) to (E), image display When the device 5 moves and displays the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 from the second initial display position to the second effect display position and stops and displays it at the second effect display position, a reaction movement display of a predetermined movement amount ( (bounce display) may also be performed.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 14-33(A) and (B), the second pseudo movable object display Z200 is moved and displayed from the second specific initial display position to the second intermediate effect display position on the image display device 5. When stopping and displaying at the second intermediate effect display position, or as shown in FIGS. When moving and displaying from the second specific performance display position to the second specific performance display position and stopping display at the second specific performance display position, a reaction movement display (bounce display) of a predetermined movement amount may be performed.

In addition, the reaction action display performed when the second pseudo movable body display Z200 moves from the second specific initial display position to the second intermediate effect display position or the second specific effect display position in the preview effect B is better than the reaction movement display that is performed during the preview effect B. It is preferable that the amount of movement is larger than the reaction movement display performed when the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is moved and displayed from the first specific initial display position to the first specific effect display position in the effect A. By doing so, the moving amount of the preview effect B is larger than that of the preview effect A, so that it can be moved and displayed in a more realistic manner.

In addition, the reaction action display that is performed when the first pseudo movable body display Z100 moves from the first initial display position to the first performance display position after notification of the jackpot of the pattern PBY-3 of the preview performance B or the decisive performance. However, it is preferable that the amount of movement is larger than the reaction movement display performed when the first pseudo movable object display Z100 is moved and displayed from the second initial display position to the second effect display position in pattern PBY-4 of preview effect B. . By doing so, the reaction motion display is larger when the display is moved downward than when it is displayed while moving upward, so that the display can be moved in a more realistic manner.

(action/effect)
As explained above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature section 241SG, the direction in which the first pseudo movable body display Z100 moves from the first initial display position to the first presentation position, and the direction in which the mounted movable body 32 moves from the origin position The direction of movement from to the production position is a common downward direction, and the movement amount L2 per unit time TL2 of the first pseudo movable object display Z100 is greater than the movement amount L1A per unit time TL2 of the mounted movable object 32. big.
According to this feature, the first pseudo movable body display Z100 can perform an impactful performance that is faster than the movement of the mounted movable body 32, thereby surprising the player.
Furthermore, it is possible to move and display at a speed that is difficult to achieve with the mounted movable body 32, or to move and display at a plurality of speeds, so it is possible to diversify the effects.

Although the feature section 241SG exemplifies a mode in which the movement display of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 and the movement speed of the mounted movable body 32 are compared, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first It may be a comparison between the movement display of the pseudo movable body display Z100 and the movement of the first non-mounted movable body M100, or a comparison between the movement display of the second pseudo movable body display Z200 and the movement of the second non-mounted movable body M200. It may also be a comparison of speed with movement. In other words, if the speed of the moving display of the pseudo movable body display and the movement of the movable body are compared, the types of the pseudo movable body display and the movable body to be compared may be arbitrarily changed.

In addition, the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is a display imitating the first non-mounted movable body M100 that performs a reaction motion of a predetermined amount of movement when it moves from the first origin position to the first performance position, and The control CPU 120 moves the first pseudo movable body display Z100 up and down between the first initial display position corresponding to the first origin position and the first effect display position corresponding to the first effect position on the image display device 5. When moving and displaying the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first effect display position and stopping and displaying it at the first effect display position, the first pseudo movable object display Z100 can be displayed by moving in a predetermined movement amount. A reaction movement display (bounce display) is performed, and the movement amount L12 of the first reaction movement display is performed when the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed from the first initial display position to the first effect display position. is larger than the movement amount L13 of the first reaction motion display performed when the first non-mounted movable body M100 moves and displays from the first origin position to the first effect position.
According to this feature, the first pseudo movable body display Z100 can simulate the same effect as the first non-mounted movable body M100 without mounting the first non-mounted movable body M100, and By displaying the reaction motion that occurs when the first non-mounted movable body M100 moves to the first performance position in an exaggerated manner, it is possible to provide a performance that leaves a lasting impression on the player.

In addition, although the feature section 241SG exemplifies a form in which the reaction movement display of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 and the movement amount of the reaction movement of the first non-mounted movable body M100 are compared, the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, it may be a comparison between the reaction movement display of the second pseudo movable body display Z200 and the movement amount of the reaction movement of the second non-mounted movable body M200, or the first pseudo movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo movable body It may be a comparison between the reaction movement display of display Z200 and the reaction movement of the mounted movable body 32. In other words, when comparing the movement amount between the reaction motion display of the pseudo movable body display and the reaction motion of the movable body, the type of the pseudo movable body display and the movable body to be compared may be arbitrarily changed.

Further, during the variable display period of the symbol based on the variation pattern of super reach β or super reach γ, development effect A using the mounted movable body 32 and development effect B using the second pseudo movable body display Z200 are executed. In this case, the ratio of being controlled to a jackpot game state (jackpot expectation level) is higher than when the development performance B is executed without the development performance A being executed.
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the fact that the developed performance A, which is a movable body performance, and the developed performance B, which is a pseudo movable body display performance, are executed.
It should be noted that when the development effect A using the mounted movable body 32 and the development effect B using the second pseudo movable body display Z200 are executed, the development effect B is executed without the development effect A being executed. The phrase "the ratio of being controlled to the jackpot gaming state is higher than when the game is executed" includes the case where the ratio of being controlled to the jackpot gaming state is 100% when the advanced performance A and the advanced performance B are executed.

In addition, there is a preview effect A that foretells the possibility (expectation level) of the variable display result becoming a jackpot, a development effect B that informs that the result will develop into a strong super reach effect, and a suggestion that the development effect B will be executed. In the preview performance A, after moving and displaying the second pseudo movable object display Z200 from the first specific initial display position to the first specific performance display position, the first specific performance display can be executed. from the position to the first specific initial display position and then hide it, and in the developed effect B, after displaying the second pseudo movable body display Z200 at the first specific effect display position, from the first specific effect display position It is hidden without moving to the first specific initial display position, and the second pseudo movable object display Z200, which is displayed at the first specific initial display position before the execution of the development effect B, is hidden. At this time, the character image Z310 can be displayed in the display area including the first specific effect display position.
According to this feature, in the preview performance A, the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is displayed moving in the same way as a movable body as a structure, so it is possible to control the second pseudo movable body display Z200 to an advantageous state without giving the player a sense of discomfort. On the other hand, in the development suggestion effect, the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 gives priority to the display of the character image Z310 over moving and displaying it in the same way as the movable body, and moves from the first specific effect display position. Since it is hidden without returning to the first specific initial display position, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the suggestion of execution of the advanced effect B.

In addition, it is possible to perform a deciding performance that informs whether or not the jackpot game state is controlled, and a developing performance B that notifies that the determining performance will be executed after developing into a strong super reach performance. When moving and displaying the second pseudo movable body display Z200 in B, after moving and displaying the second pseudo movable body display Z200 from the first specific initial display position to the first specific effect display position, the first specific effect display The reach title image Z51 is moved from the position to the first specific initial display position and is hidden without being displayed, and the display area including the first specific effect display position is changed to display the reach title image Z51 that suggests the execution of the advanced effect B. When moving and displaying the first pseudo movable object display Z100 in a fixed effect, after moving and displaying the first pseudo movable object display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first effect display position, the corresponding The display is moved from the first effect display position to the first initial display position and then hidden.
According to this feature, before the decisive effect is executed, the second pseudo movable object display Z200 gives priority to displaying the suggestion image over moving and displaying it in the same way as a movable object as a structure. Since the display is hidden without returning from the position to the first display position, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the suggestion of execution of the decisive performance, while in the decisive performance, the first pseudo movable object display Z100 is the same as the movable Since the information is displayed in a moving manner, it is possible to draw attention to the information that is advantageous to the player without giving the player a sense of discomfort.
In addition, the feature section 241SG exemplifies a form in which the second pseudo-movable object display Z200 is moved and displayed in the developed effect B (specific effect), and the first pseudo-movable object display Z100 is moved and displayed in the final effect (special effect). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a common pseudo movable object display may be moved between the specific performance and the special performance.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 displays the movement of the first pseudo-movable object display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first performance display position for each display frame, at the first initial display position, at the first intermediate display position, and at the first intermediate display position. and the first effect display position, and a specific image ( For example, it is possible to display an effect image Z71) in which glass is cracked and an image Z71A showing a plurality of glass fragments is scattered.
According to this feature, the first pseudo-movable object display Z100 can be quickly moved and displayed without reducing visibility, and the moving display can be emphasized by a specific image to give a favorable impression to the player. Can be attached.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 displays the movement of the first pseudo-movable object display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first performance display position for each display frame, at the first initial display position, at the first intermediate display position, and at the first intermediate display position. and the first effect display position, and the moving display from the first initial display position of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 to the first effect display position is the first specific initial display of the second pseudo movable body display Z200. A pattern PBY-3 in which the first pseudo movable object display Z100 is moved and displayed from the first initial display position to the first effect display position in the preview effect B faster than the moving display from the position to the first specific effect display position. When PBY-4, which is moved and displayed from the second initial display position to the second effect display position, is executed, and when the second pseudo movable body display Z200 moves from the second specific initial display position to the second specific effect display position or The rate at which the jackpot state is controlled (jackpot expectation level) differs depending on when the patterns PBY-1 and PBY-2 that are moved and displayed at the intermediate effect display position are executed.
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention to which of the first pseudo-movable object display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable object display Z200 is displayed in a moving manner, and the ratio of being controlled to the jackpot game state is different. The player can recognize the first pseudo movable object display Z100 and the second pseudo movable object display Z200 by the difference in the speed of the moving display.
In addition, in the preview performance B, a pattern PBY-3 in which the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is displayed moving from the first initial display position to the first performance display position, and a pattern PBY-3 in which the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is displayed moving from the second initial display position to the second performance display position When the pattern PBY-4 is executed, and when the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is executed from the second specific initial display position to the second specific effect display position or the second intermediate effect display position, a jackpot is achieved. The ratio of being controlled by the state (jackpot expectation level) is different when the ratio of being controlled to the jackpot state is 100% when pattern PBY-3 or pattern PBY-4 is executed in preview performance B, and pattern PBY- If the ratio of being controlled to a jackpot gaming state when 1 or pattern PBY-2 is executed is 0%, or when pattern PBY-1 or pattern PBY-2 is executed in advance presentation B, it is controlled to a jackpot state. This includes a case where the percentage of winning is 100% and the percentage of being controlled to a jackpot gaming state when pattern PBY-3 or PBY-4 is executed is 0%.

In addition, by making the first pseudo movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo movable body display Z200 display images having not only effect display parts Z100A and Z200A but also mechanism display parts Z100B and Z200B, etc., movable objects operated by a drive mechanism can be displayed. While it is possible to realize a movable body display performance similar to the movable body display by expressing the body more realistically, regarding the moving display, it is not only possible to display the body moving in the same manner as the movable body. By enabling a moving display that is difficult to realize due to the complicated mechanism and increased cost, the interest of the performance can be suitably improved.

In addition, in the characteristic part 241SG, as a movement display that is difficult to realize with a movable body, high-speed movement, deformed display, and returning from the effect display position to the initial display position are erased without display (hidden). However, by realistically expressing the display mode of the pseudo movable object display and unrealistically displaying the moving display, it is possible to provide an unexpected effect.

In particular, it is possible to hide or display the pseudo-movable body display that has been moved to the performance display position at a desired timing, so for example, a movable body as a structure that has been moved to the performance display position can be returned to its original position. This has the effect of increasing the degree of freedom in design of a performance, such as avoiding a decrease in visibility due to other performance images being hidden, and making it possible to immediately start the next performance. play.

Furthermore, the movement amount L12 of the first reaction action display performed when the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed from the first initial display position to the first effect display position is smaller than that of the first non-mounted movable body M100. is larger than the movement amount L13 of the first reaction motion display performed when the movement is displayed from the first origin position to the first effect position, the first pseudo movable body display Z100 causes the first non-mounted movable body M100 to move and display. It is possible to simulate the same effect as the first non-equipped movable body M100 without installing it, and also exaggerate the reaction motion that occurs when the first non-equipped movable body M100 moves to the first performance position. By displaying the game in this manner, it is possible to provide a performance that leaves a lasting impression on the player.

In addition, since the movement display distance L2 from the first initial display position to the first effect display position is longer than the movement distance L1 from the origin position to the effect position, the first pseudo movable object display Z100 is installed. Since the moving speed is faster and the moving distance is longer than that of the movable body 32, it is possible to provide a performance that leaves a lasting impression on the player.

In addition, the pseudo movable body display includes effect display parts Z100A, Z200A and mechanism display parts Z100B, Z200B, and in the moving display of the pseudo movable body display, the mechanism display parts Z100B, Z200B are larger than the effect display parts Z100A, Z200A. By reaching the first effect display position first, the pseudo movable body display can be moved and displayed in a more realistic manner.

Furthermore, the amount of movement L2 per unit time TL2 of the first pseudo movable object display Z100 is larger than the amount of movement L1A per unit time TL2 of the mounted movable object 32, which makes the first pseudo movable object display Z100 more realistic. It can be moved and displayed in various ways.

In addition, the moving period of the mounted movable body 32 between the origin position and the production position includes a first period in which the speed increases and a second period in which the speed decreases, and the movement display of the pseudo movable body display By not including the first period and the second period, the pseudo movable object display can be moved more smoothly than the movable object.

In addition, after moving and displaying the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 to the first performance position, the performance control CPU 120 causes the mounted movable body LED 208 to emit light and the light-emitting display section Z108A to emit light at approximately the same cycle. , it is possible to draw the player's attention to the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 moved and displayed at the first effect display position.

In addition, when the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is being moved and displayed, the performance control CPU 120 does not display the light-emitting display part Z108A to emit light, thereby preventing the eye from seeing the incomplete first pseudo-movable body display Z100 that is being displayed in a moving manner. By not standing up, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the production effect.

In addition, after moving and displaying the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 to the first performance position, the performance control CPU 120 causes the mounted movable body LED 208 to emit light and the light-emitting display section Z108A to emit light at approximately the same cycle. , it is possible to move and display the first pseudo movable body display Z100 in a more realistic manner.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 can move and display the second pseudo movable body display Z200 from the second specific initial display position to the second intermediate performance display position or the second specific performance display position, and can display the second pseudo movable body display Z200 in the preview performance A. The downward direction in which the pseudo movable body display Z200 is moved and displayed from the first specific initial display position to the first specific effect display position, and the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is moved from the second specific initial display position to the second specific direction in preview effect B. By being different from the right direction of moving and displaying to the effect display position, one pseudo movable object display can be moved and displayed from multiple display positions, allowing players to create unexpected effects that are difficult to achieve with movable objects. can be provided to

Further, after moving and displaying the first pseudo movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first effect display position, the effect control CPU 120 controls the direction in which the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed from the first initial display position to the first effect display position. By being able to move and display in a direction different from the above, it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected performance that is difficult to realize with a movable body.

(Modification 1)
Next, a first modification of the characteristic portion 241SG will be described based on FIG. 14-41. In FIG. 14-41, (A) to (D) are diagrams showing modification example 1 of the characteristic portion 241SG.

In the characteristic section 241SG, as explained in FIG. 14-25, in the preview performance A, after moving and displaying the second pseudo movable body display Z200 from the first specific initial display position to the first specific performance display position, An example is shown in which the display is moved from the first specific performance display position to the first specific initial display position and then erased, and then, as developed performance A, the mounted movable body 32 moves from the origin position to the performance position.

Here, as shown in FIG. 14-41(D), the movable range of the mounted movable body 32 and the movable range of the second pseudo movable body display Z200 partially overlap, that is, the mounted movable body 32 and the movable range of the second pseudo movable body display Z200 overlap. When the movable body 32 and the second pseudo movable body display Z200 moved and displayed at the first specific effect display position overlap, the effect control CPU 120 moves the mounted movable body 32 to the effect position and displays the second pseudo When the moving display of the movable body display Z200 to the first specific effect display position is executed in a common period, the mounted movable body 32 overlaps on the front side of the second pseudo movable body display Z200, and the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is displayed. As it becomes difficult to visually recognize the second pseudo-movable object display Z200, it becomes easy to understand that it is a display object rather than a structure, and the interest of the performance decreases.

In such a case, as shown in FIG. 14-41(A), the second pseudo movable object display Z200 is displayed at the first specific initial display position and moved from the first specific initial display position to the first specific effect display position. After being displayed (see Figure 14-41 (B)), by moving from the first specific effect display position to the first specific initial display position and erasing it without displaying it (see Figure 14-41 (C)), As shown in -41(D), the mounted movable body 32 that has moved from the origin position to the performance position as the development effect A may be prevented from overlapping with the second pseudo movable body display Z200.

(Modification 2)
Next, a second modification of the characteristic portion 241SG will be described based on FIG. 14-42. In FIG. 14-42, (A) to (H) are diagrams showing a second modification of the characteristic portion 241SG.

In the characteristic portion 241SG, the direction in which the mounted movable body 32 moves from the origin position to the production position and the direction in which the first pseudo movable body display Z100 moves and displays from the first initial display position to the first production display position are common. Although the present invention is not limited to this, for example, the mounted movable body 401 as the second modification is in the first position and in the lower direction than the first position. a direction in which the pseudo movable object display Z402 as the second modification moves between the first display position and a second display position above the first display position; , are in a common direction (e.g., vertical direction), the moving display of the pseudo movable body display Z402 from the first display position to the second display position is better than the movement display from the first position of the mounted movable body 401 to the second display position. It just needs to be faster than moving to the location.

Also, the direction in which the mounted movable body 401 moves from the first position to the second position (downward) and the direction in which the pseudo movable body display Z402 moves from the first initial display position to the first effect display position (upward). and may be in different directions.

Further, in the characteristic section 241SG, the movement of the mounted movable body 32 and the movement display of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo movable body display Z200 are not performed in a common period, but the present invention is not limited to this, and by performing the movement of the mounted movable body 401 and the movement display of the pseudo movable body display Z402 in a common period, as in the present modification example 2, the mounted movable body 401 and the pseudo movable body display Z402 can be moved. It may also be possible to perform an effect using the movable object display Z402.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 14-42, the mounting movable body 401 as the second modification is a structure on which the character "A" is displayed, and The mounted movable bodies 501L and 501R in Modification 2 are movable between a first position and a second position below the first position, and are located at first predetermined positions on the left and right sides of the display area of the image display device 5. and a second predetermined position closer to the center than the first predetermined position, and the pseudo movable body display Z402 as modification example 2 can display the character "BODY", and the image display device The display can be moved between a first display position at the bottom of the display area of No. 5 and a second display position above the first display position. Note that detailed illustrations and explanations of the drive mechanisms of the movable mounting body 401 and the movable mounting bodies 501L and 501R will be omitted.

For example, when executing a performance using the mounted movable bodies 401, 501L, 501R and the pseudo movable body display Z402 in the aforementioned preview performances A, B, advanced performances A, B, etc., the performance control CPU 120 first As shown in FIG. 14-42(A), with the mounted movable body 401 and the mounted movable bodies 501L and 501R waiting in the first position, the pseudo movable body display is displayed as shown in FIG. 14-42(B). After Z402 is displayed at the first display position, the pseudo movable body display Z402 is moved and displayed from the first display position to the second display position, as shown in FIG. 14-42(C).

Next, as shown in FIG. 14-42(D), the mounting movable body 401 is moved from the first position to the second position. Then, when the mounted movable body 401 moves to a position close to the pseudo movable body display Z402 displayed at the second display position, the pseudo movable body display Z402 is moved and displayed toward the first display position. At this time, it is preferable to move and display the mounted movable body 401 on the pseudo movable body display Z402 so that it does not overlap.

Next, as shown in FIG. 14-42(E), when the mounted movable body 401 moves to the second position and the pseudo movable body display Z402 moves to the first display position, the mounted movable body 401 moves to the first position. The pseudo-combined state is the closest to the movable object display Z402 and the characters "combined" can be recognized. Then, as shown in FIG. 14-42(F), while maintaining the pseudo-combined state of the mounted movable body 401 and the pseudo movable body display Z402, the mounted movable body 401 is moved upward and the pseudo movable body display Z402 is moved upward. By moving the display upward and further moving the mounted movable bodies 501L and 501R to a second predetermined position, it is announced that the performance will develop due to the successful pseudo-combination.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 14-42 (G), the mounted movable body 401 and the mounted movable bodies 501L and 501R are moved to the first position or the first predetermined position, and the pseudo movable body display Z402 is moved to the first display position. The image is moved and displayed in a manner in which the image is divided into different first specific display positions (for example, positions on the left and right sides), and then erased in a manner in which the image is framed out to the left and right of the screen or faded out.

On the other hand, if it is decided to notify that the pseudo combination is not successful and the performance will not develop, etc., as shown in FIG. 14-42 (D), the mounted movable body 401 moves downward and the pseudo movement By decelerating and stopping the downward movement of the mounted movable body 401 while displaying the downward movement of the body display Z402, and displaying the pseudo movable body display Z402 with the upper part destroyed, It is reported that the pseudo-combination is not successful and the performance does not develop. In this way, the pseudo movable object display Z402 can easily realize effects that are difficult to realize with a movable object as a structure.

(Modification 3)
Next, a third modification of the characteristic portion 241SG will be described based on FIG. 14-43. In FIG. 14-43, (A) to (C) are diagrams showing a third modification of the characteristic portion 241SG.

In the feature section 241SG, the effect control CPU 120 exemplifies a form in which the first pseudo-movable object display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable object display Z200 can be moved and displayed between the first display position and the second display position. , the present invention is not limited to this, and is not limited to one that can perform reciprocating display in one direction such as the vertical direction or the horizontal direction. For example, the production control CPU 120 may be A) As shown in (B), after moving and displaying the first pseudo movable object display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first effect display position, as shown in FIG. 14-43 (C), the first It may be possible to move and display in a direction different from the direction in which the movement and display are performed from the initial display position to the first effect display position.

As shown in FIG. 14-43 (C), at the first effect display position, only the effect display section Z200A is vertically rotated around the rotation axis pointing in the left-right direction. It is preferable to be able to perform various types of moving display, such as different rotational movement displays, and moving display in a manner that moves in a direction different from one direction (for example, the depth direction). By doing so, it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected performance that is difficult to realize with a movable body.

Although the characteristic portion 241SG in the embodiment of this invention has been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these embodiments, and changes and additions may be made without departing from the gist of this invention. are also included in this invention.

(Explanation regarding transformation and application)
In the feature section 241SG, an example is given in which the mounted movable body 32 is applied as a movable body mounted on the pachinko game machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and multiple movable bodies other than the mounted movable body 32 are used. A movable body may be mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1. Moreover, it is not limited to the board-side movable body provided on the game board 2, but may also be a frame-side movable body provided on the game machine frame 3 or an opening/closing door that can open and close the game machine frame 3. A pseudo movable body display imitating the side movable body may be movably displayed. Further, as the board-side movable body, it may be possible to display a pseudo movable body display that imitates a variable winning device or the like provided in connection with the game.

In addition, in the feature section 241SG, an example is illustrated in which a first non-mounted movable body M100 and a second non-mounted movable body M200 are applied as movable bodies that were scheduled to be installed in the pachinko game machine 1 but were not installed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and movable bodies other than the first non-mounted movable body M100 and the second non-mounted movable body M200 were scheduled to be installed in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but they were not installed. Good too.

Further, in the characteristic portion 241SG, when erasing the first pseudo movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo movable body display Z200, the display is exemplified in such a manner that they are gradually faded out. The present invention is not limited to this, and an effect image may be displayed to emphasize that the image has been erased, or erasing may be performed using other methods.

In addition, in the characteristic section 241SG, the movement distance L1 of the mounted movable body 32 from the origin position to the production position is the movement display distance L2 of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first production display position. A common effect image Z71 in which the glass is cracked and glass fragments are scattered is displayed when the mounted movable body 32 moves and when the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed. Although the form in which sound effects are output is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the moving distance L1 of the mounted movable body 32 from the origin position to the production position is determined by the first pseudo movable body display Z100. An effect image that is longer than the movement display distance L2 from the initial display position to the first effect display position and that has different modes when the mounted movable body 32 moves and when the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed. A different sound effect may be output at the same time as the display. By doing so, the movement of the mounted movable body 32 can be highlighted using the movement display of the pseudo movable body display.

In addition, in the feature section 241SG, during the variable display period of the super reach, the movement of the mounted movable body 32 can be executed up to two times in the development effect A and the determined effect, and the movement display of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is , the preview performance B and the decision performance can be executed up to two times, and the moving display of the second pseudo movable object display Z200 can be performed up to four times: the preview performance A, the preview performance B, the development suggestion performance, and the development performance B. Although a certain form has been illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the movement of the movable body or the movement display of the pseudo movable body display may be executed a number of times other than the above-mentioned number of times.

Furthermore, when the movable object is allowed to move a first number of times in one variable display period, it is possible to allow the pseudo-movable object display to move a second number of times, which is greater than the first number, in one variable display period. preferable. By doing this, instead of increasing the chances of performing the movable object display too much and lowering the jackpot expectation level, by increasing the opportunity to perform the pseudo-movable object display, the performance will be reduced. This can prevent you from losing interest.

Furthermore, in addition to the above-mentioned multiple performances, for example, during symbol promotion in the re-drawing after jackpot confirmation notification, or during jackpot production, the pseudo movable body display may be displayed moving, and the pseudo movable body displayed at that time may be moved. The movable body display may be a pseudo movable body display different from the first pseudo movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo movable body display Z200.

In addition, preview performance A is applied as a special suggestion performance that suggests that the player will be controlled in an advantageous state, and development performance B is applied as a notification performance that informs the player of contents that are advantageous to the player, thereby indicating that the notification performance will be executed. A development suggestion performance is applied as a predetermined performance to suggest, a decision performance is applied as a special performance to notify that the control is in an advantageous state, and the special performance is suggested to be executed before the special performance is executed. Although a form in which preview performance B is applied as the specific performance has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and various performances other than those described above can be applied. Moreover, although these various effects can be performed in one variable display period of super reach, they may be effects that can be performed over a plurality of variable display periods.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, content that is advantageous to the player includes pseudo-runs, jackpots, small hits, reach, hold-up runs, chance-up effects, pre-read notice effects, time-savers and misses, and ceiling-time-savers control (described later). , variable display results, controls, and effects may be included. Further, in the slot machine, chance zone (CZ) winnings, assist time (AT) winnings, replay time (RT) winnings, bonus winnings, etc. may be included.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 241SG, when starting the display of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo movable body display Z200, the game effect lamps 9, etc. provided on the game board 2 and the gaming machine frame 3, etc. By reducing the brightness or turning off the lights, the display of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo movable body display Z200 can be made conspicuous, while the display of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo movable body display Z200 can be made conspicuous. When erasing, by increasing the brightness or turning on the game effect lamp 9 provided on the game board 2 or the gaming machine frame 3, the game on the first pseudo movable body display Z100 or the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is erased. can distract people's consciousness.

In addition, in the feature section 241SG, while it is possible to adjust the light intensity of the game effect lamps 9 and the like provided on the game board 2 and the game machine frame 3 by the player's operation, the first pseudo movable body display Z100 It is preferable that the light amount adjustment of the light emitting display part Z108A and the light emitting display parts Z208A to Z208E of the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is made impossible by the player's operation. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the appearance of the pseudo movable object display from being impaired or from becoming inconspicuous.

In addition, in the feature section 241SG, when hiding the second pseudo movable body display Z200 displayed at the first specific initial display position in the development suggestion production, the display area including the first specific production display position is Although the embodiment has been exemplified in which the character image Z310 is displayed with priority as the notification-related image, the present invention is not limited to this, and the notification-related image may be an image related to the notification effect (for example, development effect B). If available, images other than character images (for example, images imitating smoke, fog, waves, etc.) may be used.

In addition, in the characteristic section 241SG, in the advanced production B, a mode is shown in which the reach title image Z51 is displayed as a suggestion image suggesting execution of the final production in the manner at the start of display, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, images other than the reach title image may be used as the suggestion image (for example, a character image that appears in a strong super reach effect or a decisive effect) as long as it suggests the execution of a specific effect. .

Furthermore, in the characteristic section 241SG, a mode has been exemplified in which the first pseudo-movable object display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable object display Z200 can be displayed in separate periods, but the present invention is not limited to this. Alternatively, a plurality of pseudo movable object displays may be displayed moving during a common period. In this case, for example, the movable and displayable range of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 and the movable and displayable range of the second pseudo movable body display Z200 overlap, and the first pseudo movable body display Z100 overlaps in the overlapping area. and the second pseudo movable body display Z200, by displaying one of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo movable body display Z200 on a display layer on the front side of the other, Since it is possible to make people conscious of the front and rear positional relationship, it is possible to realize a more realistic performance.

Further, in the characteristic section 241SG, it is taken into consideration that the mechanism display sections Z100B and Z200B of the first pseudo movable object display Z100 and the second pseudo movable object display Z200 are displayed cut off at the edge of the display area of the image display device 5. Then, the mounted movable body, center decorative frame, etc. may be arranged so as to cover up the part where the display of the mechanism display section of the pseudo movable body display starts in the display area of the image display device 5, or the mounted movable body The part where the display of the mechanism display section of the pseudo movable body display starts may be made difficult to see by moving the body.

In addition, in the feature section 241SG, the display result of the variable display has been exemplified as including "time saving error"; The variable display will be displayed a specified number of times (for example, 900 times, etc.) from the time when one of the following is established: performing a clearing process to clear the counter and buffer, controlling the game to a jackpot gaming state, and displaying the display result as a time-saving result. ) Based on what has been done, it may be possible to execute ceiling time saving control that controls the time saving state without going through the jackpot game state. Note that the internal count of the specified number of times is reset when the predetermined condition is satisfied, and the number of time reductions in the time reduction state due to the ceiling time reduction control (for example, 900 times) is different from the number of time reductions in the normal time reduction state (for example, 100 times). may be different.

When the ceiling time saving control as described above is executed and the number of executions of the variable display reaches the specified number of times without the above predetermined condition being satisfied, the effect control CPU 120 controls the first pseudo movable body display Z100 and the second It may be possible to perform a moving display of a pseudo movable object display such as the pseudo movable object display Z200. In this way, it may be possible to perform the moving display of the pseudo movable object display in each notification such as notification of a jackpot, notification of a time-saving hit or loss, notification of ceiling time-saving control, etc., and in each notification, the type of pseudo-movable object display and the moving display may be executed. The aspects may also be different.

In addition, in the feature section 241SG, the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is displayed in a moving manner as a notification of a jackpot, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the variable display result may be a small win or a time-saving display. In the case of a miss or when the above-mentioned ceiling time saving control is executed, the first pseudo movable object display Z100 and the second pseudo movable object display Z200 are moved to notify you of a small hit or a loss of time saving, and to perform the ceiling time saving control. While notifying that the execution condition has been met, if the variable display result indicates a jackpot, the jackpot may be notified by moving the mounted movable body 32.

In addition, a common type of pseudo-movable object display is used to notify when the display result of the variable display is a small hit or time-saving loss, and when the display result of the variable display is a jackpot, but the movable display The embodiments may be different. In addition, when the display result of the variable display is a small hit or time-saving loss, and when the display result of the variable display is a jackpot, a pseudo-movable object display is used to notify, but the type of pseudo-movable object display is It may be different.

Further, in the characteristic section 241SG, a so-called pachinko game machine that can be controlled to a variable state after the end of a jackpot game is applied as an example of the pachinko game machine, but the present invention is not limited to this. It may also be a so-called 1 type 2 type gaming machine that can be controlled to a jackpot gaming state by generating a V prize triggered by a small win in a time saving state after the end of a jackpot game, and the gaming characteristics can be changed in various ways. be.

Further, in the embodiment, a pachinko game machine 1 is illustrated as an example of a game machine, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a predetermined number of game balls are The loaned balls that are recirculated inside the machine and are lent out in response to a player's lending request and the number of prize balls given in response to winnings are added up, while the number of game balls used in the game is counted. The present invention can also be applied to so-called enclosed game machines in which subtraction is performed and stored. In these enclosed gaming machines, scores and points are awarded to the player instead of game balls, so these awarded scores and points correspond to the gaming value.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, a spherical game ball (pachinko ball) is used as an example of the game medium, but the game medium is not limited to a spherical game medium, and for example, non-spherical game balls such as medals, It may be a medium.

Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, a pachinko game machine is applied as an example of a game machine, but a game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using, for example, a game value. At the same time, one game ends when a variable display result is derived to a variable display device capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of symbols, each of which can be identified. It is also applicable to slot machines that allow winnings to occur.

The gaming machine of the present invention can also be applied to an enclosed gaming machine, a slot machine, etc. in which game media are enclosed and points are awarded based on the occurrence of winnings. Furthermore, the gaming machine that allows games may be any machine that allows at least playing games, and is not limited to pachinko gaming machines or slot machines, but may be general gaming machines.

1 Pachinko game machine, 2 Game board, 3 Game machine frame, 4A First special symbol display device, 4B Second special symbol display device, 5 Image display device, 5C, 5L, 5R Decorative symbol display area, 6A Winning ball device , 6B variable winning ball device, 7 special variable winning ball device, 8L, 8R speaker, 9 game effect lamp, 10 general winning hole, 11 main board, 12 performance control board, 13 audio control board, 14 lamp control board, 15 relay Board, 21 Gate switch, 22A First starting port switch, 22B Second starting port switch, 23 Count switch, 25A First holding indicator, 25B Second holding indicator, 25C Normal figure holding indicator, 30 Batted ball operation handle, 31A stick controller, 31B push button, 32 movable body, 35A controller sensor unit, 35B push sensor, 41 passage gate, 81, 82 solenoid, 100 game control microcomputer, 101, 121 ROM, 102, 122 RAM, 104, 124 Random number circuit, 106 RTC, 110 switch circuit, 111 output circuit, 123 display control section.

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player based on a display result of a variable display becoming a specific display result,
a firing means capable of firing game media according to a player's operation;
A guide display means for displaying a guide prompting the player to fire the game medium toward the second region of the first region and the second region;
a guide light emitting means that emits a guide light to prompt the player to fire the game medium toward the second area by moving a light emitting part of the light emitting means;
Display means capable of moving and displaying a pseudo movable body display from a first display position to a second display position different from the first display position;
a movable body that is movable from a first position to a second position different from the first position;
A performance execution means capable of performing the performance,
a state control means capable of controlling a special state more advantageous than the normal state after the control of the advantageous state is completed ;
The guide display includes a first guide display and a second guide display,
The guide display means includes:
During a predetermined period in which a start effect regarding the start of control of the advantageous state is being executed based on the display result of the variable display becoming the specific display result in the normal state , the start effect is a part of the start effect. Displaying the second guidance during a first predetermined period before the display of the name of the advantageous state is completed;
performing the first guide display and the second guide display in a second predetermined period after completion of displaying the name of the advantageous state during the predetermined period and after the first predetermined period;
In a period after the predetermined period, the first guidance display is terminated while the second guidance display is performed;
Displaying the second guidance in the special state after the control of the advantageous state is completed;
not performing the first guide display when the start effect is being executed based on the display result of the variable display becoming the specific display result in the special state;
The guide light emitting means is configured to emit the light when executing the first guide display when the start effect is executed based on the display result of the variable display becoming the specific display result in the normal state. After extinguishing the means, emitting the guide light,
The performance execution means is
A pseudo movable body display effect can be performed in which the pseudo movable body display is moved and displayed from the first display position to the second display position;
A gaming machine characterized by: